<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 nzetc-p5.xsd" xml:id="BucIntr" xml:lang="en">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc xml:id="fileDesc-0001">
      <titleStmt>
        <title type="marc245">An Introduction to Polynesian Anthropology</title>
        <title type="sort">Introduction to Polynesian Anthropology</title>
        <title type="gmd">[electronic resource]</title>
        <author>Te Rangi Hiroa (Sir Peter Henry Buck)</author>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0001">
          <resp>Creation of machine-readable version</resp>
          <name key="name-401529" type="organisation">Planman Technologies</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0002">
          <resp>Creation of digital images</resp>
          <name key="name-401529" type="organisation">Planman Technologies</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0003">
          <resp>Conversion to TEI.2-conformant markup</resp>
          <name key="name-401529" type="organisation">Planman Technologies</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0004">
          <resp>TEI header, proofing, editing, and name markup</resp>
          <name key="name-141367" type="person">Edmund King</name>
        </respStmt>
      </titleStmt>
      <extent>ca. 558 kilobytes</extent>
      <publicationStmt>
        <publisher>New Zealand Electronic Text Centre</publisher>
        <pubPlace>Wellington, New Zealand</pubPlace>
        <idno type="etc">Modern English, BucIntr</idno>
        <availability status="unknown">
          <p>Publicly accessible</p>
          <p n="public">URL: http://www.nzetc.org/collections.html</p>
          <p>copyright 2007, by Victoria University of Wellington</p>
        </availability>
        <date when="2008">2008</date>
      <idno type="vuw-bbid">35073</idno></publicationStmt>
      <sourceDesc xml:id="sourceDesc-0001">
        <biblFull>
          <titleStmt>
            <title>
              <name key="name-405060" type="work">An Introduction to Polynesian Anthropology</name>
            </title>
            <author>
              <name key="name-202886" type="person">Te Rangi Hiroa</name>
            </author>
          </titleStmt>
          <publicationStmt>
            <publisher>
              <name key="name-101718" type="organisation">Bernice P. Bishop Museum</name>
            </publisher>
            <pubPlace><name key="name-202877" type="place">Honolulu</name>, Hawaii</pubPlace>
            <date when="1945">1945</date>
            <publisher>
              <name key="name-405061" type="organisation">Kraus Reprint Co.</name>
            </publisher>
            <pubPlace>
              <name key="name-120382" type="place">New York</name>
            </pubPlace>
            <date when="1971">1971</date>
            <idno type="callno">Source copy consulted: Victoria University of Wellington, General Library Q11 B5 R 187</idno>
          </publicationStmt>
          <seriesStmt xml:id="seriesStmt-0001">
            <title>Bernice P. Bishop Museum Bulletin 187</title>
          </seriesStmt>
        </biblFull>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
    <encodingDesc>
      <projectDesc xml:id="projectDesc-0001">
        <p>Prepared for the <name key="name-121602" type="organisation">New Zealand Electronic Text Centre</name></p>
      </projectDesc>
      <editorialDecl>
        <p>All unambiguous end-of-line hyphens have been removed, and
          the trailing part of a word has been joined to the preceding
          line. Every effort has been made to preserve the Māori macron
          using unicode.</p>
        <p xml:id="ETC">Some keywords in the header are a local Electronic
          Text Centre scheme to aid in establishing analytical
          groupings.</p>
      </editorialDecl>
      <classDecl>
        <taxonomy xml:id="nzetc-subjects">
          <bibl>
            <title>NZETC Subject Headings</title>
          </bibl>
        </taxonomy>
      </classDecl>
    </encodingDesc>
    <profileDesc xml:id="profileDesc-0001">
      <textClass>
        <keywords scheme="http://www.nzetc.org/nzetc-subjects">
          <list>
            <item>
              <rs key="subject-000010" type="subject">Historical Māori and Pacific Islands</rs>
            </item>
          </list>
        </keywords>
      </textClass>
    </profileDesc>
    <revisionDesc xml:id="revisionDesc-0001">
      <change n="quickProof"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:31">15:53:31, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Text-proofing of a sample of the text</change>
      <change n="teiMarkup"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:33">15:53:33, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Conversion to TEI.2-conformat markup</change>
      <change n="scriptedMarkup"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:34">15:53:34, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Adding name markup</change>
      <change n="encodingDesc"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:36">15:53:36, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Addition of encodingDesc</change>
      <change n="addBibls"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:37">15:53:37, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Addition of bibls</change>
      <change n="assembleImages"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:38">15:53:38, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Assembled all images</change>
      <change n="derivativeCreation"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:39">15:53:39, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Creation of derivative images</change>
      <change n="teiValidation"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:41">15:53:41, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Validation of TEI</change>
      <change n="nameValidation"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:41">15:53:41, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Validation of names</change>
      <change n="utf8Conversion"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:47">15:53:47, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Conversion to Unicode (utf-8)</change>
      <change n="makeProduction"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:48">15:53:48, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Promotion to production</change>
      <change n="harvestTopicMap"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:50">15:53:50, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Harvest into Topic Map</change>
      <change n="browserCheck"><date when="2008-02-26T15:53:52">15:53:52, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Checking of text using browser</change>
      <change n="drmAddition"><date when="2008-02-26T15:57:30">15:57:30, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Addition of text to access control</change>
      <change n="corpusAddition"><date when="2008-02-26T15:57:32">15:57:32, Tuesday 26 February 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141367">Edmund King</name>Addition of text to corpus</change>
      <change n="catalogueAddition"><date when="2008-04-10T11:54:46">11:54:46, Thursday 10 April 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-121584">Jason Darwin</name>Addition of text to Library Catalogue<!-- BBID=35073 --></change>
      <change n="live"><date when="2008-09-23T14:47:07">14:47:07, Tuesday 23 September 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Make text available on NZETC website</change>
    <change n="epubPreparation"><date when="2009-08-04T14:07:12">14:07:12, Tuesday 4 August 2009</date><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Preparation of EPUB (and other formats such as DaisyBook)</change></revisionDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text xml:id="t1">
    <front xml:id="t1-front">
      <div xml:id="t1-front-d1" type="covers">
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="BucIntrFCo">
            <graphic url="BucIntrFCo.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="BucIntrFCo-g"/>
            <figDesc>Front Cover</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="BucIntrSpi">
            <graphic url="BucIntrSpi.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="BucIntrSpi-g"/>
            <figDesc>Spine</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="BucIntrBCo">
            <graphic url="BucIntrBCo.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="BucIntrBCo-g"/>
            <figDesc>Back Cover</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="BucIntrTit">
            <graphic url="BucIntrTit.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="BucIntrTit-g"/>
            <figDesc>Title Page</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n1"/>
      <pb xml:id="n2"/>
      <pb xml:id="n3"/>
      <pb xml:id="n4"/>
      <pb xml:id="n5"/>
      <pb xml:id="n6"/>
      <pb xml:id="n7"/>
      <titlePage xml:id="t1-front-d1-d1">
        <docTitle>
          <titlePart type="main">
            <hi rend="c">An Introduction to<lb/>Polynesian<lb/>Anthropology</hi>
          </titlePart>
        </docTitle>
        <byline><hi rend="lsc">By</hi><lb/><docAuthor><hi rend="c"><name type="person" key="name-202886">Te Rangi Hiroa</name></hi></docAuthor> (<docAuthor><hi rend="c">Peter H. Buck</hi></docAuthor>)</byline>
        <imprimatur><hi rend="sc">Bernice P. Bishop Museum<lb/>Bulletin</hi> 187</imprimatur>
        <docImprint>
          <pubPlace>
            <hi rend="lsc">Honolulu, Hawaii</hi>
          </pubPlace>
          <publisher>
            <hi rend="sc">Published by the Museum</hi>
          </publisher>
          <date when="1945">1945</date>
          <publisher>
            <hi rend="c">Kraus Reprint Co.</hi>
          </publisher>
          <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>
          <date when="1971">1971</date>
        </docImprint>
      </titlePage>
      <pb xml:id="n8"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-front-d2" type="colophon">
        <p rend="center">
          <hi rend="i">Reprinted with the permission of the original publisher</hi>
        </p>
        <p rend="center">
          <hi rend="c">Kraus Reprint Co.</hi>
        </p>
        <p rend="center">A U.S. Division of Kraus-Thomson Organization Limited</p>
        <p rend="center">Printed in U.S.A.</p>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n9" n="i"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-front-d3" type="contents">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Contents</hi>
        </head>
        <p>
          <table>
            <row role="label">
              <cell/>
              <cell rend="right">
                <hi rend="sc">Page</hi>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n13">Introduction</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n13">3</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n14">Scheme of the work</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n14">4</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n15">Polynesia</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n15">5</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n15">Types of Polynesian Islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n15">5</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n17">Naming of islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n17">7</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n18">Distribution of islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n18">8</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n19">The Polynesians</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n19">9</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n20">The early home</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n20">10</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n22">The route to Polynesia</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n22">12</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n23">Polynesian culture</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n23">13</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n26">European explorers of the Pacific</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n26">16</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n26">Magellan</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n26">16</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n26">Loyasa</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n26">16</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n26">Saavedra</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n26">16</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n27">Gaetano and others</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n27">17</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n27">Mendaña</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n27">17</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n28">European discoveries in Polynesia</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n28">18</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n28">Mendaña</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n28">18</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n28">Quiros</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n28">18</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n29">Boenechea</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n29">19</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n29">Maurelle</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n29">19</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n29">Le Maire and Schouten</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n29">19</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n30">Tasman</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n30">20</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n31">Roggeveen</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n31">21</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n31">John Byron</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n31">21</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n32">Wallis</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n32">22</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n32">Carteret</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n32">22</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n33">Bougainville</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n33">23</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n33">Cook</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n33">23</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n36">Later discoveries</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n36">26</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n36">Later writers</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n36">26</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n36">First settlers</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n36">26</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n37">Missionaries</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n37">27</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n39">Traders</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n39">29</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n39">Government officials</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n39">29</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n40">Other writers</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n40">30</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n41">Native informants</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n41">31</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n43">Native manuscripts</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n43">33</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n44">Translations and interpretations</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n44">34</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n47">Published native texts</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n47">37</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n49">Ethnological societies in Polynesia</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n49">39</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n51">Bishop Museum</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n51">41</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n53">Ethnological work</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n53">43</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n55">Affiliation with Yale University</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n55">45</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n57">The Tanager Expedition</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n57">47</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <pb xml:id="n10" n="ii"/>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n58">The Whippoorwill Expedition</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n58">48</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n58">The Kaimiloa Expedition</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n58">48</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n59">The Rockefeller Foundation</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n59">49</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n59">Bishop Museum staff expeditions</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n59">49</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n65">The American Museum of Natural History</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n65">55</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n67">Field work in Hawaiian archaeology</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n67">57</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n67">Bishop Museum Visiting Professor to Yale</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n67">57</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n68">The University of Hawaii</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n68">58</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n68">Miscellaneous publications</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n68">58</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n69">Surveys of museums</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n69">59</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n72">Photograph catalog</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n72">62</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n74">Bishop Museum publications</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n74">64</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n75">Literature on Polynesia</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n75">65</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n75">The early voyages</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n75">65</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>    <ref target="#n85">General works on Polynesia</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n85">75</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n89">Easter Island</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n89">79</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n91">Mangareva</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n91">81</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n93">Pitcairn</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n93">83</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n94">The Tuamotus</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n94">84</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n96">The Marquesas</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n96">86</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n98">The Austral Islands and Rapa</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n98">88</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n100">Society Islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n100">90</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n102">Cook Islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n102">92</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n106">Equatorial islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n106">96</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n107">Samoa</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n107">97</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n109">Tonga</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n109">99</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n111">Niue</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n111">101</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n112">Tokelau</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n112">102</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n113">Futuna and Alofi</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n113">103</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n114">Uvea</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n114">104</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n115">Ellice Islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n115">105</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n116">Hawaii</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n116">106</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n122">Chatham Islands</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n122">112</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n123">New Zealand</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n123">113</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n130">Polynesian outliers in Melanesia</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n130">120</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>
                <ref target="#n133">Conclusions</ref>
              </cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n133">123</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n134">Material culture</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n134">124</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n134">Social organization</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n134">124</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n134">Religion</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n134">124</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n135">Physical anthropology</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n135">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n135">Music</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n135">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n135">The Polynesian outliers</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n135">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n135">The historical method</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n135">125</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n136">Acculturation</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n136">126</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n137">Functional and psychological methods</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n137">127</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
            <row>
              <cell>  <ref target="#n138">Topical studies</ref></cell>
              <cell rend="right">
                <ref target="#n138">128</ref>
              </cell>
            </row>
          </table>
        </p>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n11"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-front-d4" type="frontispiece">
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="BucIntrP001a">
            <graphic url="BucIntrP001a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="BucIntrP001a-g"/>
            <figDesc>Map of the Pacific, showing the Polynesian Triangle</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
      </div>
    </front>
    <body xml:id="t1-body">
      <pb xml:id="n12"/>
      <pb xml:id="n13"/>
      <head>An Introduction to Polynesian Anthropology</head>
      <byline>By <name key="name-202886" type="person"><hi rend="c"><name type="person" key="name-202886">Te Rangi Hiroa</name></hi></name> (<name key="name-202886" type="person"><hi rend="c">Peter H. Buck</hi></name>)</byline>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d1" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Introduction</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d1" type="preamble">
          <p>The occupation of Micronesia and other Pacific territories by the United States forces as a result of the defeat of Japan has opened up prospects for conducting research in the Pacific on a wider and perhaps more comprehensive scale than was previously possible. With this in mind, the National Research Council, the Social Research Council, and the American Council of Learned Societies cooperated in the formation of a committee consisting of Dr. Wilmot H. Bradley, <name type="person" key="name-405076">Dr. Austin H. Clark</name>, <name type="person" key="name-405077">Dr. John W. Coulter</name>, and Dr. Mortimer Graves. The committee met in Washington on August 11, 1944 and approved a statement which planned an appraisal of the work done in the four following fields: earth sciences, biological sciences, social sciences, and the humanities. The first unit of the appraisal was to cover Polynesia, and later units were planned to include Melanesia, Micronesia, the Philippines, and possibly Indonesia.</p>
          <p>Dr. Coulter, who was appointed chairman of the survey and editor of the social science papers, invited me to prepare an appraisal of anthropology in Polynesia. The material was so extensive that, in order to do it justice, my report far exceeded the form of appraisal which the committee had in mind. As a large portion of the report deals with details concerning the intensive regional survey of anthropology in Polynesia conducted by Bishop Museum, the Trustees of the Museum have decided to publish the report independently, as a contribution to the survey.</p>
          <p>The appraisal committee now working with the Committee on Pacific Investigation of the National Research Council under the chairmanship of <name type="person" key="name-102877">Dr. Herbert E. Gregory</name> has received papers on "Functional and psychological studies in Polynesia" by Edwin G. Burrows, "Acculturation in Polynesia" by Felix M. Keesing, and "Education in Polynesia" by Marie Keesing. These, with perhaps other papers, should form a volume completing the appraisal of Polynesian anthropology to which this volume is an introduction.</p>
          <p>I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to Dr. Edwin G. Burrows, who read the manuscript of this report and suggested corrections and additions which have been gratefully adopted.</p>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n14" n="4"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d1-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Scheme of the Work</hi>
          </head>
          <p>In order to make as thorough a survey as possible, I reviewed the published accounts of the early voyages across the Pacific from the time of Magellan to the Wilkes Expedition. In this, I was fortunate that the Bishop Museum library contained a remarkably complete set of the first editions of the early Pacific voyages and the publications of the Hakluyt Society. For the purposes of the survey, it seemed more useful to deal with this literature in chronological sequence rather than in the usual alphabetical order of authors, for the date of the voyages stresses the priority value of early contact. In appraising the other literature, it became evident that a great deal of research had been done by Bishop Museum, particularly since 1920. It seemed only fair to that institution to record its activities in some detail rather than confine the appraisal to the bare recital of the literature it has published. Thus, the historical era of European contact with Polynesia is covered at the commencement period by the accounts of the early voyages and at the closing period, to date, by the publications of Bishop Museum. In between and overlapping the two periods mentioned, a good deal of literature has been published which, for want of a better term, I have classed as that of other writers. Here again, it seemed profitable to include some brief description of the various classes of people who contributed to the literature, the sources of information, and the institutions which encouraged the study and recording of material concerning the Polynesian people.</p>
          <p>The work begins with introductory remarks on Polynesia and the Polynesian people, followed by some account of the Pacific explorers, later or other writers, and the work of Bishop Museum. The literature cited is divided into three groupings. The literature on the early voyages is listed chronologically (pp. 66-75), from the voyage of Mendana in 1595 to the voyages made in the first half of the nineteenth century; and the islands visited are cited. This is followed by a list of general literature (pp. 76-79) dealing with Polynesia as a whole or part, and arranged alphabetically under two headings, other writers and Bishop Museum publications.</p>
          <p>The individual groups or islands are then dealt with, commencing with Easter Island in the far east, working west, then north, and finally south. Some introductory remarks about each island and its people are given before the selected lists of literature. The works are listed under the three groupings: early voyages with the date reference to the detailed list on pages 66-75, other writers arranged alphabetically, and Bishop Museum publications with the authors arranged alphabetically. Brief reference is also made to some of the outlying islands in Melanesia which are inhabited by people speaking the Polynesian language.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <pb xml:id="n15" n="5"/>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d2" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Polynesia</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d2-d1" type="preamble">
          <p>Names ending in <hi rend="i">nesia</hi> (Greek <hi rend="i">nesos</hi>, an island) have been used, appropriately enough, to designate large groupings of islands in the Pacific. To the west, the Malay Archipelago received the alternative name of Indonesia, the prefix <hi rend="i">Indo</hi> indicating its comparative nearness to India. Eastward above the equator, the islands extending from Palau to the Gilberts and including the Marianas have been grouped together as Micronesia, because the islands are relatively small <hi rend="i">(micros)</hi>. South of the equator, the chain of island groups extending from the east of New Guinea to Fiji in the southeast have been termed Melanesia because the skins of the inhabitants are black <hi rend="i">(melas)</hi>. The remaining part of the Pacific east of Micronesia and Melanesia is studded with islands, which, because there are many (<hi rend="i">poli</hi>), have been included under the name of Polynesia.</p>
          <p>With a few exceptions, the Polynesian islands lie south of the equator. The northern limit across the equator is formed by the Hawaiian Islands, and the easternmost limit by Easter Island. Though New Zealand, because of its size and situation in the south temperate zone, does not qualify for inclusion in the geographic area of tropical Polynesia, it is included in the ethnographic area of Polynesia because New Zealand was inhabited from central Polynesia by people of the same racial stock. If a base line is drawn from Hawaii to New Zealand and side lines from the ends to meet at Easter Island as the apex, a vast triangle is defined in which practically all the islands of Polynesia are situated. Within the Polynesian triangle, the greatest distance from north to south is roughly 5,000 miles, from west to east about 4,000 miles. The base line separates Samoa and Tonga in Polynesia from Fiji in Melanesia and the Gilbert Islands in Micronesia. The few Polynesian islands not included in the triangle are the Ellice Islands, Uvea, Futuna, and Alofi, which lie a little to the west of the base line. This division omits a number of islands situated in the Melanesian area but inhabited by Polynesian-speaking people.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d2-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Types of Polynesian Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The islands of Polynesia vary in type and size, and both these factors influenced the culture which developed upon them. They may be thought of as forming three main classes: volcanic, or high islands; coral, or low islands; and raised coral islands.</p>
          <p>The volcanic islands, as the name implies, were formed by volcanic agency, which pushed basaltic masses high above the surface of the sea. Time and wear have produced high hills or mountains and intervening valleys with rivers, streams, and fertile, alluvial land. The natural assets, however, vary from the abundant rainfall and rich soil of the Society Islands to the meager water supply and poor soil of Easter Island. The coast line is fringed with a coral reef, in places close to the shore and in others running out some distance to enclose an <pb xml:id="n16" n="6"/>outer lagoon, in which fish abound. Some lagoons have deep water with good passages through the outer reef, as do those of Tahiti, and others have but small, shallow passages such as those in the Cook Islands. At the outer side of the reef edge, the sea falls suddenly to such depth that ships cannot obtain anchorage. Hence, the character of the reef and the lagoon have exercised an important influence on the visits of foreign ships. Some volcanic islands have an outer fringing reef which surrounds the group of individual islands with their own fringing reefs, the Mangarevan Islands, for instance. Volcanic islands have many advantages, apart from their size. They provide a variety of raw material in the form of plants, timber, and stone, and the alluvial soil is suitable for the growth of cultivated plants. At the time of Polynesian discovery, however, the native flora provided little food beyond a few berries and roots and the pith of tree ferns. However, fish, crustaceans, and shellfish were abundant in the surrounding waters.</p>
          <p>The coral islands were built by coral animals on a submerged reef which formed a large ring enclosing a central lagoon, sometimes several miles in extent. The islands, irregularly spaced on the reef, range in size from those of several acres in extent to mere rocky protuberances bare of vegetation. This combination of reef, islands, and central lagoon is termed an atoll. The individual islands are narrow, because they are limited by the width of the reef; and their length is determined by the breaks in the supporting reef. They are low and rarely rise more than 10 to 20 feet above sea level. The surface is flat and without streams. Water, which is brackish though potable, can be obtained by sinking wells. Some atolls, termed wet atolls, have sufficient rainfall to produce fairly abundant vegetation though limited as regards the variety of plants. Other, dry, atolls have poor, stunted, and sparse vegetation because of meager rainfall. The soil, formed of broken down coral, is capable of growing the coconut and pandanus in profusion, but the food plants such as the breadfruit, banana, taro (<hi rend="i">Colocasia esculenta</hi>), yam, and sweet potato, did not grow on Polynesian atolls. When the Polynesians settled on them, the only native plants that could be used for food were pigweed (<hi rend="i">Portulaca</hi>) and the fruit of the <hi rend="i">Morinda citrifolia</hi>. A large-leaved coarse taro, termed <hi rend="i">puraka</hi> (<hi rend="i">Cyrtosperma chamissonis</hi>), was cultivated in trenches dug down to subsoil water, but this plant was introduced. The paper mulberry, which provided the material for tapa cloth, and the <hi rend="i">Hibiscus tiliaceus</hi>, which provided a suitable fiber for lines and nets, did not grow. The lagoons, however, were rich in fish, crustaceans, and shellfish, and the shell of the <hi rend="i">Tridacna</hi> was a poor but useful substitute for basalt in the manufacture of tools.</p>
          <p>Some atolls have deep passages through the reef capable of admitting schooners into the shelter of the central lagoon, but in most, the passages are so narrow and shallow that only canoes can be piloted through them. Immediately outside the reef, the sea sinks to unanchorable depths.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n17" n="7"/>
          <p>The raised coral island, as illustrated by Niue, was originally a small atoll which was raised by volcanic forces. After a fringing reef was formed, another volcanic elevation took place which formed an island with a central, high plateau, depressed in the middle, and an encircling lower plateau with cliff-girt shores 80 to 90 feet high in places. The formation is entirely coral with large blocks and broken down soil, somewhat reddish in color. The soil is evidently much more fertile than that of atolls, for the native vegetation includes some fairly large trees and the <hi rend="i">Hibiscus tiliaceus</hi>, the bark of which provides fiber for cordage and skirts. The taro, giant taro, yam, sweet potato, arrowroot, coconut, banana, and paper mulberry all grow there, as does the breadfruit, which is a late introduction. The rain does not supply streams but flows into underground reservoirs which provide the water supply of the people. Thus, conditions on a raised coral island enabled a richer native culture to be developed than was possible on atolls.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d2-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Naming of Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The original Polynesian discoverers usually gave a distinctive name to each island, but as each island in a group remained independent under the government of its own chiefs, the inhabitants of a group evidently saw no necessity for coining a special name for a unity that never existed in their day. An exception is the name of Samoa, which was apparently applied to the group before European contact and which was not shared by any individual island in the group. From the Polynesian point of view, an atoll was treated as a group of islands and each individual island, down to the smallest rocky islet, received an individual name. Here again, an exception occurs in the name of <name key="name-402108" type="place">Tongareva</name>, which was applied to the whole atoll and was not shared by any individual island. The group name of <name key="name-123228" type="place">Tokelau</name> was probably used as a general term by the Samoans in referring to islands to the north. It was later adopted as a convenient term to replace the earlier applied English name, the Union Group. The omission of group names was followed in principle in some atoll islands divided into districts which had never become united under one command, much in the same way as the individual islands of a volcanic group. The most important island in the Tongareva atoll was originally divided into two districts, because two different family groups settled at either end and then worked toward the middle, where they met and established a boundary. One district was named Omoka and the other Motukohiti. The two districts fought each other repeatedly, but neither conquered the other permanently to the point of absorption. Hence, visitors from other islands came to either Omoka or Motukohiti. A single name that would combine the two districts was never needed and would not have meant anything within the atoll. The government agent and traders now live in the village of Omoka in the district of Omoka, and the wharf to which the trading schooners come is Omoka. There is no village in <pb xml:id="n18" n="8"/>the Motukohiti district, and nothing happens there to keep its name before the public. The whole island will eventually be called Omoka, when there are no native historians left alive to lodge a protest on behalf of Motukohiti. Some other islands in Tongareva and in the Tokelaus follow this naming pattern. Of the volcanic islands, <name key="name-150173" type="place">Easter Island</name>, according to its inhabitants, had no early island name and this may be quite correct.</p>
          <p>European voyagers gave European names to the islands when they discovered them, and additional European names were given by later explorers who were not aware that they had been found and named. Fortunately, the governing powers who annexed the various islands have given official priority to the native names and thus offered some tardy recognition to the original discoverers. Even so, it is difficult when reading of the early European voyages to find the native synonym of the foreign name and harder still to accept some alleged synonyms, such as that of the La Sagittaria of Quiros for the <name key="name-000007" type="place">Tahiti</name> of the Society Islanders.</p>
          <p>In group names, however, no priority could be given to what did not exist. It was the foreign powers which brought individual islands into a group under one rule. Even the native kingdoms—<name key="name-019821" type="place">Hawaii</name> under <name key="name-402132" type="person">Kamehameha I</name>, Tonga under <name type="person" key="name-402401">George Tubou I</name>, and the Society Islands under <name key="name-101649" type="person">Pomare I</name>—were established after European contact and would not have been perpetuated without foreign assistance. Names for the island groups were necessary for official purposes and for geographers. Some of the names given by early explorers, such as the Marquesas and Society Islands, were accepted and retained; whereas other names, such as the Sandwich Islands and Hervey Islands, were accepted in general usage for a time but officially changed later. Some confusion, however, was created in the giving of native names to groups which did not possess native names. In the system followed, the name of a principal island in the group was officially designated as the group name. Sandwich Islands was abandoned in favor of Hawaii as a name for the group. Hence, references to Hawaii may mean the group as a whole or the island of Hawaii in particular. Similarly, the <name key="name-402180" type="place">Mangareva</name> (Gambier) Islands are also referred to as Mangareva, which is the principal island in the group. In using these names, the distinction should be clearly indicated.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d2-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Distribution of Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The distribution of the islands within the Polynesian triangle is shown on the map (p. iii). Some writers, probably influenced by the theory that the Polynesians came by the Melanesian route through <name key="name-021537" type="place">Samoa</name>, have referred to Samoa and <name key="name-020057" type="place">Tonga</name> as central Polynesia, and others have called the area nuclear Polynesia. However, a glance at the map shows clearly enough that the Society Islands form the center of the Polynesian area and that Samoa and Tonga form the main groups in western Polynesia. The Society Islands are not only the <pb xml:id="n19" n="9"/>geographical center, but the traditions of the various islands clearly indicate that they were the center of distribution from which exploring expeditions, followed by colonizing expeditions, radiated north to Hawaii, northeast to the Marquesas, east to the <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotus</name>, southeast to Rapa, south to the Australs, southwest to the <name key="name-031209" type="place">Cook Islands</name>, northwest to the atolls of Manihiki, Rakahanga, and Tongareva, and even west at an early period to Samoa. Mangareva in the east was peopled from both the Tuamotus and the <name key="name-150172" type="place">Marquesas</name>, and Easter Island was probably peopled from the Marquesas. Samoa formed a western center, which peopled Tonga and some nearby islands, and later, Tonga took part in colonizing expeditions to Niue and parts of Fiji. Some of the outliers in Melanesia appear to have been settled from both Tonga and Samoa.</p>
          <p>As the culture that developed in different parts of Polynesia was affected to some extent by the type of islands, they are here listed according to type. Volcanic or high islands: <name key="name-000007" type="place">Society</name>, <name key="name-019821" type="place">Hawaii</name>, <name key="name-150172" type="place">Marquesas</name>, <name key="name-402180" type="place">Mangareva</name> (Gambier), <name key="name-150173" type="place">Easter</name>, <name key="name-402080" type="place">Pitcairn</name>, <name key="name-021537" type="place">Samoa</name>, <name key="name-020057" type="place">Tonga</name>, Uvea, <name key="name-402069" type="place">Futuna</name>, and Alofi. Coral or low islands: <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotu</name>, Rakahanga, Manihiki, <name key="name-402108" type="place">Tongareva</name>, Pukapuka, <name key="name-123228" type="place">Tokelau</name>, and <name key="name-029933" type="place">Ellice</name>. Raised coral islands: <name key="name-123229" type="place">Niue</name>, Makatea.</p>
          <p>The individual islands in the groups are given later in dealing with the literature of individual groups.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d3" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">The Polynesians</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d3-d1" type="preamble">
          <p>The people who inhabit the islands of Polynesia are termed Polynesians. The problem of naming the people as a whole was similar to that of naming island groups, for neither had native names. The need did not exist until a contrast appeared, in the person of the European. The New Zealanders then termed themselves Maori, meaning native to the soil, and coined the word pakeha for those who were foreign and exotic. The distinction applied equally to animals, plants, and introduced goods. The indigenous wood pigeon was a <hi rend="i">manu maori</hi> (local bird) as against the pheasant which was a <hi rend="i">manu pakeha</hi> (foreign bird); and the kahikatea pine was a <hi rend="i">rakau maori</hi> (indigenous tree), as against the weeping willow, which was a <hi rend="i">rakau pakeha</hi> (exotic tree). Other parts of Polynesia coined words to distinguish the foreigners from themselves. The Society and Cook Islands used the term <hi rend="i">papa'a</hi>, the Samoans <hi rend="i">papalagi</hi>, and the Hawaiians haole. They did not coin distinguishing terms for themselves, but the foreigners used the general term native or used the name of the islands on which they lived (for example, Hawaiians and Tahitians). Though the term <hi rend="i">maori</hi> as meaning native or indigenous was present in most parts of Polynesia, the native people did not apply it to themselves as a distinguishing term. It had become so established as the name for the New Zealanders that it would have created confusion to apply it as a general term. Some attempt to coin a general term was made by white scholars who combined Savaii (Samoa) and Maori in the form of Savaiori, which meant nothing except to the inventors. Thus the regional term of Polynesian came to stay.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n20" n="10"/>
          <p>The Polynesians' traditions, with few exceptions, trace their descent back to seafaring ancestors who came from elsewhere in voyaging canoes, the names of which are remembered with pride. Tales of lost continents and sunken archipelagos which supported an archaic civilization are neo-myths created by foreign writers for a mystery loving white public. The Polynesian myths run in the opposite direction and favor the emergence of lands instead of subsidence. The theme of islands being fished up out of the ocean depths by gods or heroes is widely spread and may be a mytho-poetic pattern derived from some early deified ancestor, who, by discovery, fished the islands out of the sea of the unknown. The submerged continent lies in the Melanesia area, where the islands contain continental rock formations. Geologists hold that the Polynesian islands are oceanic islands forming isolated peaks, which have not been connected within the history of man. The flimsy evidence advanced by theorists in favor of an ancient civilization which preceded the Polynesians, is untenable when subjected to critical examination, for none of the accomplishments credited to that mythical people was beyond the powers of the ancestors of the Polynesians.</p>
          <p>The subject of the direction from which the Polynesian ancestors came is fascinating. The traditional narratives contain frequent references to voyages toward the rising sun, and myths state that after death the spirit of man turns toward the setting sun to retrace the long journey to the ancient homeland in the west. A frequent objection raised against the early voyages from west to east is that the Polynesian voyaging canoes could not have overcome the insuperable barrier presented by the prevailing trade winds, which blew from the general direction of east. However, it is well known that westerly winds prevail for certain parts of the year, and there are recorded instances of canoes and ships traveling hundreds of miles to the east on westerly winds. Thus, in the early voyages from west to east through Polynesia, adventurous explorers could have sailed east on the westerly winds and returned home on the trade winds to report their discoveries. The fact that the traditions of the inhabitants of Hawaii and New Zealand trace the origin of both peoples to the Society Islands, is ample proof that the Polynesian voyagers were capable of working their way north and south. Thus, when the belated European explorers made their way into the Pacific, they found every habitable island within the Polynesian triangle occupied by the descendants of an earlier race of deep-sea navigators.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d3-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Early Home</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The theory that the Polynesians came from South America was probably based originally on the exaggerated value placed on prevailing winds. Later, some weight was attached to studies which apparently showed some affinity between lists of selected words from the Polynesian and some American Indian languages. In studies made by people without an accurate knowledge of the languages being compared, the chances for error are serious. Misspellings in <pb xml:id="n21" n="11"/>source material may create a false similarity, and such misspellings in early source material are notorious. A word composed of a root with a prefix may resemble another word with a totally different root and a suffix, and the importance of roots may be ignored in the desire to increase the list of similarities. The number of affinities may be increased by using some form of Grimm's Law, the origin of which is known only to the author. A number of similar words could probably be hand picked from any two languages in the world, but unless supported by other evidence, such lists may form a series of interesting coincidences with no scientific value. Modern linguistics has become a special scientific study, and the methods so popular in the past have produced results which may be not only valueless but actually misleading. However, the preceding remarks were not meant to criticize individuals but rather the methods used. The studies were made in all good faith according to the scientific methods then prevailing. They mark the process of experiment and error by which science has advanced to higher standards of accuracy. The later school of linguistics holds that the Polynesian language has affinity, not with South America, but with the languages extending west to southeast Asia.</p>
          <p>Further evidence is provided by the animals and plants which the Polynesians introduced, carrying them on their voyaging canoes to the islands upon which they decided to settle. The introduced animals were the pig, dog, and fowl, which belong to the Indo-Malayan area. The pig and fowl were not introduced into America until post-Columbian times. The introduced food plants were the coconut, breadfruit, banana, taro, yam, sweet potato, and arrowroot, which, except the sweet potato, belong to the Indo-Malayan botanical area. Like the domestic animals, they did not find their way into America until after its discovery by Europeans. According to botanists, the original home of the sweet potato is South America. As it was present in Polynesia before European ships visited America, it must have been brought in by some voyaging vessel from South America in pre-Columbian times. Since the South American Indians had neither the vessels nor the navigating ability to cross the ocean space between their shores and the nearest Polynesian islands, they may be disregarded as the agents of supply. If the present theory of botanical authorities is correct, the only solution left is that some Polynesian navigator actually reached South America on a westerly gale, which took him farther than he anticipated. Not liking the country, he returned to Polynesia on the trade winds with the sweet potato as an adjunct to his food supplies. Another introduced plant from the Indo-Malayan region is the paper mulberry, which was carried to every volcanic island in Polynesia and cultivated to supply the material for the bark cloth (tapa) used as clothing.</p>
          <p>The western origin of the Polynesians is further supported by the studies on their physical characters. They are a mixed people, but the predominant characters indicate a major Caucasoid origin. Some intermixture with <choice><orig>Mela-<pb xml:id="n22" n="12"/>nesians</orig><reg>Melanesians</reg></choice> may have taken place in the Pacific, but the Mongoloid intermixture must have taken place in the Malay Archipelago or the adjoining mainland. Attempts have been made to trace the Caucasoid elements back to India, but as the evidence depends on oral tradition and selected genealogies, such theories may be regarded as interesting academic studies which await supporting evidence difficult, if not impossible, to procure. Hawaiki, as one of the names of the homeland, has been carried along and applied to various islands in memory of the past, but the original Hawaiki lies buried under the accretions of time.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d3-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Route to Polynesia</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Another problem which has caused conjecture is the route by which Polynesia was reached from the Malay Archipelago. It is safe to say that when the Polynesian ancestors were pushed out of the Malay Archipelago by Mongoloid hordes, the only way open to them was the sea to the east, which was dotted with islands. It was the existence of chains of islands which rendered the ultimate arrival of the voyagers in Polynesia possible. It may be assumed that the various islands were discovered and occupied and that, as local populations increased and created complications, some of the settlers moved on toward the east to discover new homes. Thus, the process was a gradual movement by short voyages from island to island over some centuries of time. Some authorities hold that the Polynesians left the Malay Archipelago at about the beginning of the Christian Era and arrived at western Polynesia somewhere between the fourth and fifth centuries. This chronology was based on Polynesian traditional history and on genealogies, which are too uncertain for exact dates.</p>
          <p>Two routes by island chains were possible, a southern route through Melanesia and a northern route through Micronesia. Early writers appear to have taken the Melanesian route for granted, and this unchecked theory has led to the assumption of Melanesian elements in Polynesia without critical analysis. A number of outlying islands along the eastern fringe of Melanesia were found to be occupied by non-Melanesian people, speaking pure Polynesian dialects, who were regarded as remnants of the early Polynesians left behind along the Melanesian route. More recent studies, however, show that many of these islands were peopled from Samoa and Tonga at a later period. The dialects, instead of retaining traces of an early archaic form, show close affinity with modern Samoan and Tongan. If the Polynesian ancestors had infiltrated through Melanesia, their descendants should show more Melanesian intermixture, such as deeper skin color, more woolly hair, depressed nasal bridges, prognathism, and slimmer calves. The bow and arrow, the Melanesian projectile weapon, is absent as a weapon in Polynesia. Some Melanesian social customs such as power of the sister's son and brother-and-sister avoidance are present in Samoa and Tonga, but they are apparently late influences from Fiji which never penetrated to the rest of Polynesia. Similarly, the wooden neck rest and the kava <pb xml:id="n23" n="13"/>bowl with a suspensory lug show Fijian influence, which never reached farther than Samoa and Tonga. Thus, elements of culture in Polynesia which were assumed to have a Melanesian origin are found, upon careful analysis, to be subject to a different interpretation.</p>
          <p>The Micronesian route has much to recommend it. It accounts for the negative evidence against the Melanesian route. An analysis of Tongan mythology reveals that it has far more affinity with Micronesia than with Fiji, which is so close at hand. A significant item is the fact that the sling which was used in Micronesia was also the Polynesian projectile weapon. The many differences between the culture of western Polynesia and the rest of Polynesia is more readily accounted for if we assume that the main tide of the Polynesian movement flowed through Micronesia and directly from the Gilbert Islands to central Polynesia with minor streams diverging south to Samoa and Tonga. Had the main current been through Melanesia, the great efflorescence in Polynesian culture should more likely have taken place in Samoa than in the Society Islands.</p>
          <p>One objection to the Micronesian route is the question as to whether or not the Polynesians could have carried their domestic animals and cultivable food plants with them through the eastern atoll end of the Micronesian chain. It is known that certain cultivable plants, such as the banana and breadfruit, have been reported as growing in the Micronesian atolls, but the subject requires tracing. However, the food plants and animals from the Indo-Malayan area reached Fiji through the Melanesian chain, and they could have been relayed later into central Polynesia through Samoa, even though the main human movement had not flowed that way.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d3-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Polynesian Culture</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The ancestors of the Polynesians did not enter Polynesia empty handed or empty headed. They carried with them a good assortment of food plants and domestic animals from one tropical region to another. They brought with them a knowledge of certain techniques and handcrafts suited to dealing with the raw material provided by a tropical environment. They were led by able chiefs and guided in certain directions by priests skilled in observing and interpreting natural phenomena. The people were in family groups, which expanded into tribes claiming a common ancestry and ruled by chiefs who succeeded by primogeniture in the male line. They deified worthy ancestors and appointed gods to deal with the various needs and activities of life. The gods were placated and induced to render assistance in mundane affairs by material offerings made by the people and ritual conducted by the priests.</p>
          <p>The fundamentals of this culture were established in the first group of volcanic islands encountered on the eastward movement from the Gilbert Islands, where the voyagers left the Micronesian chain. The group is now known as the <pb xml:id="n24" n="14"/>Society Islands and, as I have stated, it formed the geographical center of the island world the newcomers were destined to occupy. The Society Islands are divided into a leeward and a windward group, and it was upon an island in the leeward, or easterly, group that the temporal and spiritual heads of the expedition settled. The island was named Havaii (Hawaiki) evidently after some previous home in the west. This island, afterwards named Raiatea, formed the center of the cultural development which spread throughout the group. In later years, Tahiti, because of its greater size and fertility, developed greater temporal power, but priority of prestige in chiefly rank and priestly sanctity remained with Raiatea.</p>
          <p>Traditional narratives record early expeditions that reached and settled in Hawaii in the north and New Zealand in the south. Both expeditions were without domestic animals and cultivated food plants. Thus, if the theory is correct that the foods came from Melanesia through Samoa, it is possible that the two expeditions left central Polynesia before the animals and plants arrived from the west. These early settlers in the north and south had to search for vegetable foods in the local flora, and nature, though generous with fish and fowl, offered few edible plants.</p>
          <p>With the continued development of culture in the Society Islands, there was also the natural increase in population. Rivalry in chieftainship and disputes over land, women, and food led to quarrels and battles. Expeditions to explore the seas and to "fish up" new lands had taken place and many of the outlying islands had been reported. Settlement expeditions took place wherein large voyaging canoes with adequate provisions and water carried family groups with their women and children to seek new homes along the sea paths radiating from the central hub of Havaii (Raiatea) and Tahiti. They carried with them the material goods, domestic animals, and food plants which were present in the center. They also took with them the form of social organization and religion that had developed at their time of leaving. Thus, in the course of time, between perhaps the eleventh and fourteenth centuries, habitable Polynesia became inhabited.</p>
          <p>Though a more or less common culture was carried from the center and superimposed upon the simpler one in the groups already inhabited, the later culture adopted much from the earlier one in the direction of local knowledge, adjustment to changed environment, and adaptation to different raw material. These changes occurred particularly in the arts and crafts. Pandanus was the general material for making mats and superior satchels, but as pandanus did not grow in either Easter Island or New Zealand, substitute local material was sought for and experimented with. In Easter Island, the people used rushes (<hi rend="i">Scirpus riparius</hi>), which were indigenous, and the outer skin of the trunks of banana plants, which they had introduced. The mats made of rushes were not plaited, but the rushes were sewn together with bast fiber, an entirely <pb xml:id="n25" n="15"/>new process used nowhere else in Polynesia. The baskets were made of rushes and banana bark by the process of plaiting in which the main technical details were similar to general Polynesian techniques with some slight differences in plaiting the rim. The banana plant is widespread throughout Polynesia, but the Easter Islanders were the only people to use the bark for plaiting material. In New Zealand, the local plant popularly termed flax (<hi rend="i">Phormium tenax</hi>) was used as a substitute for pandanus in both mats and baskets. As the material was harder and stiffer than pandanus, the plaiting technique employed had to be changed in certain details, such as the join in mats, to suit the difference in material. This is only one example of the many changes and developments which took place in the different island groups. Change and development also continued in the Society Islands after the period of dispersal.</p>
          <p>Mistakes have been made in past studies and general works in assuming that Polynesian culture as a whole was homogeneous to the extent that information gathered in one island applied equally well to all the other islands. Thus, Lewis Morgan, on learning that brother-and-sister marriage occurred in Hawaii, took it for granted that it prevailed throughout Polynesia and, as a result of an unchecked assumption, held that Polynesian culture was in the low stage of promiscuity as regards the relationship between the sexes. Further investigation would have revealed that brother-and-sister marriage as an institution was present only in Hawaii and that it was a late development among the highest chiefly families to preserve the purity of their lineage. Similarly, Dr. <name key="name-405096" type="person">W. H. R. Rivers</name>, on finding that the power of the sister's son and brother-and-sister avoidance were present in Samoa and Tonga, assumed that they were present throughout Polynesia and advanced the hypothesis that the similar customs which were present in Melanesia had been derived from Polynesians who passed through Melanesia. The two customs do not exist in the rest of Polynesia, hence it is more feasible to conclude that the customs were Melanesian and diffused to Samoa and Tonga from Fiji.</p>
          <p>At the time that the island cultures were functioning in their purity, when first contact was made with white foreigners, there was no one Polynesian culture. The only period when there could have been a common culture was when the people were living in one island group before dispersal took place. After that, each island or island group went on developing its own culture, and while some fundamental elements of an early common culture were retained or only slightly changed, the various groups specialized in different directions and reached peaks not shared with others. If we use the term Polynesian culture as applied to the culture which was functioning at the time of European contact, it should be realized that such a term is an abstraction referring to common features or general similarities that underlie the local differences in culture within Polynesia. Any one island may be taken as an introduction, but it cannot be regarded as establishing a general pattern. Neither can any cultural <pb xml:id="n26" n="16"/>elements from any island be applied to another on the assumption of a common pattern, but confirmation or denial must be sought locally in each island. When the Polynesian area as a whole is compared, similarities and differences will be observed. It may then be argued that the similarities belong to an earlier common stage and that the differences indicate later local developments.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d4" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">European Explorers of the Pacific</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d4-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Magellan</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The first white navigator to cross the Pacific was the Portuguese, <name key="name-140872" type="person">Ferdinand Magellan</name>, who sailed under the banner of Spain to prove his theory that there was a western passage to the east. He discovered the western passage, which was named the Strait of Magellan after him, and his fleet entered the "Great South Sea" in November, 1520. Magellan reached the Ladrones (Marianas) on March 6, 1521, and he was killed a month later at the small island of Mactan in the Philippines. One of his officers, another Portuguese named <name key="name-402057" type="person">Sebastian del Cano</name>, managed to navigate the small <hi rend="i">Victoria</hi> back to Europe and thus became the first to circumnavigate the globe.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d4-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Loyasa</hi>
          </head>
          <p>A second expedition, under the command of Loyasa, a Spaniard, with Del Cano as second-in-command, sailed from Spain in 1525. The ships passed through the Strait of Magellan and crossed the Pacific on much the same course as that followed by Magellan. Both <name key="name-402056" type="person">Loyasa</name> and <name key="name-402057" type="person">Del Cano</name> died on the voyage, and the ships reached the Ladrones on September 4, 1526 under the command of <name key="name-405097" type="person">De Salazar</name>. During the passage from the Strait of Magellan 40 men had died, and at the Ladrones De Salazar also died. The expedition continued to Mindanao under the command of Martin Yniguez and finally reached Tidore in the Moluccas, or Spice Islands. At Tidore, the Spaniards successfully repelled attacks by the Portuguese, who had established posts at Ternate and claimed exclusive rights over the Moluccas.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d4-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Saavedra</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The two Spanish expeditions had made the eastern part of the Pacific crossing south of the equator, but they did not encounter any Polynesian islands. Magellan's discovery of the Philippines led Spain to claim rights over the group, and <name key="name-402056" type="person">Loyasa</name>'s voyage induced <name key="name-402055" type="person">Hernando Cortez</name> to send three ships to the Moluccas. These ships, under the command of Saavedra, left the Pacific coast of Mexico on October 31, 1527. It was the first voyage initiated from America and, unlike the two other expeditions, it sailed from a port north of the equator. Two of the ships were lost in a storm, but Saavedra reached the Ladrones in his flagship, the <hi rend="i">Florida</hi>, and sailed on to the <choice><orig>Philip-<pb xml:id="n27" n="17"/>pines.</orig><reg>Philippines</reg></choice> Later, he reinforced his countrymen in Tidore. A Hawaiian legend of a wrecked ship has been linked by some writers with one of Saavedra's lost ships, but evidence in support of the theory is of such flimsy nature that it may be dismissed.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d4-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Gaetano and Others</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Other Spanish trans-Pacific voyages between New Spain and the Philippines followed. <name type="person" key="name-401728">Juan Gaetano</name> crossed from Navidad, Mexico, in 1542, and the Spaniards claim that he discovered the Hawaiian Islands, giving the date 1555, however. Careful examination of the evidence by various research workers has conclusively proved that the islands were unknown until they were first visited by <name key="name-207700" type="person">Captain James Cook</name> in 1778.</p>
          <p>The first Spanish settlement in the <name key="name-019988" type="place">Philippines</name> was made by Legaspi at Cebu in 1565. From then on, the voyages between New Spain and the Philippines were regular. The usual North American port was Acapulco, on the Pacific coast of <name key="name-160031" type="place">Mexico</name>, and the regular route of the Spanish galleons to the Philippines was to make for the parallel between 12° and 13° N. and sail west to <name key="name-030053" type="place">Guam</name>, whence it was an easy matter to complete the voyage. On the return trip, the ships sailed north to latitude 35° N., where they caught the northwesterly winds which carried them to the American coast. It was through observation of these sailing directions that the Spaniards failed to encounter the Hawaiian Islands, which lie between latitudes 19° and 22° 15' N. The westward course on the parallel of Guam became well known and the British navigators, <name key="name-203455" type="person">Drake</name>, <name key="name-401693" type="person">Cavendish</name>, <name key="name-402066" type="person">Woodes Rogers</name>, <name key="name-401668" type="person">Anson</name>, and others followed it after harrying the coast of South America. The Dutch commanders, also seeking Spanish prizes, followed a similar course. Thus, the earliest voyages were made in the northern hemisphere and Polynesia, south of the equator, remained immune from such visitations.</p>
          <p>With the conquest of Peru by Pizarro, Spain extended her American possessions into Peru and Chile, and the southern ports of Callao and Payta became established on the Peruvian coast. Even so, the Spanish ships worked north along the coast to Acapulco and made their crossings to the Philippines on the parallel of Guam. However, crossings south of the equator came in due time.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d4-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Mendaña</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The first expedition into the South Pacific was planned by Pedro Sarmiento, but the new viceroy of Peru, Lopez Garcia de Castro, gave the command to his nephew, <name key="name-150171" type="person">Alvaro de Mendaña</name>. Mendaña, with two ships, sailed from Callao on November 19, 1567 in a general westerly direction. He passed between the Marquesas and the Tuamotus without sighting either. He did sight what may have been one of the Ellice Islands, but his main discovery was the Solomon <pb xml:id="n28" n="18"/>Islands in Melanesia. He thus performed the astonishing feat of sailing across the Polynesian triangle without encountering an island in that area. The two ships, on their return voyage, reached Callao on September 11, 1569 without having added anything to the knowledge about Polynesia. However, the first voyage had been made south of the equator and the discovery of the Solomon Islands was destined to lead to discovery in Polynesia.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d5" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">European Discoveries in Polynesia</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Mendaña</hi>
          </head>
          <p>It seems fitting that the first authentic discovery in Polynesia should have been made by Mendaña, but it was more than 30 years after his discovery of the Solomons before the Spanish authorities acceded to his request to fit out an expedition to visit them. Finally, he was given four ships for the expedition. He put out from Callao on April 9, 1595, worked up the coast, and sailed from Payta. On July 28, he sighted an island which he at first thought was part of the Solomons. He named it Magdalena (Fatuhiva) and three other islands were successively named San Pedro (Motane), Dominica (Hivaoa), and Santa Christina (Tahuata). Recognizing the islands as a new discovery, he named the group Islas de Marquesas de Mendoza after the Marquis Mendoza, the Viceroy of Peru. The islands, which became more widely known under the shorter name of the Marquesas, formed the southeastern part of a much larger group.</p>
          <p>Continuing west, <name key="name-150171" type="person">Mendaña</name> failed to reach the Solomons but landed farther south at the Melanesian group of Santa Cruz, where he died. The remains of the expedition found its way to the Philippines under the guidance of Quiros. After some time, Quiros found his way back to Acapulco by following the northern Spanish route in the vicinity of latitude 35° N. Thus Mendaña made the first discovery in Polynesia and his recorded description of the inhabitants of the Marquesas provides the first source material on the ethnology of a Polynesian group.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Quiros</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The second voyage of discovery was made by <name key="name-401888" type="person">Pedro Fernandez de Quiros</name>, who had accompanied Mendaña as his chief pilot. Quiros sailed with three ships from Callao on December 21, 1605. He took a more southerly course than that of Mendaña and encountered a number of atolls in the southern <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotus</name>. Since longitude was determined by the dead reckoning of the daily sailings in those days, the identity of the atolls he discovered remains somewhat obscure. One of the islands, which he named La Sagittaria, some writers have identified as Tahiti, but his description of the island is evidently that of an atoll formation and could not possibly apply to a high volcanic island such as Tahiti. Continuing west, Quiros passed some small islands and then discovered <pb xml:id="n29" n="19"/>an inhabited island which he named Gente Hermosa. This has been identified as Olosega or Swains Island in the Tokelau group. He entered Melanesia to the south of <name key="name-150253" type="place">Santa Cruz</name> and reached an island in the New Hebrides group which he named Australia del Espiritu Santo, believing that it formed part of the long-sought southern continent. Contrary winds prevented him from reaching Santa Cruz and he returned to Navidad, Mexico, without making any other discoveries.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Boenechea</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Organized Spanish expeditions into the South Pacific ended with <name key="name-401888" type="person">Quiros</name>. Apart from the coast of South America, Spanish interest was confined to the north Pacific and the routes between New Spain and the Philippines. However, an expedition was sent to Tahiti in 1772 under <name key="name-401682" type="person">Boenechea</name>, who, on his way, discovered two new atolls in the Tuamotus. On his second voyage, in 1774, he discovered two more. Boenechea died in Tahiti, and Gayanagos, who took command, discovered Raivavae in the Australs as he was returning to Valparaiso.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Maurelle</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The most surprising Spanish discovery was made by <name key="name-401711" type="person">Maurelle</name>, who, on a voyage from Manila to St. Blaise on the North American coast, was driven so far south by contrary winds that he discovered the Vavau group of the Tongan Islands in February 1781.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Le Maire and Schouten</hi>
          </head>
          <p>To return to the sequence of discovery after Quiros, the Pacific adventure was taken up by the Dutch. Between 1598 and 1616, a number of Dutch ships had sailed through the Strait of Magellan, but they worked north along the South American coast and then sailed west to the East Indies. The Dutch East India Company had established a trade monopoly, and no ships were allowed to pass through the Strait of Magellan without their permission. However, a new Dutch Company, calling itself the Southern Company and headed by <name type="person" key="name-401745">Isaac Le Maire</name>, obtained a charter to trade with countries they should discover by new passages. They fitted out an expedition consisting of two ships, the <hi rend="i">Eendracht</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Hoorn</hi>. <name type="person" key="name-402005">William Schouten</name>, an experienced navigator, commanded the <hi rend="i">Eendracht</hi> with the title of patron, and <name type="person" key="name-401754">Jacob Le Maire</name>, the son of <name type="person" key="name-401745">Isaac Le Maire</name>, sailed with Schouten as president of the expedition. The company, in consultation with Schouten, was convinced that there was a western passage into the Pacific other than the Strait of Magellan and that the expedition could thus avoid the restriction placed on the Strait of Magellan by the Dutch East India Company. The expedition sailed from Holland on June 14, 1615 for the eastern coast of Patagonia. While refitting <pb xml:id="n30" n="20"/>at Port Desire, the <hi rend="i">Hoorn</hi> was destroyed accidentally by fire. The expedition went on with one ship, and Schouten sailed south of the latitude to the entrance of Magellan Strait. A passage was found between Tierra del Fuego and land which they named Staten Land in honor of the States of Holland. The passage was named the Strait of Le Maire, and the most southerly point seen after passing through it was named Cape Hoorn (Horn) in honor of the town of Hoorn in Holland.</p>
          <p>The <hi rend="i">Eendracht</hi> sailed west along the northern fringe of the Tuamotu Archipelago. The islands they discovered were named Honden (Dog), Sondergrondt (Bottomless), Waterlandt (Waterland), and Vliegen (Flies). These have been identified as Pukapuka, Takaroa and Takapoto, Manihi, and Ahe. Later, two islands north of the Tongan group were encountered and named Cocos and Verraders. They are better known by the names Boscawen and Keppel given to them by Wallis in 1767, but the Tongan names are Tafahi and Niuatobutabu. The island of Niuafoou was also discovered and named Good Hope Island. Five days later, the islands of Alofi and Futuna were discovered and named the Hoorn (Horn) Islands. This ended the Polynesian discoveries, which were made in the months of April and May 1616. The <hi rend="i">Eendracht</hi> reached Batavia, where the Dutch officials, disbelieving the report of a new passage, confiscated the ship and sent Schouten and Le Maire back to Holland under arrest. <name type="person" key="name-401754">Jacob Le Maire</name> died on the voyage.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d6" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Tasman</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Twenty-six years elapsed before the next Dutch voyage was made. It was organized by <name key="name-401708" type="person">Anthony van Dieman</name>, Governor-General of the Dutch East Indies, for the further exploration of the south land now known as Australia. Two ships, the <hi rend="i">Zehaan</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Heemskirck</hi>, were equipped and placed under the command of <name type="person" key="name-034630">Abel Tasman</name>, with <name key="name-101203" type="person">Franz Jacobszoon Vissher</name> as chief pilot and adviser. Tasman sailed from <name key="name-035786" type="place">Batavia</name> on August 14, 1642, rounded the southwest extremity of Australia, and encountered the land which he named Van Dieman's Land (<name key="name-201284" type="place">Tasmania</name>). He sailed east without knowing that his discovery was an island, and on December 13, 1642, he discovered a large, high land which he named Staten Land (New Zealand). He left the coast of New Zealand without landing, owing to an attack by Maoris on one of his boats which resulted in three of his men being killed and one wounded. Sailing north, Tasman discovered the most southerly island of the Tongan group, which he named Pylstaart. Two days later, he discovered the Tongan islands of Eua and Tongatabu and named them Middle-burgh and Amsterdam, respectively. He sailed on to Nomuka in the Haapai group, which he named Rotterdam. He passed on through the <name key="name-000854" type="place">Fiji</name> Islands and reached <name key="name-035786" type="place">Batavia</name> on June 15, 1643. Tasman was the first navigator to enter the Pacific from the west. His discoveries in Polynesia were New Zealand and the southern and middle groups of the Tongan Islands.</p>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n31" n="21"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d7" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Roggeveen</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Seventy-eight years passed before the third and last Dutch voyage, commanded by <name type="person" key="name-401755">Jacob Roggeveen</name>, sailed from Holland on August 21, 1721 to search for the southern continent. After passing through the Strait of Le Maire, Roggeveen and his three ships sailed south until the ice and rough weather convinced them that there was no useful continent in that direction. He came north to <name key="name-402064" type="place">Juan Fernandez</name> and, on sailing west, discovered an island on Easter Day, April 6, 1722 which he named Paaschen or Oster Eilandt (<name key="name-150173" type="place">Easter Island</name>). He sailed on through the northern islands of the Tuamotus and is credited with discovering six of them. Farther west, he discovered the Manua group of Eastern Samoa which he named the Bauman Islands after the captain of one of his ships. He saw two other islands but their identity is uncertain. Roggeveen reached Java in September where his ships were confiscated by the Dutch East India Company.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d8" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">John Byron</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The next country to take an interest in Pacific exploration was England. Commodore George Anson had made his notable voyage in 1740-1744, but as he was after Spanish galleons, he followed their path across the north Pacific and failed to touch Polynesia. The British Admiralty, however, had become interested and sent out their first Pacific expedition in 1764, under the command of Commodore <name key="name-150151" type="person">John Byron</name>, who had sailed with Anson. The expedition had two ships, the copper-sheathed <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi>, commanded by Byron, and the sloop <hi rend="i">Tamar</hi>, under Captain Mouat. They sailed from the Downs on June 21, 1764, made some investigations in the south Atlantic, and entered the Pacific after spending seven weeks and two days in passing through the Strait of Magellan. From Masafuero, the ships sailed northwest to get the trade winds. On June 7, 1665, Byron made his first discovery, two islands in the northern <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotus</name> which he named Islands of Disappointment (Napuka and Tepoto), because the inhabitants prevented his boats from landing. Two days later he encountered Takaroa and Takapoto, which he named King George Island as they appeared to him to be one island. These had been named Bottomless Island by Le Maire and Schouten. He also saw Manihi, the Waterlandt Island of Le Maire and Schouten. On June 21, he discovered Pukapuka in the northern Cook group and named it Danger Island, on account of the high surf, which made it too dangerous to land boats. Farther on, he found an uninhabited island with coconut trees which he named Duke of York Island. This has been identified as Atafu in the Tokelau group. Byron went on to Tinian in the Marianas and returned to England via the Cape of Good Hope. He was a good seaman, but he did not seem particularly keen to make new discoveries.</p>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n32" n="22"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d9" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Wallis</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Byron's voyage was immediately followed by one under <name type="person" key="name-150152">Captain Samuel Wallis</name>, who took over the <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi>, her copper sheathing having been considered a success. With him sailed the sloop <hi rend="i">Swallow</hi>, commanded by <name type="person" key="name-150153">Philip Cartaret</name>, who had been first lieutenant of the <hi rend="i">Tamar</hi> in Byron's expedition. The Admiralty orders were that Wallis should search for the southern continent and, failing that, search for land in the Pacific on latitude 20° S. The ships sailed from Plymouth Sound on August 22, 1766. After passing through the Strait of Magellan and entering the Pacific on April 11, 1767, the <hi rend="i">Swallow</hi> parted company with the <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi> during a storm and was considered lost. Wallis sailed northwest to latitude 20° S. and then sailed west along it. His course was farther south than that of Byron, with the result that he sailed through the middle of the Tuamotu Archipelago. His first discovery was Pinaki on June 6, 1767, and as the day was Whitsunday Eve, he named the island Whitsunday. He discovered five more atolls, which he named as follows: Queen Charlotte (Nukutavake), Egmont (Vairatea), Gloucester (Paraoa), Cumberland (Manuhangi), and Prince William Henry (Nengonengo). He then came to Osnaburgh (Meetia), the most easterly island in what came to be known later as the Society Islands. His greatest discovery occurred the next day, June 18, when he reached the large volcanic island of Tahiti, which he named King George III Island. He anchored in Matavai Bay, which became the anchorage for subsequent voyagers until the passage through the reef near Papeete became known. His first reception was hostile, but the most friendly relations were established later with Queen Oberea (Purea) and her people. A month's stay cured the sick and provisioned the ship.</p>
          <p>Wallis sailed past Moorea, which he named Duke of York Island, and then encountered three more islands belonging to the group. He named them Sir Charles Saunders Island (Tapuaemanu), Lord Howe Island (Mopiha) and Scilly Islands (Fenuaura). Proceeding west, he encountered Tafahi and Niuatobutabu, previously discovered by Le Maire and Schouten, and named them Boscawen and Keppel. Turning northward, he discovered Uvea, which his men named Wallis Island in his honor. He left Polynesia and touched at Tinian, Batavia, and the Cape of Good Hope on his way home to England, arriving at the Downs on May 30, 1766.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d10" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Cartaret</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The sloop <hi rend="i">Swallow</hi> under the skillful seamanship of <name key="name-150153" type="person">Captain Cartaret</name> had survived the storm but sailed west on a latitude farther south than the 20° S. followed by the <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi>. On July 2, 1767, the rocky island of Pitcairn was sighted but no landing made, as the sea was rough. Sailing west, <name key="name-150153" type="person">Cartaret</name> discovered <name key="name-402081" type="place">Mururoa</name>, which he named Bishop of Osnaburgh Island, and next <pb xml:id="n33" n="23"/>day, he discovered a group which he named Duke of Gloucester Islands. Cartaret sailed on to the western Pacific, where he made some new discoveries. He finally anchored at Spithead on March 20, 1769. The <hi rend="i">Swallow</hi> should never have sailed in her bad condition, and Cartaret's circumnavigation of the globe in such a vessel in a voyage lasting two years and seven months is a record of courage, endurance, and skill.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d11" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Bougainville</hi>
          </head>
          <p>France, recognizing the justice of Spain's protest against their establishment of a French colony in the Malouines (<name key="name-200836" type="place">Falkland Islands</name>), in 1764, delegated <name key="name-131266" type="person">Louis de Bougainville</name> to officially return the colony to Spain. Bougainville, in command of the frigate <hi rend="i">Boudeuse</hi>, sailed from France in November 1766. He was to be joined by the store ship <hi rend="i">l'Etoile</hi> which was to accompany him across the Pacific to the East Indies. Having handed over the settlement in the Falkland Islands on April 1, 1767, Bougainville was delayed by the <hi rend="i">l'Etoile</hi>, which did not arrive on time. Finally the <hi rend="i">Boudeuse</hi> and <hi rend="i">l'Etoile</hi> passed through the Strait of Magellan and entered the Pacific on January 26, 1778. Bougainville, after a vain search for the land reported by <name key="name-150166" type="person">Davis</name>, the buccaneer, sailed west between the courses followed by <name key="name-150151" type="person">Byron</name> and <name key="name-150152" type="person">Wallis</name> and consequently discovered a new series of atolls in the <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotus</name>. He named his first discovery Les quatres Facardins after four islets in Vahitahi. Farther on, he discovered Akiaki, which he named Isle de Lanciers because the natives were armed with spears. The next day, Hao was sighted and named Isle de Harpe after its supposed resemblance in general shape to that instrument. <name key="name-207700" type="person">Cook</name> later named it Bow Island because of its resemblance in shape to the bow. Bougainville saw other islands to the west and designating them, collectively, the Dangerous Archipelago, he veered south to avoid them. On April 2, he sighted the peak of Meetia and made Tahiti. He was hospitably received and, accordingly, named the island La Nouvelle Cythere. After a stay of a fortnight, he continued west, passing Tapuaemanu, and reached the three Samoan islands of the Manua group which Roggeveen had named the Baumann Islands. The next day he sighted Tutuila, and farther on he sailed along the south coast of a large island which must have been Upolu. A limited trade was carried on with the canoes which came out. As some of them sailed around the ship while she was under way, Bougainville named the group the Navigator Islands. Bougainville passed on through Melanesia to New Britain, Batavia, and the Cape of Good Hope, and anchored at St. Malo on March 16, 1779.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d12" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Cook</hi>
          </head>
          <p><name key="name-207700" type="person">Captain James Cook</name> made three voyages, which, with those of <name key="name-150151" type="person">Byron</name> and <name key="name-150152" type="person">Wallis</name>, covered a continuous period of British exploration in the south Pacific from 1764 to 1780.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n34" n="24"/>
          <p>Cook's first expedition (1768-1771) was sent out under the auspices of the British Admiralty and the Royal Society, primarily to observe the transit of Venus from the newly discovered island of Tahiti. Cook was given command of the bark <hi rend="i">Endeavour</hi>, which weighed 368 tons and had a crew of 94. He sailed from Plymouth on August 26, 1768 and rounded Cape Horn on January 27, 1769. Sailing west, he adopted a course between those of Byron and Wallis and, unknowingly, followed the course of Bougainville. He thus encountered the three islands in the Tuamotus which were discovered by Bougainville and named them as follows: Lagoon (Vahitahi), Thrum-cap (Akiaki), and Bow (Hao). However, instead of avoiding the islands farther west which Bougainville had named the Dangerous Archipelago, Cook kept straight on and discovered the following islands: The Groups (Marokau and Ravahere), Bird (Reitoru), and Chain (Anaa). From Anaa, he had a clear run to Meetia and Tahiti, which he sighted on April 10. Friendly relations were established with the people, an observatory was set up at Point Venus, and the transit of Venus observed under a clear sky on June 3.</p>
          <p>Cook sailed north with a native named <name key="name-101672" type="person">Tupaea</name> who had stated that there were islands in that region. Cook adopted the native names as given to him and his spellings are given here. The first island discovered was Tetiroah (Tetiaroa) which completed the windward group discovered by Wallis. Cook discovered the leeward group as follows; Huaheine (Huahine), Ulietea (Raiatea), Otahau (Tahaa), Bolabola (Borabora), and Maowrooah (Maurua). He named them the Society Islands in honor of the Royal Society, and he applied the name of Georgian Islands to the windward group in recognition of their discovery by Wallis.</p>
          <p>He was informed by Tupaea that there were other islands some days' sail to the south, and sailing in that direction, he discovered Oheteroa (Rurutu) in the Australs. Sailing southwest, he reached the east coast of the North Island of New Zealand in the vicinity of Poverty Bay. He spent six months in making a complete survey of the coast of both islands and showed that they were separated by the strait which bears his name. He thus proved that they had no connection with Staten Land or a great south continent. After surveying the east coast of Australia, Cook sailed on to Batavia and returned to England via the Cape of Good Hope. He anchored in the Downs on July 13, 1771 after a voyage of two years and ten and a half months.</p>
          <p>Cook's second voyage (1772-1775) was for the purpose of searching for the south continent. He had two ships, the <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi>, 446 tons, and the <hi rend="i">Adventure</hi>, 336 tons. The ships sailed to the Cape of Good Hope and then explored the Antarctic between the meridians of the Cape of Good Hope and New Zealand. Cook sailed north to New Zealand and then eastward along the parallel of 40° S. without encountering any land. He turned north into the Tuamotus and discovered three more atolls, which he named Resolution <pb xml:id="n35" n="25"/>(Tauere), Doubtful (Takokota), and Furneaux (North Marutea). He arrived at Tahiti and visited <name key="name-402102" type="place">Raiatea</name>, where <name key="name-402082" type="person">Omai</name> was taken on board the <hi rend="i">Adventure</hi>. The ships sailed for the Tongan group and on the way discovered the small island of Manuae, which was named Hervey Island. After visiting the Haapai and Tongatabu groups, Cook sailed east and visited Easter Island. From there he went to the Marquesas of Mendaña and discovered Fatuhuka, which he named Hood Island. From the southeast group of the <name key="name-150172" type="place">Marquesas</name>, Cook directed his course to Tahiti and thus missed discovering the northwest islands of the Marquesas. In passing south through the western end of the Tuamotu chain, he grouped the four new islands of Apataki, Toau, Kaukura, and Arutea under the name of the Palliser Islands. From the Society Islands, Cook sailed west and discovered Palmerston and Savage (<name key="name-123229" type="place">Niue</name>) Islands. He visited the New Hebrides and, on his way to New Zealand, discovered <name key="name-019921" type="place">New Caledonia</name> and <name key="name-021372" type="place">Norfolk Island</name>. He continued his search in the Antarctic between the meridians of New Zealand and Cape Horn.</p>
          <p>Cook then sailed north and surveyed the coasts of Tierra del Fuego and Staten Land. He explored the south Atlantic, discovering South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands. After passing the meridian where he had commenced his Antarctic exploration, he came to the conclusion that there was no great south continent though there might be land in the vicinity of the South Pole. He thereupon sailed home and anchored off Spithead on July 30, 1775, after a voyage of three years and 18 days which had covered between 60,000 and 70,000 miles.</p>
          <p>Cook's third voyage (1776-1780) was for the purposes of returning <name key="name-402082" type="person">Omai</name> to his home in the Society Islands and seeking a northern passage from the Pacific to the Atlantic. The <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi> was refitted for her second voyage and the <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi>, under <name key="name-134285" type="person">Captain Clerke</name>, was added to the expedition. The ships sailed via the Cape of Good Hope to New Zealand, whence they sailed northeast. Cook discovered the two islands of Mangaia and Atiu in the Cook group and then sailed west to Tonga. From Tonga, he sailed east, and on turning north for Tahiti, he discovered Tubuai, his second discovery in the Austral Islands. Having returned Omai to Raiatea, Cook sailed north on his way to search for the northern passage to the Atlantic. He discovered an atoll on December 24, 1777 and named it Christmas Island. He continued north, and on January 18, 1778, he discovered the first islands of a group which he subsequently named the Sandwich Islands. The islands seen on this occasion were Oahu, Kauai, Niihau, and the small islands of Lehua and Kaula. The ships sailed north eventually through Bering Strait in search of the northern passage. Cook returned to winter at the Sandwich Islands and, in January 1779, discovered <name key="name-402207" type="place">Maui</name> and <name key="name-019821" type="place">Hawaii</name>. After being treated with the most lavish hospitality at Kealakekua Bay on Hawaii, Cook sailed to continue his survey of the islands. However, a storm forced him to return to <choice><orig>Keala-<pb xml:id="n36" n="26"/>kekua</orig><reg>Kealakekua</reg></choice> Bay for repairs, antagonisms arose, and Cook was killed. The expedition sailed north under the command of <name key="name-134285" type="person">Captain Clerke</name> and discovered Kahoolawe, Lanai, and Molokai, the remaining Sandwich Islands. The expedition resumed its northern survey and search for a northern passage. Captain Clerke died, and the ships returned to England under the command of <name key="name-170588" type="person">Captain Gore</name>. They anchored at The Nore on October 4, 1780, after a voyage of four years, two months, and 22 days.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d5-d13" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Later Discoveries</hi>
          </head>
          <p>At the end of Cook's last voyage, nearly all the important islands in Polynesia had been discovered. Between the years 1780 and 1800, Vavau was discovered by Maurelle (1781), <name key="name-402116" type="place">Aitutaki</name> in the Cook group by <name key="name-111708" type="person">Captain Bligh</name> in the <hi rend="i">Bounty</hi> (1789), the northwest group of the Marquesas by <name type="person" key="name-401744">Joseph Ingraham</name> on the American ship <hi rend="i">Hope</hi> (April 1791), and the Mangareva (Gambier) Islands by <name type="person" key="name-110551">James Wilson</name> on the London Missionary Society's ship <hi rend="i">Duff</hi> (1797).</p>
          <p>In the early part of the nineteenth century, the Russian voyagers <name key="name-401800" type="person">Kotzebue</name> and <name key="name-207405" type="person">Bellingshausen</name> added a number of atolls in the Tuamotu Archipelago to the list of discoveries. <name key="name-401675" type="person">Captain Beechey</name> in H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Blossom</hi> checked up on the position of a number of islands in the <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotus</name> and found three others not previously discovered. <name key="name-120353" type="place">Rarotonga</name> was officially credited to the missionary <name type="person" key="name-200573">John Williams</name> (1823), and though other navigators, <name key="name-131308" type="person">Goodenough</name> for one, had evidently called there before Williams, they had not made any claim. In the course of time, the remaining islands in the Tuamotus were discovered and some were rediscovered. Isolated islands of little importance at the time, such as uninhabited islands near the equator and in the Phoenix group, were added to the chart of the Pacific. Even the United States Exploring Expedition under the command of <name key="name-101759" type="person">Commodore Wilkes</name> discovered, as late as 1838 to 1842, islands in the Ellice, Tokelau, and Phoenix groups.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d6" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Later Writers</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">First Settlers</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The early voyagers visited the islands, obtained food supplies and water, made observations on the inhabitants, and sailed away. Seamen, who deserted from ships or were shipwrecked or captured, were the first white settlers of Polynesia. They were followed by escaped convicts and fugitives from justice. Some were lazy and eked out an existence by living on the natives. As a class they were unproductive from a literary sense, but there was one notable exception in the person of <name key="name-101232" type="person">William Mariner</name>.</p>
          <p>Mariner, who had sailed on the privateer <hi rend="i">Port au Prince</hi> from England in 1805, was taken prisoner when the ship was captured by the Tongans off <pb xml:id="n37" n="27"/>Lifuka Island in the Haapai group. His life was spared, and he lived in the islands for some years under the protection of the powerful chief <name key="name-405099" type="person">Finau</name>. He finally escaped from his hosts on the brig <hi rend="i">Favourite</hi> under the command of Captain Fisk. He was observant, and his stories of his experiences aroused the interest of John Martin, M.D., who contacted him and compiled and arranged his communications into a classical work, which was published in London in 1817. Mariner could not have written the book himself, and the credit of the recording and the publication is entirely due to the interest of an educated man who never saw Polynesia. Some readers express doubt as to whether some statements were those of <name key="name-101232" type="person">Mariner</name> or of Martin. However, such confusion is not unique, for in some modern works, it is sometimes difficult to distinguish whether certain information was communicated by the native informant or inferred by the author. It is probable that some of these early settlers did impart information orally to visiting authors, but the "beach-comber" class had more to conceal than to reveal.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Missionaries</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The Spaniards carried priests with them on the voyages of <name key="name-150171" type="person">Mendaña</name> and <name key="name-401888" type="person">Quiros</name>, but they left with the ships. In 1774, <name key="name-401682" type="person">Boenechea</name> took two priests to <name key="name-000007" type="place">Tahiti</name> to establish a mission, but as they went in fear of their lives, they returned to <name key="name-030959" type="place">Valparaiso</name> in the following year. However, the priests kept a diary which recorded valuable information concerning the Tahitians of this early period.</p>
          <p>Later the published accounts of the voyages of discovery in the Pacific aroused the interest of people in Europe and America. Religious bodies felt it incumbent upon them to send out missionaries to convert the heathen to their particular forms of Christianity. The Nonconformist Churches in England formed the <name key="name-200279" type="organisation">London Missionary Society</name> (L.M.S.) which sent out a body of 28 missionaries, who were landed by the ship <hi rend="i">Duff</hi> in Tahiti on March 4, 1797. Of these, 16 remained in <name key="name-000007" type="place">Tahiti</name>, 10 were taken to <name key="name-020057" type="place">Tonga</name>, and two went to the <name key="name-150172" type="place">Marquesas</name>. Subsequent reinforcements were sent out and new missions were established in the <name key="name-031209" type="place">Cook Islands</name> and <name key="name-021537" type="place">Samoa</name>. The <name key="name-008358" type="organisation">Church of England</name> formed the <name key="name-200092" type="organisation">Church Missionary Society</name> (C.M.S.) which directed its efforts to New Zealand. <name key="name-405101" type="organisation">The American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions</name> (A.B.C.F.M.) was established in New England and sent missionaries to the Hawaiian Islands. (It will be noticed that the use of long combinations of the alphabet to designate various institutions is not a new growth in America.)</p>
          <p>The <name key="name-000352" type="organisation">Catholic Church</name> entered the field, and the Order of the Sacred Heart (Picpus) started missions in the Mangareva (Gambier) Islands, Easter Island, and the Tuamotus. The <name key="name-405100" type="organisation">Société de Marie</name> (Marists) directed their attention to western Polynesia and established missions at Uvea, Futuna, <pb xml:id="n38" n="28"/>Samoa and Tonga. In the course of time, the London Missionary Society relinquished its missions in French Oceania which, with French occupation, came under the full influence of the Catholic Church. The <name key="name-405102" type="organisation">Wesleyan Church</name> established a rival mission in Tonga. With more frequent transport services, the whole of Polynesia became open to the competition of all sects.</p>
          <p>The first problem which faced the missionaries was that of learning the language of the island which they proposed to convert. The second was that of identifying the sounds in the native languages with the symbols employed in their own languages to establish alphabets for recording the spelling of native words. Fortunately, the missionaries who invaded Polynesia, though of different nationalities, used a similar script. There was confusion enough, but one shudders to think of what might have happened if missionaries from Turkey and China had entered the field with their own forms of writing. Having established more or less satisfactory alphabets and spelling, it was next necessary to teach the natives how to write and read their own language. A printing press was part of the mission equipment, and it was possible not only to translate and write out portions of the scriptures and hymns in the native language, but to print them for use as texts in teaching. Thus, the missionaries introduced writing for the first time within Polynesia, they were the first printers, and they established the first schools. To help their own teachers, they translated the native words into English and French and they were, therefore, the compilers of the first dictionaries. With infinite pains and labor, the old and new testaments were translated into the dialects of the various groups of Polynesian islands, and the Bible became as great a literary classic in the native language as it was in English. When various nations took possession and assumed the responsibility for native education, they adopted the missionary alphabets and spellings and made no attempt to correct inaccuracies or supply deficiencies due to an earlier stage in the knowledge of linguistics.</p>
          <p>However, the missionaries gave with one hand and took away with the other. To build up a knowledge and acceptance of their own culture, they were forced by the very nature of their assignment to condemn and destroy integral elements in the native culture. A frontal attack was made on native religion to clear the way for Christian teaching. Customs and observances which were not really understood were condemned as heathen practices which stood in the way of salvation. The progress of the missions was reported to the organizations at home and the so-called heathen customs were often painted as black as possible in order that the difficulty of the task might be understood and the changes appreciated. Many of the reports were published in the missionary journals at home, and they have provided source material for later students in a less biased age. Some of the missionaries were scholars in a literary sense and expanded the material of their reports into books which were published in their homelands. When the religious details are omitted, a goodly amount of source <choice><orig>ma-<pb xml:id="n39" n="29"/>terial</orig><reg>material</reg></choice> in ethnology remains. The most prominent missionary writers were <name type="person" key="name-121365">William Ellis</name> (Society Islands, Hawaii), <name type="person" key="name-200573">John Williams</name> (Society and Cook Islands), W. Wyatt Gill (Cook Islands), <name type="person" key="name-405065">A. R. Montiton</name> (Tuamotu), <name key="name-405104" type="person">Honoré Laval</name> (Mangareva), George Turner (Samoa), <name type="person" key="name-405093">Shirley Baker</name> (Tonga), <name type="person" key="name-401681">Hiram Bingham</name> and <name key="name-405103" type="person">Sheldon Dibble</name> (Hawaii), and <name type="person" key="name-209410">Richard Taylor</name> and <name type="person" key="name-207684">William Colenso</name> (New Zealand).</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Traders</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Traders obtained an early footing in Polynesia. Early voyagers carried goods, such as glass beads, looking glasses, cloth, nails, hoop iron, and hatchets, to exchange for food. The later trading vessels were practically floating shops which were stocked with the cheap goods of Europe and America, wherewith to buy sandalwood and bêche-de-mer and pay natives to dive for pearls and pearl shells. When the dried flesh of coconuts, termed copra, became a commercial source for coconut oil and so established a local industry, trading firms set up local branches and the white trader became a settler, for a time at least. The trader usually followed the missionary, so far as time of settlement was concerned, but he did not follow the way of life which the missionaries were trying to inculcate into the native mind as the pattern of white civilization. However, we are not concerned with the morals of the time, but rather with the possibility of the early traders supplying information concerning the manners and customs of the people to whom they sold their goods. There was one such trader, <name key="name-202931" type="person">Lamont</name> by name, who wrote a good book. He was wrecked on the atoll of <name key="name-402108" type="place">Tongareva</name> (Penrhyn) in 1853, and he lived on terms of friendship with the natives, two of whom he married. As he had no goods to sell, he had time to observe the things around him. When he finally got away to San Francisco, he wrote up his experiences, and his book is the best firsthand account of an atoll community. Others had the opportunity, but if they evinced any interest beyond their own narrow field of commercialism, they lacked the ability to record their experiences in writing. Perhaps it was just as well, though it would be interesting to have a view of native culture from another angle than that of religion.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Government Officials</hi>
          </head>
          <p>After the missionaries had quieted the people and the traders had discovered commercial possibilities, various nations took possession of the islands and appointed government officials to maintain law and order. The change was disconcerting to white settlers but, on the whole, it gave protection to the native inhabitants. Officials in the early days, however, were not particularly well prepared for their duties. They were probably well educated in everything except native culture. It was held that a white man, entrenched in office, was quite capable of dealing with any native population. The superiority of the white races was so established that they could do no wrong. However, the <pb xml:id="n40" n="30"/>theory of the superiority of the white man is not an infallible law, but an assumption which, like religion, has given comfort to thousands who believe in it. It was the native who had to study the white man, not the white man the native. Not until recent times have governments recognized that their officials should receive some training to enable them to better understand the people they must govern. This change of attitude has been due to the growth of the science termed anthropology. It was the schools of anthropology which urged upon governments the necessity of giving officials in colonial service a course of education which would enable them to appreciate native culture and teach them how to smooth over the difficulties in making the inevitable changes. Courses in anthropology for cadets entering the Colonial Civil Service were inaugurated at Cambridge, Oxford, and London Universities in England. In Australia, a similar course was given at the University of Sydney.</p>
          <p>Of the United States' colonial possessions in Polynesia, the Hawaiians assimilated American culture as a matter of course, much like the Maoris of New Zealand did in their relations with the British, and the Samoans of American Samoa came under the jurisdiction of the United States Navy. In recent times, a course on race relations was established at American universities and, as a result of the present war, courses were organized by the Navy to train men for positions in civil administration in the Pacific Islands captured by the United States. In these courses, given mainly by University professors, special attention was paid to paving the way to an understanding of the native inhabitants. The subject of applied anthropology has assumed a deserved importance because it is capable of being applied to all cultures.</p>
          <p>Though, as a class, early government officials did little to add to our knowledge of native culture, there were a few exceptions. Of British officials, <name type="person" key="name-208095">Sir George Grey</name>, when Governor of New Zealand, collected versions of Maori myths and traditions, which he published. Others were <name type="person" key="name-208105">Lieutenant Colonel W. E. Gudgeon</name>, Resident Commissioner of the Cook Islands; <name type="person" key="name-209282">S. Percy Smith</name>, Government Agent in Niue; and <name type="person" key="name-402405">Basil Thompson</name>, representative of the Fijian Government in Tonga. Of German officials, <name key="name-405105" type="person">Augustin Krämer</name>, while Government Medical Officer in Samoa, wrote his authoritative work on the Samoan Islands; and <name key="name-405106" type="person">Chief Justice E. Schultz</name> contributed interesting articles on Samoan law and on proverbial sayings. French officials produced little individually, but the Government at Tahiti printed the Bulletins of the Société des Études Oceaniennes; and M. de Bovis, Government Medical Officer, wrote a general work on Tahiti which provided the French with a reference book in their own language.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Other Writers</hi>
          </head>
          <p>As settlement increased, more people of better education came into contact with the native populations. Native servants, nurses, wives, and workmen, all supplied information about themselves and their people. Trade and land <choice><orig>trans-<pb xml:id="n41" n="31"/>actions</orig><reg>transactions</reg></choice> with neighboring tribes and chiefs opened up wider fields of interest to the intelligent. Much native lore was acquired. Though it may have been passed on to others orally, there were few who had the material, time, patience, and ability to write manuscripts for publication as books. Many old residents were quite capable of writing articles on specific subjects, but the medium for printing them was lacking. However, books were written and published, some by transient visitors whose confidence in their own views was not inhibited by the doubts which assail those of longer residence. Comparatively late, such a journalistic medium was provided in New Zealand by the formation of the <name key="name-036062" type="organisation">Polynesian Society</name>. Its journal offered an outlet for short articles, and members of the society were able to induce people to contribute articles. In this way, much material which would never have otherwise come to light was placed on permanent record.</p>
          <p>Some men, such as <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name>, <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name>, and <name type="person" key="name-121391">Edward Tregear</name>, wrote not only from interest, but from a deep sense of duty to preserve a record of native culture. There were no fellowships to defray field expenses in their day, and they gave freely of their own time and money. The amateur anthropologists were amateurs in the sense that they were not paid professionals. What they might have gained from a university school of anthropology was more than made up for by an intense study of the available literature and by years of contact with the people they interpreted.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d6" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Native Informants</hi>
          </head>
          <p>After all is said and written, the information came primarily from the natives. Much was missed and much was miswritten through an inadequate knowledge of the native language on the part of the recorder. The settler and the trader can make themselves understood by carrying on a conversation with a limited vocabulary interspersed with English words. It is probably the apparent success of such a restricted vocabulary which has brought forth statements that if one knows one Polynesian language, one can understand them all. However, when it comes to inquiry into the details of religion and social organization, no man can understand all the local words and idioms used in a dialect other than the one he knows. I know this from personal experience. There are sources of error. A native may misunderstand a question and thus give the wrong answer, or he may deliberately give the wrong answer, an individual form of humor. The stranger who is arrogant or patronizing is very apt to be told strange stories which form excellent material for magazine articles but have no foundation of truth.</p>
          <p>It is a fundamental rule in ethnological inquiry to ask no leading questions, yet much of the recorded material has been obtained as the result of such questions. The Polynesian is naturally friendly, and when he realizes that a certain answer is desired he may supply it as a matter of courtesy, even when he knows <pb xml:id="n42" n="32"/>it is wrong. He may even chuckle inwardly, as at an obscure joke. When Captain Cook visited the Island of Kauai in the Hawaiian Islands, he saw a native with a shark-tooth implement, which reminded him of a similar tool in New Zealand. He knew that the New Zealand implement was used to cut up human bodies in preparation for cooking. On inquiry as to the use of the Hawaiian instrument, the Kauai owner confirmed Cook's inference that it was so used In Hawaii. However, asked if they ate the human flesh so carved, the native denied it vigorously and expressed horror at such an idea. An older man, probably amused at his companion's expressions of horror and seeing the humor of the situation, gave Cook the required answer by stating that they did eat human flesh. Cook made other inquiries and concluded that, beyond doubt, the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands were cannibals. Cook was a careful observer, but this is one instance in which he was supplied with erroneous information. It is true that the Hawaiian shark-tooth implements were used to cut up human flesh, but it was in connection with the funeral custom of stripping the flesh from the bones before they were deposited in burial caves. Cannibalism was never customary among the Hawaiians. There were, at most, only a few cannibals in the course of their history.</p>
          <p>When Polynesians are convinced that the inquirer is in sympathy with their traditions and customs, they are ready and even eager to tell what they know. There is, however, an inhibiting factor that may be present with some prospective informants. It is the idea that the white man is going to write a book for which he will obtain a vast sum of money in which the informant does not share. Why should he give up his time to be pestered with questions, if he receives nothing for it? This brings up the question of paying informants. While I understand it has been the practice in the United States to pay Indian informants at some established rate, it is a somewhat doubtful procedure in Polynesia: When it becomes a business arrangement, there is danger that the informant may be tempted to increase his output by localizing his knowledge of other islands, even drawing upon his imagination to correspondingly increase his income. Sometimes this situation cannot be avoided, and the collector must exercise his judgment in rejecting the extraneous, a difficult decision if the author wishes quantity in his description of a vanishing culture.</p>
          <p>The plan I have tried to follow during field expeditions is to call, or sit in at, a meeting of the people and explain to them that the object of the inquiry is to put their history, traditions, crafts, and customs on record for the outside world to appreciate. The collecting of information becomes a community project, which the people strive to make as complete as possible. They will indicate the best informants, or the best informants will indicate themselves. The policy is to elevate the inquiry above the plane of western commercialism and conduct it on the Polynesian system of giving gifts of food or goods to those who deserve them. Materially the two systems may appear identical, but psychologically they are vastly different.</p>
          <pb xml:id="n43" n="33"/>
          <p>The individuality of informants has to be considered. It must be remembered that religious rituals and ceremonies were abandoned some generations ago through the substitution of Christianity. Similarly, many social customs were abandoned through the change of religion and through the passing of authority from hereditary chiefs to the officials of foreign powers. What the present day informant has to divulge is that which has filtered down through several generations of people who never took part in the ceremonies they described orally. Each generation dropped something of its own culture and probably added something from outside sources. In choosing between informants, those to beware of are the persons who can give the most complete story of the forgotten past. They have usually traveled and have added the tales of other islands to their own. They have also acquired a wider knowledge of English, hence are more apt to gain the ear of inquirers than the conservative stay-at-homes whose local knowledge is not vitiated by outside sources of information. The dangerous informant is the one who can answer all questions and the good informant is the one who says he doesn't know when he doesn't know.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d7" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Native Manuscripts</hi>
          </head>
          <p>After the missionary schools had taught the natives to read and write their own language, many of the older people wrote down their history, legends, genealogies, and other items of their culture in ledgers and exercise books. These were handed down in families, and often copies were made. Many of the latter-day authorities have gained their reputation through the possession of family manuscripts. The older the manuscript, the more valuable it is. Later copies have added later material, the authenticity of which cannot be proved. Some of the old manuscripts are difficult to decipher, because the old-time writers had not acquired a knowledge of punctuation and the use of capital letters. Sometimes the words are run together, and I have seen a manuscript in which each line was continuous without a break between words. Hence, copies of old manuscripts, even when made by the natives themselves, are apt to contain additional errors through their interpretation of the original. Capitals may have been put in where they do not belong and dropped where they do belong. Sometimes in copying, words and even lines have been missed, resulting in confusion in the original text.</p>
          <p>In spite of errors, a number of native manuscripts have been preserved and published. An important example is the history and traditions of Rarotonga compiled by <name key="name-202953" type="person">Te Ariki Taraare</name>, the descendant of a Rarotongan priestly line. The manuscript was acquired by <name type="person" key="name-209282">S. Percy Smith</name> and published in the journal of the Polynesian Society, over a period of some years. A dictated manuscript of the lectures of a Maori priest, Te Matorohanga, has appeared in the Polynesian Journal with the native text and translations, and it has also been published separately in the memoirs of the Polynesian Society. A native <choice><orig>manu-<pb xml:id="n44" n="34"/>script</orig><reg>manuscript</reg></choice> was written by the people of Mangareva on their history and culture through the encouragement of the Catholic priest, Honoré Laval. It was translated into French by Laval in his work on Mangareva, and it proved of inestimable value to me in my work on the "Ethnology of Mangareva." In Hawaii, a number of native manuscripts have been translated and published in <name key="name-402391" type="person">Fornander</name>'s "Hawaiian antiquities and folklore", "Kepelino's traditions of Hawaii", and <name type="person" key="name-102886">David Malo</name>'s "Hawaiian antiquities." <name key="name-123789" type="person">Kamakau</name>'s unpublished manuscript on Hawaiian traditional beliefs and customs is in the keeping of <name key="name-101718" type="organisation">Bishop Museum</name>. <name type="person" key="name-202884">Teuira Henry</name>'s authoritative work on "Ancient Tahiti" was largely derived from native manuscripts. Many short articles by native writers have been translated and published in various journals and newspapers. On the whole, natives have contributed much valuable information in manuscripts of their own composition.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d8" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Translations and Interpretations</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The translations of native texts have yielded considerable valuable information, but matters of doubt should be checked with the original native text, where possible. Local idioms are sometimes difficult to translate, particularly when the native author is not available to explain the passage. The translator feels that he has to complete his task, and as he cannot translate a word, phrase, or idiom, he interprets it as best he can. If he is wrong, the error is perpetuated by subsequent writers who make use of the published translation. Even in one area, such as New Zealand, the various tribes have local words, terms, or idioms which members of another tribe cannot translate correctly unless they know the local meanings. It is this fact that makes some proverbs and cryptic sayings difficult to translate. Place names and personal names may also have originated from some local historical event, and unless the local history is known, an attempt at a literal translation of the various syllables of the name often results in disaster. When capitals are omitted from proper names, as often happens, the result is sometimes ridiculous. A classical example of such an error is the following interpretation of a proverb or saying by the Maori scholar, the <name type="person" key="name-207684">Reverend William Colenso</name>.</p>
          <lg>
            <l>Rukuruku huna horahia papaka-nui</l>
            <l>Dive hidden spread crab great</l>
          </lg>
          <p>Colenso interpreted it thus, "By diving deeply (you will get) a great spread of crabs." An analysis of the English words made it difficult to accept this interpretation. Firstly, the New Zealand crabs are obtained in shallow pools and under rocks, so the process of obtaining them does not necessitate diving of any kind, let alone deep diving. Secondly, "spread" is an English colloquialism which has no meaning in Maori. Later, the saying was found to belong to the Hauraki district where both <hi rend="i">huna</hi> and <hi rend="i">papaka-nui</hi> were place names. Huna was a locality where a variety of flax (<hi rend="i">Phormium tenax</hi>) containing a <pb xml:id="n45" n="35"/>fine fiber was obtained for making dress cloaks, and Papaka-nui was a swamp where the leaves of the <hi rend="i">kiekie</hi> (<hi rend="i">Freycinetia banksii</hi>) were gathered for weaving rough rain capes. By a figure of speech, the place names were used to denote the garments made from the material obtained in those localities. The term <hi rend="i">ruku</hi> or <hi rend="i">rukuruku</hi> means to fold up, as well as to dive, and <hi rend="i">horahia</hi> is its antithesis in the sense of unfolding or spreading out preparatory to wearing. Hence the meaning of the saying, as explained by the people who originated it, was as follows:</p>
          <lg>
            <l>Rukuruku Huna, horahia Papaka-nui.</l>
            <l>Fold up your dress cloak, unfold your rain cape.</l>
          </lg>
          <p>The saying was addressed to people about to depart on a journey in fine weather, which the weather prophets felt would not last. The correct meaning is about as remote from "a great spread of crabs" as one can possibly imagine.</p>
          <p>Tribal chants and laments composed before European contact contain archaic words which have gone out of current use, and frequent references are made to mythology, religious ritual, and traditional events which have not been transmitted in the oral prose accounts. Elsdon Best, who recognized the difficulty of accurate translation, recorded in many of his published papers the chants but made no attempt to translate them. The same procedure was adopted by <name type="person" key="name-208832">Sir Apirana Ngata</name> in his two published memoirs on Maori songs. He found out the tribes to which the laments belonged, gave genealogies of the composers and the chief characters commemorated by the dirges, and annotated the texts as fully as possible. The primary object was to prevent the wealth of material from being lost, and the time spent in endeavoring to translate obscure passages would have delayed publication unduly. Furthermore, hasty translations might have resulted in errors which the compiler was not willing to risk. A waiting period has elapsed, and Sir Apirana is now contributing a series of translations to the journal of the Polynesian Society.</p>
          <p>In most native texts, frequent use is made of terms which apply to definite details in technical processes. Such technical terms may be used figuratively. They cannot be translated or interpreted correctly unless the translator has some knowledge of the craft from which the terms are derived. Some translators have evaded parts which they did not understand or used general terms which lose the precise meaning contained in the text. Others have skipped passages, paragraphs, and even pages which refer to subjects considered by the translator to be indelicate. A glaring example of such omissions was perpetrated by the translator of the Maori text in <name key="name-208095" type="person">Grey</name>'s classic work on Polynesian mythology. The construction of the first latrine on the edge of a cliff was described in detail in 166 words in the native text, and this pattern was followed in all the Maori fortified villages on hill-top sites. It marked a distinct advance in sanitation, and Captain Cook remarked that the sanitation of the Maori villages was better than that of most of the cities in Europe. Grey's <pb xml:id="n46" n="36"/>translator dismissed the 166 words of detailed description in the following eight words: "He then added a building to Rehua's dwelling." The Maori text, however, was later to be of value. After European settlement, the Maoris abandoned their hill forts and moved down to the flatlands. Here the hillside type of latrine was impractical and the people abandoned it without attempting any adjustment or sanitary substitute. Later, when the department of health urged sanitary measures, the people objected to the latrine as a European innovation. When the details of the Maori text were quoted, they had to admit that the so-called innovation was merely a modification of an ancient Maori institution. If the Maori text had not been published, information which turned out to be of great practical importance would have been lost through the prudery of an incompetent translator.</p>
          <p>From an ethnological point of view, translations should be literal, even if the English appears crude. In trying to polish up the English, meanings are often introduced which are not in the text. Another fault is the inclusion of extra information or explanations in what purports to be a translation. The result is not a translation but an interpolation, which is a totally different thing. Very often the interpolation is wrong and readers are led astray through acceptance of the material as a translation of an authoritative native text. In <name key="name-208095" type="person">Grey</name>'s "Polynesian Mythology", the story is told of the voyage of the <hi rend="i">Aotea</hi> canoe to New Zealand. An incident occurs in which Turi, the captain of the vessel, called to his brother-in-law Tuau. The English translation is as follows, "Tuau, you come and sit for a little at the house amidship on the floor of the double canoe." This quotation has been used as evidence that the <hi rend="i">Aotea</hi> was a double canoe with a deck on the cross beams between the two hulls and with a house built amidship on that deck. With others, I accepted the statement as coming from an old native historian. However, on examining the native text, I found that the Maori words were as follows,</p>
          <lg>
            <l>Nau mai hoki koe ki waenganui nei.</l>
            <l>You also come here to the middle [amidship].</l>
          </lg>
          <p>There is absolutely no mention of a double canoe, a deck, or a house. They were all added by the interpreter, who had probably heard of some of the Polynesian canoes being so built and who inferred that the <hi rend="i">Aotea</hi> was of similar construction. He may have been right, but his inference should have been confined to an explanatory note and not offered as a translation of the native text. Thus, the translator's sins of commission and omission render the English version of Grey's work an unsafe medium of source material.</p>
          <p>Many writers and readers hold that literal translations of Maori texts, particularly songs, do not do justice to the literary genius of the Polynesian people. It all depends upon whether we want facts or literature. The trouble is that in free translations we seek for nice sounding words and idioms. Free interpretations, once they are published, enter the list of source material and <pb xml:id="n47" n="37"/>may be accepted literally by students of native culture. The problem almost merits the printing of two translations, a literal one and a free one, or interpretation. The first would be of more value to students and the second more pleasing to general readers.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d9" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Published Native Texts</hi>
          </head>
          <p>In printed native texts, apart from misprints which are liable to occur in any language, there are two items which require attention. One is the alphabetical symbol for the <hi rend="i">ng</hi> sound and the other is the glottal closure.</p>
          <p>In the printing equipment with which the early missionaries were provided, the fonts contained all the letters of their own alphabets. As the Polynesian alphabets consisted of fourteen letters at the most, a number of the English letters were not needed. Among these was the letter <hi rend="i">g</hi>. In choosing the form of representation for the <hi rend="i">ng</hi> sound, some missionaries thought that it would render the work of printing easier if a single letter were used instead of the combination of <hi rend="i">n</hi> and <hi rend="i">g</hi>. As the letter <hi rend="i">n</hi> was included in the native alphabet, it was decided that the spare letter <hi rend="i">g</hi> should be used to represent <hi rend="i">ng</hi>. This was adopted in western Polynesia (Samoa, Tonga, etc.) and in French Oceania. In New Zealand, the compilers of the alphabet preferred to include the two letters <hi rend="i">ng</hi> in the alphabet as a double consonant. The New Zealand double letter was adopted in the Cook Islands. There is no trouble with the letter <hi rend="i">g</hi> if the reader knows that it represents the Polynesian <hi rend="i">ng</hi> sound, but if he does not know, he makes the mistake of giving it the <hi rend="i">g</hi> sound of his own alphabet. Thus the unknowing pronounce the important Naval Station of Pago in American Samoa literally as <name key="name-405107" type="place">Pagopago</name> or Paygopaygo instead of Pangopango.</p>
          <p>The glottal closure, as the name implies, is a closing of the space between the vocal cords which, with a restrained emission of breath, replaces certain consonant sounds in speech. It is present in Polynesian speech and creates one of the dialectical differences in the language. In the islands in which it occurs, the glottal closure always replaces particular consonants, as follows:</p>
          <list>
            <label>
              <hi rend="i">h:</hi>
            </label>
            <item>Cook Islands, Mangareva, New Zealand (west coast, North Island)</item>
            <label>
              <hi rend="i">ng:</hi>
            </label>
            <item>Society and Austral Islands</item>
            <label>
              <hi rend="i">k:</hi>
            </label>
            <item>Society and Austral Islands, Hawaii, Samoa</item>
            <label>
              <hi rend="i">r:</hi>
            </label>
            <item>Marquesas</item>
          </list>
          <p>A curious usage occurs in Uvea and Futuna where the long vowel <hi rend="i">a</hi> is pronounced as two short vowels with the glottal closure between them.</p>
          <p>At the early stage in the study of speech, the missionaries did not consider the glottal closure worthy of a symbol, and consequently the consonants represented by the closure were omitted from the local alphabets. More recent linguists decided that the glottal closure should be represented by a symbol and selected the inverted comma, termed the hamza, which should be placed <pb xml:id="n48" n="38"/>superior to the position which the original consonant would have occupied in the written word. In actual speech, there is no difficulty in recognizing the glottal closure; but in the written word, a good deal of confusion is caused by the absence of a symbol representing it. Thus, totally different words may be written in the same way. A good example is furnished by the Cook Island word <hi rend="i">ua</hi>, which represents four different words identical with the Maori words, <hi rend="i">ua</hi> (rain), <hi rend="i">hua</hi> (fruit), <hi rend="i">uha</hi> (female), and <hi rend="i">huha</hi> (thigh). If the hamza is used to represent the glottal <hi rend="i">h</hi>, the words are readily distinguished as <hi rend="i">ua, 'ua, u'a</hi>, and <hi rend="i">'u'a</hi>.</p>
          <p>The necessity for the hamza was not recognized until comparatively recent times, hence it does not occur in early texts. Even the Hawaiian dictionary compiled by Andrews and revised by Parker does not use the hamza, though it was published as late as 1922. On the other hand, the hamza was correctly used in <name key="name-121542" type="person">Pratt</name>'s <name key="name-121543" type="work">Samoan dictionary</name> published in 1911. In many of the Bishop Museum publications, insufficient attention was paid to the inclusion of the hamza in native texts. It was included in some words and omitted in others, and even the same words had the hamza in some lines and lacked it in others. Thus, the presence of the hamza in the native text does not mean that it has been inserted correctly throughout. The native texts have consequently suffered in their value as source material for students in Polynesian linguistics. The blame lies partly with the authors, for no editor could be expected to be an authority on the Polynesian language though some inconsistencies are obvious. As a result of experience, the Museum refuses to accept any native text from an area where glottals occur unless the hamza has been correctly included in the manuscripts submitted for publication. The errors of omission in the past were perhaps unavoidable at the time, but we now have no excuse for continuing them into the future.</p>
          <p>Another process which should be understood is the shift which has taken place from one consonant to another in different dialects. The most widely spread are those between <hi rend="i">v</hi> and <hi rend="i">w</hi> and between <hi rend="i">r</hi> and <hi rend="i">l</hi>. The <hi rend="i">w</hi> occurs in New Zealand and Hawaii and the <hi rend="i">v</hi> in the rest of the Polynesian area. However, there is a possibility that the missionary committee responsible for the Hawaiian alphabet may have made a mistake in choosing <hi rend="i">w</hi>; in preference to <hi rend="i">v</hi>. The Hawaiians of today are using <hi rend="i">v</hi> in their speech instead of <hi rend="i">w</hi>; but its use, after a lapse of about a century, cannot be taken as proof that they are restoring the original consonant. The limited distribution of <hi rend="i">w</hi> may be taken as evidence that <hi rend="i">v</hi> more nearly represents the original sound in the language. In the <hi rend="i">r</hi> and <hi rend="i">l</hi> shift, <hi rend="i">r</hi> occurs in central, east, and south Polynesia and <hi rend="i">l</hi> in north and west Polynesia. However, the missionary committee in Hawaii had a close vote in deciding upon <hi rend="i">l</hi> instead of <hi rend="i">r</hi> and, again, they may have made a mistake. If so, <hi rend="i">r</hi>, from distributional evidence, might be regarded as being nearer to the original sound. It is, perhaps, possible that the shifts in the above two pairs were made <pb xml:id="n49" n="39"/>originally from intermediate sounds. Where foreigners found no difficulty in deciding upon an alphabetical symbol, we may assume that the shift had been complete, but where doubt existed to the extent of voting between two symbols, as in Hawaii, the shift was probably not completed. Thus, some of the committee heard <hi rend="i">v</hi> and <hi rend="i">r</hi> and others heard <hi rend="i">w</hi> and <hi rend="i">l</hi> in the same set of words. The acceptance of the alphabet by the Hawaiians also led, in time, to their acceptance of the sounds given to the symbols by their missionary teachers. In other words, the teachers completed the shifts.</p>
          <p>Several more localized shifts have taken place. The most interesting is that from <hi rend="i">t</hi> to <hi rend="i">k</hi> which occurred in Hawaii. The shift was taking place in some of the islands when the missionary committee was considering the alphabet, but it had not affected Kauai. It is evident that some Hawaiians were using <hi rend="i">t</hi> (Tamehameha) and others were using <hi rend="i">k</hi> (Kamehameha). The committee put it to the vote and speeded up evolution by completing the shift to <hi rend="i">k</hi>. The Hawaiians had already replaced the original <hi rend="i">k</hi> with the glottal closure, and the committee helped them restore it to their speech, but in place of <hi rend="i">t</hi>. Thus, the Hawaiian dialect retains a glottal closure replacement for <hi rend="i">k</hi> and a <hi rend="i">k</hi> consonant as well ('<hi rend="i">umeke</hi> for <hi rend="i">kumete</hi>, bowl).</p>
          <p>It is interesting to note that a similar shift from <hi rend="i">t</hi> to <hi rend="i">k</hi> has been taking place in Samoa in recent years, though it has not yet been universally accepted. Here again, <hi rend="i">k</hi> had been replaced by the glottal closure. There was no evidence of the shift when Pratt's Samoan dictionary was published in 1911. In 1927, the use of <hi rend="i">k</hi> instead of <hi rend="i">t</hi> was universal in American Samoa, both in speech and in writing. The London Missionary Society College for Samoan pastors in Upolu opposed the shift in their teaching, but in Tutuila the retention of <hi rend="i">t</hi> was regarded as pedantic, even by the orators.</p>
          <p>In Ontong Java, the glottal replacement of <hi rend="i">k</hi> and the shift from <hi rend="i">t</hi> to <hi rend="i">k</hi> have taken place, whereas the Polynesian dialects in the nearest islands retain both the original <hi rend="i">k</hi> and <hi rend="i">t</hi>. Thus the shift from <hi rend="i">t</hi> to <hi rend="i">k</hi> has appeared in widely separated areas as independent developments. A number of other localized shifts occur which would form an interesting study for an expert in linguistics.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d10" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Ethnological Societies in Polynesia</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d10-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The formation of a society for a specific interest depends upon the initiative of one or a few enthusiastic individuals who can induce others to join in sufficient number to provide adequate funds through membership fees to publish annual reports or, better still, to produce a journal. The first two ethnological societies formed in Polynesia were the <name key="name-036062" type="organisation">Polynesian Society</name> in New Zealand and the Hawaiian Historical Society in Honolulu, both in 1892. Later, in 1917, the French residents of Tahiti formed the Société des Études Ocean-iennes. These three societies have published much interesting and valuable material. They not only provide a means of placing short articles on <choice><orig>perma-<pb xml:id="n50" n="40"/>nent</orig><reg>permanent</reg></choice> and available record, but they raise the standard of accuracy by refusing to accept material bordering on fiction or the result of unrestrained imagination on the part of the contributor. Rarely, an article may be accepted in good faith which, after publication, is found to be spurious. A good example of the spurious is the article on the interpretation of the so-called Easter Island script which was perpetrated by <name type="person" key="name-405075">Dr. A. Carroll</name> and published in the first volume of the Polynesian Journal in 1892. Such mistakes are happily rare, and the standard of a society's publication owes much to a wise editor who is not too proud to consult others in moments of doubt.</p>
            <p>The white inhabitants of <name key="name-120483" type="place">Apia</name> in Upolu, Western Samoa, formed the Samoan Society in 1923, but the population was not large enough to provide a sufficient membership to finance publication. Papers read before the society have been published in the journal of the Polynesian Society.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d10-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">The Polynesian Society</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The Polynesian Society was founded in New Zealand in 1892 by a small group of enthusiasts led by <name type="person" key="name-209282">S. Percy Smith</name>. The object of the society was "to promote the study of the Anthropology, Ethnology, Philology, History, and Antiquities of the Polynesian race by the publication of an official journal to be called 'The Journal of the Polynesian Society,' and by the collection of books, manuscripts, photographs, relics, and other illustrations of the history of the Polynesian race." In order to extend its scope of interest to include neighboring cultures which might throw light on the study of the Polynesian race, the society adopted the following curious definition: "The term 'Polynesia' is intended to include Australasia, New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia, and Malaysia, as well as Polynesia proper." The annual subscription was placed at one guinea and life membership at ten pounds. These have recently been raised to 25 shillings and 15 pounds respectively.</p>
            <p>When the proposition was put forward to form the Society, many people held that it was too late to save anything of importance in Polynesian culture. In spite of this pessimistic forecast, the society has continued to publish its quarterly journal throughout the years, and the year 1945 sees the unbroken chain of 54 annual volumes. Objections have been made at times that the journal has contained too much Maori material and not enough general Polynesian matter. This has been due to the difficulty of procuring correspondents in the various parts of Polynesia with the knowledge and the will to write on local ethnology. In spite of difficulties, the journal has recorded a vast amount of information concerning Polynesia, and no library which professes to be up-to-date on Pacific material is complete without a full set of journals of the Polynesian Society.</p>
            <p>In addition to the journal, the society has published 21 volumes of memoirs and four reprints. Most of the memoirs are composed of long papers <pb xml:id="n51" n="41"/>which previously ran through several copies of the journal, and their publication as single volumes has been of great convenience to members of the society as well as to purchasing non-members.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d10-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">The Hawaiian Historical Society</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The Hawaiian Historical Society was organized on January 11, 1892, and its first annual meeting was held on December 5 of that same year. The objects of the society are the collection, study, and utilization of material illustrating the, ethnology, archaeology, and history of the Hawaiian Islands. There were 21 original members, and 216 were added during the year as well as 20 corresponding members. The initiation fee was five dollars and the original annual subscription of one dollar was later raised to two.</p>
            <p>The Society holds meetings, at which papers are read and discussed. In addition to the annual report, the more important papers have been printed, as well as five reprints from early voyages which touched at Hawaii and three genealogies of local American families.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d6-d10-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">The Société Des Études Oceaniennes</hi>
            </head>
            <p><name key="name-405108" type="organisation">The Société des Études Oceaniennes</name> was founded in Papeete, Tahiti, in 1917 for the purpose of studying the anthropology, ethnology, philology, archaeology, and the history of the institutions, manners, customs, and traditions of the native inhabitants of eastern Polynesia. The journal of the Society, the "Bulletin de la Société Études Oceaniennes" with the subtitle "Polynésie orientale" was printed by the government. It appeared twice a year in the first three years, was dropped for three years, and then came out as a quarterly until the second World War disorganized printing. However, number 71 was published in June 1944. The bulletin has recorded much valuable information made by French observers in French Oceania.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d7" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Bishop Museum</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d1" type="preamble">
          <p><name key="name-101718" type="organisation">Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum</name>, in <name key="name-202877" type="place">Honolulu</name>, Hawaii, is a memorial to the <name key="name-405109" type="person">Princess Pauahi</name> (1831-1884), last of the Kamehameha family of the chiefs of Hawaii. It was founded by her husband, <name key="name-405110" type="person">Charles Reed Bishop</name> (1822-1915), who for nearly fifty years took a prominent part in the business and public affairs of Hawaii. The Museum is devoted to the subjects of "Polynesian and kindred antiquities, ethnology, and natural history." The collections of the Museum include material chiefly from Polynesia (including New Zealand) and from Melanesia, Micronesia, New Guinea, and Australia. The Museum staff is engaged in caring for the collections, and in investigating scientific problems which come within the scope of its activities.</p>
          <p>The enthnological collection is rich in Hawaiian material, rich in both quality and quantity. Heirlooms from Queen Emma, Mrs. Bishop, and from <pb xml:id="n52" n="42"/>other chiefly families are deposited in the Museum. The collection acquired by the Territory and old specimens from the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions have also come to the Museum. Particular mention may be made of featherwork, tapa, Niihau mats, ornaments, gourds, twined basketry, wooden bowls, fishing material, stone artifacts, and wooden images. The feather garments, 10 cloaks and 17 capes, form the largest single collection, but the British Museum collection contains a greater variety. The Kamehameha cloak, composed entirely of rare mamo feathers of a deeper golden color than the commoner 'o'o feathers, is unique and so also is the long yellow feather skirt (pa'u) made for the Princess Nahienaena after the abolition of the tabu against women wearing feather garments. The feather baldric ornamented with human teeth and two helmets covered with tufts of human hair instead of feathers have not been reported elsewhere.</p>
          <p>The ethnological material from other parts of Polynesia is fair. The expeditions which commenced in 1920 were too late to acquire old material, for the various islands had been cleaned out by previous collectors. However, the Museum acquired the leavings in the form of pestles and adzes and its collection of stone artifacts is extensive enough to form a basis for comparative study. In modern plaited material in pandanus and coconut leaf, the collection is probably more extensive and varied than that of any other museum. The collections from other Pacific areas, though limited in quantity, are rich in quality for much of the material was obtained through early missionaries.</p>
          <p>Apart from ethnological specimens, the Museum expeditions have collected quantities of plants, landshells, and insects, many from islands hitherto unvisited by scientists. The Museum's collections in natural history have been identified and described by specialists in various parts of the world, and the Museum's publications on natural history have added materially to scientific knowledge of the Pacific area.</p>
          <p>Expeditions are sent out to various parts of the Pacific, when funds are available. It is necessary to stress the matter of funds, because an erroneous impression prevails, not only in foreign parts but among old residents of the Territory, that the Bishop Museum is rich. Science would benefit even more greatly, if this were only true. The error among local residents is due to their linking the name Bishop with the Bishop Estate and thinking that the great revenue derived from the Bishop Estate is used to support the Museum. Nothing can be wider of the mark. The Bishop Estate is the inherited land of Mrs. Bishop, and according to the provision in her will, the income derived from it is entirely for the establishment and maintenance of a school for boys and a school for girls, preferably of Hawaiian blood. Hence the origin of the Kamehameha School for Boys and the Kamehameha School for Girls. The Bishop Museum, as already stated, was founded by Charles Reed Bishop as a memorial to Mrs. Bishop, and its income is derived entirely from a <pb xml:id="n53" n="43"/>foundation created by him out of money he made himself. Not one cent of the Museum income is derived from the Bishop Estate, the Territory of Hawaii, or any native Hawaiian grant.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Ethnological Work</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d2-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The Museum's work in ethnology covers two periods: the first extending from 1889 to 1919, the second from 1920 onward. During the first period of 31 years, the Director was <name key="name-405111" type="person">William J. Brigham</name>, M.A., D.Sc. (Harvard). The construction of buildings and furnishings, the arrangement for exhibition, and the storing of material, all took time and thought. Local koa wood was used in the construction of tall exhibition cases, which, though they must have given great satisfaction at the time, are now outmoded. However, the Museum has inherited the furniture of a past age, and thorough modernization is a financial problem difficult to solve.</p>
            <p>The wealth of Hawaiian material in the collection and the very terms of the foundation determined the policy of the Museum in devoting first attention to the study of Hawaiian ethnology. The Director concentrated his efforts in this direction and produced a number of monographs on the Hawaiian arts and crafts which will be found listed under his name in the list of literature on Hawaii. The Museum established its own printing press and the memoirs were published in quarto size with copious illustrations. These publications also listed the material in the Museum and thus served the additional purpose of providing illustrated catalogs. The Director was ably assisted by J. F. G. Stokes, Curator of Polynesian Collections, and Stokes went farther in his studies by working out techniques, as exemplified in his work on netted carriers (<hi rend="i">koko</hi>) of the Hawaiians. A number of local authorities, such as Fornander, contributed in the fields of mythology, history, and traditions, though their manuscripts were not published until after the regime of Dr. Brigham had ended. The first period may thus be characterized as the Hawaiian period.</p>
            <p>The second period has been influenced, not only by natural growth and expansion but by events which changed the status of the Museum from a purely local institution to one with an international reputation.</p>
            <p>In 1919, <name type="person" key="name-102877">Herbert E. Gregory</name>, Ph.D. (Yale), Silliman Professor in Geology at Yale, was granted a temporary release, and he assumed administrative charge of the Museum with the title of Acting Director in May of that year. It was during the early part of Dr. Gregory's term of office that various events took place which are so important in the history of ethnological research that they will be referred to individually in the following pages.</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n54" n="44"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">The First Pacific Science Conference</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The first Pacific Science Conference was held in Honolulu in 1920 and Dr. Gregory was made chairman. Though the conference was arranged under the auspices of the Pan-Pacific Union with the aid of funds appropriated by the Territory of Hawaii, Bishop Museum did much to add to its success. It, in turn, did much toward outlining the research policy of the Museum. Though the various branches of science were covered by the conference, emphasis was placed on anthropology, because of the rapidly disappearing native cultures. A report was prepared under the direction of the Section of Anthropology, to which eminent anthropologists in the United States, England, Australia, New Zealand, and Japan contributed. The vast Pacific area was divided into the "insular areas" of Polynesia, Micronesia, Melanesia, and the "continental areas" of Australia, New Guinea, and the Philippine and Malay Islands. Though research in all these areas was held to be of great importance, the report selected Polynesia as the area for immediate undertaking since it comprised the heart of the Pacific and, particularly, since it was about to become the field of operations of the Bishop Museum in Hawaii. An outline of the scope and methods to be applied to Polynesia was formulated and the problems emphasized. Ethnological research was dealt with under the headings of material culture and art, mythology and religion, social organization, language, music, and historical research. Anthropometrical and archaeological research were also dealt with. The various problems were set out in a series of statements and questions, much after the pattern of "Notes and Queries on Anthropology" published by the British Association for the Advancement of Science. The outline was printed in pamphlet form to serve as a guide to field workers in Polynesia.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d2-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">The Bayard Dominick Expeditions</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The extension of Bishop Museum's field of active operations to Polynesia was rendered possible by the financial cooperation of Bayard Dominick, a Yale graduate and a member of the New York Stock Exchange. The original plans for the conduct of field work were made in consultation with <name type="person" key="name-405074">Clark Wissler</name> (Curator of Anthropology, American Museum of Natural History), <name type="person" key="name-102881">Roland B. Dixon</name> (Professor of Anthropology, Harvard University), <name type="person" key="name-405068">Alfred L. Kroeber</name> (Professor of Anthropology, University of California), and <name type="person" key="name-405095">William Churchill</name> (Carnegie Institute). Correspondence was conducted with <name type="person" key="name-209282">S. Percy Smith</name>, Elsdon Best, and <name type="person" key="name-207515">J. MacMillan Brown</name> of New Zealand. Four Polynesian areas were selected for the first year's work, and graduate students in anthropology were selected to do the field work. The field workers were to be sent out in pairs, one to attend to archaeology and material culture and the other to take up social organization and religion. In addition, all <pb xml:id="n55" n="45"/>were provided with anthropometrical cards on which to record the physical characteristics of as large a number as possible of the native inhabitants of the islands under study. <name type="person" key="name-405083">Louis R. Sullivan</name>, Ph.D., was appointed Research Associate in Anthropology in January 1920 to make a survey of the Hawaiians and work up the cards filled in by field workers. Botanists were attached to two of the field parties which left Honolulu in 1920. The members were as follows:</p>
            <list>
              <item>Tonga: <name type="person" key="name-202890">Edward W. Gifford</name> (University of California), William C. McKern (University of California), <name type="person" key="name-405069">Arthur J. Eames</name> (Harvard University, Botanist).</item>
              <item>Marquesas: Edward S. C. Handy (Harvard University), <name type="person" key="name-102885">Ralph Linton</name> (University of Pennsylvania), Forest B. H. Brown (Yale University, Botanist), Mrs. Brown and Mrs. Handy (volunteer assistants).</item>
              <item>Austral Islands: John F. G. Stokes (Bishop Museum Staff), Robert T. Aitken (Columbia University), Mrs. J. F. G. Stokes (volunteer assistant).</item>
              <item>Hawaii: <name type="person" key="name-405083">Louis R. Sullivan</name> (Brown University), <name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name> (Dartmouth, Harvard).</item>
            </list>
            <p>The Tongan party made anthropometrical measurements in Samoa on the way to Tonga. Unfortunately, A. J. Eames, botanist, developed dysentery in Apia and had to return to the United States. The Marquesas party had no difficulty in reaching their location, but the Austral Islands party was delayed owing to the irregular transport service with the islands. Finally, Aitken was located at Tubuai and Stokes was able to do archaeological work at Raivavae and ethnological work at Rapa. The reports of the members of the expeditions were published by the Museum and will be found listed in the literature of their respective groups under the heading of the publications of Bishop Museum.</p>
            <p>The first year's work (1920) was financed by Bayard Dominick to the extent of $40,000, which was given as a donation to Yale University and placed by Yale at the disposition of Bishop Museum.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Affiliation with Yale University</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d3-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The following is taken from the Director's report of 1920, page 17.</p>
            <quote>
              <p>The administrative organization of most American museums consists of a board of trustees and a director. The trustees are usually laymen unfamiliar with scientific problems and must therefore rely for guidance on the recommendations of the director. After full consideration the Trustees of the Bishop Museum have decided to expand this traditional policy by establishing affiliations with some strong university which includes in its faculty and administrative officers men familiar with planning and carrying on scientific projects and which sustains close relations with other institutions interested in research.</p>
              <p>Under this plan the Director maintains active relations with two institutions and the Trustees have the assurance that plans and methods which involve the activities and funds of the Museum receive not only their criticism but also that of others. The Director, likewise, has the advantage of personal consultation with a group of men interested in the ethnology and natural history of the Pacific but who are not available as members of the Museum staff.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n56" n="46"/>
              <p>To inaugurate this plan arrangements for a three-year period have been made with Yale University, whereby the Director of the Museum shall be a member of the University Faculty and the equipment of the Museum made available for advanced students of the University.</p>
            </quote>
            <p>It was under the above plan that <name type="person" key="name-102877">H. E. Gregory</name>, while still holding his position on the Yale Faculty, was appointed Director of Bishop Museum on three-year terms. Later, the term was extended to the date of his retirement from the Yale Faculty. I succeeded Dr. Gregory, on his retirement in 1936. I was appointed to the Yale Faculty as Professor of Anthropology at the Graduate School and, on the recommendation of Yale University, also appointed Museum Director by the Trustees of Bishop Museum for a term of three years. Later the appointment was extended to the date of my retirement from the Yale Faculty.</p>
            <p>The other outcomes of the affiliation between the two institutions are the Yale-Bishop Museum Fellowship and the establishment of a Bishop Museum Visiting Professor to Yale University (p. 57).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Bishop Museum Fellowships</hi>
            </head>
            <p>In order to further research work in science, an agreement was made with Yale University in 1920 to establish four Bishop Museum fellowships of 1,000 dollars each for research in anthropology, botany, zoology, geology, and geography. The fellowships were open to men and women who had completed at least one year of graduate study at an institution of high standing, but preference was to be given to candidates who had already obtained the degree of Doctor of Philosophy or who had otherwise demonstrated their fitness to undertake original research. The results of all research were to be submitted to Bishop Museum for publication.</p>
            <p>The fellowships made it possible for men of recognized standing to undertake the field work essential to the solution of problems in which they were interested. They also served to enhance the usefulness of the Museum by making its collections, library, and other equipment available to an increasing number of students. Incidentally, the Museum benefited materially by having specimens from various areas added to its collections and having its collections studied by qualified scientists.</p>
            <p>In 1926, the number of fellowships was reduced from four to two, and in 1930, the stipend for each fellowship was raised from 1,000 to 2,000 dollars. After 1941, the fellowships were discontinued for the duration of the war, owing to the difficulty of transport in the Pacific area.</p>
            <p>The fellowships were awarded first in 1921, and from 1921 to 1940, inclusive, they have been awarded 47 times as follows: anthropology 15, botany 14, geology 11, and zoology (including malacology and entomology) 7. The projects in anthropology which necessitated trips to Pacific islands were as follows:</p>
            <pb xml:id="n57" n="47"/>
            <p>
              <table>
                <row>
                  <cell>1923</cell>
                  <cell>
                    <name type="person" key="name-102889">Harry L. Shapiro</name>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>Norfolk Island</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>1931</cell>
                  <cell>
                    <name type="person" key="name-101716">Gordon Macgregor</name>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>Tokelau</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>1931</cell>
                  <cell>Edwin G. Burrows</cell>
                  <cell>Uvea, Futuna, Alofi</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>1933</cell>
                  <cell>Laura M. Thompson</cell>
                  <cell>Lau Islands, Fiji</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>1934</cell>
                  <cell>
                    <name type="person" key="name-207378">Ernest Beaglehole</name>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>Pukapuka, northern Cook Islands</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>1935</cell>
                  <cell>Clellan S. Ford</cell>
                  <cell>Yasawa Islands, Fiji</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>1936-37</cell>
                  <cell>
                    <name key="name-102888" type="person">Alfred Métraux</name>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>Easter Island</cell>
                </row>
              </table>
            </p>
            <p><name key="name-102888" type="person">Alfred Métraux</name> visited Easter Island in 1934-35 as a member of the Franco-Belgian Expedition, but he worked on his material at Bishop Museum.</p>
            <p>The other fellowship holders who worked on projects at the Museum were the following:
<table><row><cell>1921</cell><cell>Ruth H. Greiner</cell><cell>Polynesian art designs</cell></row><row><cell>1923</cell><cell>Panchanan Mitra</cell><cell>Polynesian affinities with India</cell></row><row><cell>1930</cell><cell>Laura M. Thompson</cell><cell>archaeology of Guam</cell></row><row><cell>1938-39</cell><cell>Katharine Luomala</cell><cell>comparative study of Polynesian myths and the diffusion of myth motives</cell></row></table></p>
            <p>Panchanan Mitra, who was Professor of Anthropology at the University of Calcutta, visited various museums during his fellowship.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Tanager Expedition</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The National Research Council, acting through its Committee of Pacific Investigations, of which <name type="person" key="name-102877">H. E. Gregory</name> was chairman, had been in consultation with the officials of the United States Navy at Washington and Pearl Harbor with a view to exploring little known parts of the Pacific. In 1922, tentative plans were made for a scientific survey of the 13 islands of the Hawaiian group, extending northwest from Kauai to Ocean Island, and also Johnston and Wake Islands. Early in 1923, plans had reached a stage where official action was possible. At the request of the Department of Agriculture, the Navy Department agreed to supply a mine sweeper from Honolulu to carry a party of about 12 representatives from the Department of Agriculture and Bishop Museum to visit the islands mentioned for a period of about four months, beginning April 1, 1923.</p>
          <p>An agreement was made that officers of the Navy should assume responsibility for collecting and charting hydrographic data; that the United States Biological Survey should provide the services of an ornithologist, a specialist in the destruction of rabbits, and a moving picture operator; that Bishop Museum should provide such other personnel as might be considered desirable; that Commander S. W. King should direct the activities of the Navy in the joint undertaking; and that <name type="person" key="name-405066">Alexander Wetmore</name> should be placed in charge of the scientific parties.</p>
          <p>The minesweeper <hi rend="i">Tanager</hi> made four trips in 1923. The third trip took in Necker and Nihoa Islands, where proof of former human occupation was <pb xml:id="n58" n="48"/>found. On Necker were artifacts, platforms, and skeletal remains, and on Nihoa were house platforms and terraces. The details of the various trips and the scientific investigations made are given in the report of the Director of Bishop Museum for 1924, and the scientific results in natural history were subsequently published by the Museum.</p>
          <p>The discovery of ethnological remains on Necker and Nihoa led to a fifth trip by the <hi rend="i">Tanager</hi>, in 1924. The party included <name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name>, ethnologist of the Museum staff. On Nihoa, the 60 ancient building sites were cleared of brush, measured, and photographed; and much material—bowls, fragments of stone vessels, and other artifacts, with some skeletal material—was unearthed. At Necker, a similar procedure was adopted and a number of stone artifacts were collected. The artifacts collected from the two islands were deposited in Bishop Museum, and Emory's report on the archaeology of the islands was published by the Museum.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Whippoorwill Expedition</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The Navy Department assigned the minesweeper <hi rend="i">Whippoorwill</hi>, under Captain W. J. Poland, to survey the Line Islands. The first group left Honolulu on July 24, 1924 and visited Christmas, Jarvis, and Washington Islands. The scientific personnel were under the leadership of Charles H. Edmondson, and the members of the group concentrated on zoology, botany, conchology, entomology, and geology. The second group, with C. Montague Cooke, Jr., in charge of the scientific personnel, left Honolulu on September 15, 1924 and visited Baker and Howland Islands. A good deal of material in the natural sciences and geology was collected, and the ensuing reports were published by Bishop Museum. Notes on and a location map of some archaeological remains on Howland were made for future study.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d6" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Kaimiloa Expedition</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Bishop Museum was invited by Mr. and Mrs. Medford R. Kellum to select a group of scientists to accompany them on their private four-masted schooner <hi rend="i">Kaimiloa</hi> (Explorer) on a visit to some islands in the south Pacific. Stanley C. Ball, zoologist, was chief of the party of six which included <name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name>, ethnologist, and Armstrong Sperry, associate ethnologist. The <hi rend="i">Kaimiloa</hi> sailed from Honolulu on November 9, 1924 and made short stops at Fanning, Christmas, Malden, and Tongareva, where some archaeological research was possible. The schooner arrived at Tahiti on January 1, 1925, where the scientific personnel disembarked. Emory and Sperry remained for some months to continue the study of archaeology in Tahiti and the Tuamotus.</p>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n59" n="49"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d7" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Rockefeller Foundation</hi>
          </head>
          <p>In 1926, the Rockefeller Foundation appointed Edwin R. Embree, <name type="person" key="name-405074">Clark Wissler</name>, and <name type="person" key="name-405079">Edwin G. Conklin</name> to make investigations on the purpose, equipment, and personnel of Pacific institutions. The object was to ascertain what institutions had purposes which were worthy of financial assistance from the foundation. Bishop Museum's program of research in Polynesia proved acceptable, and assistance to the extent of 50,000 dollars was promised, on condition that a similar amount was received from other sources. The President of the Board of Trustees of Bishop Museum, <name type="person" key="name-405063">Albert F. Judd</name>, took a leading part in bringing the matter before individuals and foundations in the territory with the result that the additional 50,000 dollars was raised locally. Thus, the Museum was assured of the sum of 100,000 dollars to continue its program of research work in Polynesia for a period of five years. The fund enabled the Museum to add to its scientific staff, finance Museum expeditions, and publish scientific reports without the delay caused by a limited printing fund.</p>
          <p>The ethnologists on the staff were J. F. G. Stokes, <name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name> and Edward S. C. Handy. As a result of the increased fund, an invitation was extended to me to join the staff in Polynesian research, which I did in 1927.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Bishop Museum Staff Expeditions</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>In addition to research work conducted in the Hawaiian Islands by Emory in archaeology and Handy in therapeutics and agriculture, the ethnologists on the Museum staff made field trips to other parts of Polynesia as follows:</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d2" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Society Islands</hi> (1923)</head>
            <p><name key="name-202883" type="person">E. S. C. Handy</name>, Ethnologist; <name key="name-400673" type="person">Willowdean C. Handy</name>, Associate in Polynesian Folklore; and <name key="name-405115" type="person">Jane Winne</name>, volunteer assistant, spent seven months in the Society Islands. The islands of Tahiti, Moorea, Raiatea, Huahine, Tahaa, Borabora and Maupiti were visited. Measurements, observations, and photographs of 200 natives were obtained. Handy paid particular attention to history, culture, and some phases of material culture; Mrs. Handy made a study of native plaiting, net making, food preparations, and string figures; and Miss Winne devoted her attention to songs and music. Dr. and Mrs. Handy also made short visits to Samoa, Tonga, and Fiji. In Samoa, Handy made a study of Samoan houses and Mrs. Handy studied cooking and tattooing.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d3" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Society Islands and Tuamotus</hi> (1925)</head>
            <p><name key="name-401952" type="person">K. P. Emory</name>, after leaving the <hi rend="i">Kaimiloa</hi>, spent almost the entire year of 1925 in the Society Islands and some of the Tuamotu atolls studying <choice><orig>archae-<pb xml:id="n60" n="50"/>ology</orig><reg>archaeology</reg></choice>, particularly the stone religious structures termed marae. He was assisted by Mrs. Emory, formerly Mlle. Marguerite Thuret of Papeete, whose knowledge of the Tahitian language and native life were of much value. The islands visited were Tahiti, Moorea, Raiatea, Huahine, Tahaa, Borabora, and Maupiti, and short trips were made to the Tuamotu atolls of Kaukura and Arutua. Observations were made on more than 50 maraes. Financial assistance was given by Medford R. Kellum.</p>
            <p>In 1926, Mr. and Mrs. Emory went to Europe, where a study and photographic records were made of the Polynesian material in some of the principal European museums.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d4" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Samoa</hi> (1926, 1927)</head>
            <p>A Museum party, consisting of C. Montague Cooke, Jr., leader; <name type="person" key="name-405063">A. F. Judd</name>, President of the Board of Trustees; and T. T. Dranga, collector, spent February and March of 1926 in American Samoa (Tutuila and Tau) collecting landshells. Mr. Judd also gave considerable attention to collecting ethnological material to fill gaps in the Museum collection. In his report to the Director he stated:</p>
            <list>
              <item>
                <p>The material culture of the Samoans is changing very rapidly. Some of the things I obtained were curiosities to the younger Samoans, who did not know their names or uses. It is my conviction that with all due speed we should send a competent ethnologist to Samoa to complete our collections.</p>
              </item>
            </list>
            <p>Following upon Judd's report of the previous year, a party consisting of <name type="person" key="name-405063">A. F. Judd</name>, leader; Bruce Cartwright, Associate in Ethnology; and me as Ethnologist, visited Tutuila in September 1927. We made a complete tour of the islands of Tutuila and Aunuu and were hospitably received in every village. The object of Bishop Museum in making a complete survey of the Polynesian people was explained to the people through a bilingual talking chief attached to the party, and hearty cooperation was accorded both in information and material objects illustrating the arts and crafts. Judd and Cartwright returned to Honolulu at the end of a month and Mrs. Buck joined me in Samoa.</p>
            <p>We visited the Manua Islands, Tau, Olosega, and Ofu. We were joined by Paul T. Diefenderfer, Assistant in Ethnology. However, he was shortly offered the position of Superintendent of Education by the Naval Administration, and as the position would enable him to continue research in ethnology, he accepted it. Mrs. Buck and I then visited Upolu and Savaii in British Samoa, where, with the cooperation of the administration, additional information and artifacts were obtained. Work was concentrated throughout on material culture and the technical details of the various crafts. Mrs. Buck and I returned to Honolulu in March 1928.</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n61" n="51"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d5" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Cook Islands</hi> (1929-1930)</head>
            <p>I was deputed by the Museum to make a survey of the Cook Islands. Accompanied by Mrs. Buck, I reached Rarotonga early in 1929 after a month in Tahiti. Gerrit P. Wilder, Associate in Botany to Bishop Museum, assisted me in Rarotonga by taking photographs of ethnological material.</p>
            <p>Visits by trading schooner were made to the northern atolls of Manihiki, Rakahanga, and Tongareva (Penrhyn). Complete sets of the genealogies of the inhabitants were obtained and, at Tongareva, a detailed survey was made of the religious marae structures on all the islets, many on the uninhabited islets being in fair preservation. The return to Rarotonga was made by way of Raiatea and Tahiti.</p>
            <p>The high islands in the lower Cook group were visited in turn. Short stays were made on Aitutaki and Mitiaro, a month each on Atiu and Mauke, and a longer stay, over part of the hurricane season, at Mangaia. Anthropometrical measurements were made, and Mrs. Buck helped with the recordings as well as in entertaining informants with the necessary hospitality. Great assistance was rendered by Judge Ayson, Resident Commissioner of the Cook Islands, and the government agents throughout the group. The return was made by way of New Zealand, where public lectures were given. We reached Honolulu in April, 1930.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d6" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Tuamotu Archipelago</hi> (1929-1931)</head>
            <p><name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name> was delegated by the Museum to conduct a thorough survey of the numerous atolls which comprise the <name key="name-402059" type="place">Tuamotu</name> Archipelago. J.Frank Stimson, who had attended Yale University and later taken up residence in Tahiti, had assisted the Museum in translating Tahitian and Tuamotuan material and had been appointed to the Museum staff in 1928 as Research Associate in Linguistics. He was appointed assistant to Emory in carrying out the Tuamotu survey. As the atolls were widely scattered and as transport by trading schooner was uncertain and irregular, Emory was authorized to have a suitable motor boat built in Tahiti to accommodate the survey.</p>
            <p>Emory arrived in Tahiti on March 2, 1929, and, while the boat was being built, visited Takaroa and Takapoto. The motor boat <hi rend="i">Mahina-i-te-pua</hi> was ready by September 7, and the atolls of Faite, Katiu, Raroia, Napuka, Fagatau, and Fakahina were visited during the remainder of the year.</p>
            <p>The first six months of 1930 were spent in overhauling material in Papeete, Tahiti, with an interlude visit to Makatea. After June 17, visits were made to Anaa, Hikueru, Amaru, Vahitahi, Takoto, Nukutavake, Vairaatea, Pinaki, and Reao, whence the boat returned to Papeete. In December, a trip was made to Meetia with <name type="person" key="name-209263">H. D. Skinner</name>, Lecturer on Anthropology at the University of Otago, New Zealand.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n62" n="52"/>
            <p>In 1931, on his return trip to Honolulu, Emory visited a number of museums in New Zealand. He arrived in Honolulu on July 10, after an absence of two and a half years, with a rich amount of information, particularly with regard to maraes, and a large assprtment of dictaphone records of native chants and songs. Stimson had been particularly busy in collecting the native texts of songs and traditions and in making translations. He continued in Tahiti the task of translating myths and legends and compiling a Tuamotuan dictionary.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d7" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Mangarevan Islands, Tuamotus</hi> (1934)</head>
            <p>The Mangarevan Expedition, as it was termed, was organized by the Museum for the survey in natural history and ethnology of the little-known islands of southeast Polynesia. A converted sampan of 75 tons, renamed the <hi rend="i">Islander</hi>, was chartered in Honolulu and placed under the command of Captain William Anderson. The natural science party, under the leadership of C. Montague Cooke, Jr., malacologist, included Donald Anderson, malacologist; Harold St. John and <name type="person" key="name-405080">F. R. Fosberg</name>, botanists; and E. C. Zimmerman, entomologist. Under the direction of Cooke, the sampan visited islands in the Tuamotu, Austral, Pitcairn, Mangareva, Society, and equatorial islands. The expedition resulted in the richest collections ever made in landshells, insects, and plants in Polynesia. The members of the crew assisted in collecting. One of them, Yoshio Kondo, did such fine work that he was afterwards appointed to the staff of the Museum as Assistant in Malacology.</p>
            <p>For the ethnological part of the expedition, the schooner <hi rend="i">Tiare Tahiti</hi>, under Captain Robert S. Burrell, was chartered, as the itinerary and length of stay on islands differed from that of the sampan party. The ethnological personnel consisted of Emory, Stimson, and me. Emory sailed in the <hi rend="i">Islander</hi> from Honolulu and spent a few days at Fanning Island to check on archaeological data. Stimson joined in work in the Tuamotus which commenced in Napuka and moved to Tatakoto, where I joined the party on September 5. As the <hi rend="i">Tiare Tahiti</hi> had to go into dock for repairs, the party was transported by the trading schooner <hi rend="i">Moana</hi> to Pukarua, Reao, and Mangareva. Emory and I remained at Mangareva to make a thorough survey, while Stimson returned to Tatakoto to complete investigations there. Emory visited Temoe in a local schooner and later sailed in the <hi rend="i">Tiare Tahiti</hi> for Tahiti, touching at South Marutea, Vahanga, Tenararo, Tureia, Nukutavake, and Pinaki, where he met Stimson. He went on to Tahiti, then returned to Honolulu. Stimson remained in the Tuamotus, and I returned to Honolulu via Tahiti and New Zealand.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d8" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">The Micronesian Expedition</hi> (1935-1936)</head>
            <p>The attention of Bishop Museum had been directed toward Micronesia, because it formed a route of migration between Polynesia and the Asiatic mainland. In 1935, a cooperative agreement was made whereby an expedition was <pb xml:id="n63" n="53"/>possible. Through the recommendation of Dr. Joji Sakurai, President of the Research Council of Japan, the Japanese Government granted permission to conduct a collecting expedition in the mandated islands and provide facilities for work. The Museum's contribution to the cost of the expedition was made possible by substantial gifts from C. Montague Cooke, Jr., Henry G. Lapham, and the Hawaiian Sugar Planters' Association. The agreement provided that all collections and field records be sent to Bishop Museum and that, after they had been studied, representative sets of specimens be deposited in Japanese institutions.</p>
            <p>Professor Shinkishi Hatai, Director of the Palau Tropical Biological Station, made the arrangements for the selection of personnel and the conduct of field work. He selected two botanists, two entomologists, an assistant conchologist, and an anthropologist from the staff of the Saito Foundation Museum, which continued the salaries of the members in the field. Yoshio Kondo, Assistant Malacologist at Bishop Museum, was admitted to the party, and he joined the expedition in Japan. He was accompanied by his wife, who rendered invaluable service in the field. The expedition left Japan on December 8, 1935 and returned to Japan on June 10, 1936, having visited Saipan, Truk, Kusaie, Ponape, Palau, and Yap. As many of them had not hitherto been worked systematically, the collection of natural history specimens, particularly in land-shells, was extremely valuable to science. No doubt Mr. Kondo's previous field experience on the Mangarevan Expedition had much to do with his fine collecting. The anthropologist, Y. Muranashi, collected artifacts and took photographs which were sent to Bishop Museum.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Outside Expeditions</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d1" type="preamble">
              <p>In accordance with its program for the anthropological survey of Polynesia, the Museum was prepared to cooperate with field workers from other institutions. Where arrangements for the field work had already been made, the Museum gave financial assistance by publishing the ethnological reports on islands within the Polynesian area. Such outside expeditions are listed as follows:</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d2" type="section">
              <head>Chatham Islands (1919)</head>
              <p><name type="person" key="name-209263">H. D. Skinner</name>, Lecturer in Anthropology at the University of Otago, New Zealand, made a field trip to the <name key="name-120136" type="place">Chatham Islands</name> in 1919. He had already examined the Moriori (Chatham Islanders) material in the New Zealand museums when the outbreak of World War I took him to Gallipoli with the New Zealand Expeditionary Force. Before returning to New Zealand, he had the opportunity of taking a course in anthropology at Cambridge and studying the Moriori material in the British Museum, the Pitt-Rivers Museum, Oxford, and the Fitzwilliam Museum, Cambridge. The museums visited contained more old material than could possibly be found in the Chatham Islands, but the field trip gave the geographical background in which the material objects were <pb xml:id="n64" n="54"/>made. Skinner's manuscript on "The Morioris of Chatham Islands" was published by Bishop Museum (Memoirs, IX, 1, 1923).</p>
              <p>A second visit to the Chatham Islands was made by Skinner in 1924 with a party of scientists from the Otago Institute and the Canterbury Museum. His new material and information obtained from <name type="person" key="name-405070">William Baucke</name>, an old resident of the Chatham Islands living at the time in New Zealand, resulted in a combined manuscript on "The Morioris", which was published by Bishop Museum (Memoirs, IX, 5, 1928).</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d3" type="section">
              <head>Niue (1923-1924)</head>
              <p>Edwin R. Loeb of the University of California, and his wife, arrived in <name key="name-123229" type="place">Niue</name> on August 25, 1923, and left on March 24, 1924. Loeb completed a manuscript on the "History and traditions of Niue", much of it based on accounts written in native text by the natives themselves. The Museum provided some financial assistance, and part of the artifacts collected on the island were deposited with Bishop Museum. The Museum published Loeb's manuscript as Bulletin 32 (1926).</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d4" type="section">
              <head>Manua, Samoa (1925-1926)</head>
              <p><name key="name-035847" type="person">Margaret Mead</name>, as a Fellow in the Biological Sciences of the National Research Council, spent nine months in American Samoa making a study of the adolescent girl among a primitive people. Before going to Samoa, she was made an Associate in Ethnology of Bishop Museum, where she spent several weeks preparing for her field work. As a result of her field studies, she also prepared a manuscript on the "Social organization of Manua", which was published by Bishop Museum as Bulletin 76 (1930).</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d5" type="section">
              <head>Easter Island (1934-1935)</head>
              <p><name key="name-102888" type="person">Alfred Métraux</name> visited <name key="name-150173" type="place">Easter Island</name> as a member of the Franco-Belgian Expedition. The first plans for the expedition were conceived by the Institut d'Ethnologie de l'Université de Paris and by the Muséum national d'histoire naturelle in Paris. The Belgian Government and scientific institutions gave their support to the enterprise, which became a joint undertaking by the two countries. The expedition was originally composed of Charles Louis Watelin, French archaeologist; <name type="person" key="name-405082">Henry Lavachery</name>, Conservator of the Royal Museum of art and history, Brussels; Israel Drapkin, Chilian physician; and Alfred Métraux, Ethnologist. The French Navy conveyed the members of the expedition to Easter Island aboard the <hi rend="i">Rigault-de-Genouilly</hi>, but Mr. Watelin died on the way, in the Patagonian channels. The Belgian training ship <hi rend="i">Mercator</hi> returned the members of the expedition to France when their work was finished.</p>
              <p>As I have stated, the Museum awarded Métraux a Bishop Museum Fellowship to enable him to write up his Ethnology of Easter Island at the Museum. The Museum published it (Bulletin 160, 1940) as well as a demographic study by Drapkin (Occasional Papers, XI, 12, 1935).</p>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n65" n="55"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d6" type="section">
              <head>First Zaca Expedition (1933)</head>
              <p>An expedition to the Solomon Islands was organized by <name type="person" key="name-405094">Templeton Crocker</name> in 1933, and through his courtesy the Museum was represented on the Crocker yacht, <hi rend="i">Zaca</hi>, by <name type="person" key="name-101716">Gordon Macgregor</name>, Bishop Museum Fellow for 1931. The islands visited in Polynesia were Pukapuka, where Macgregor obtained information which was published by the Museum (Occasional Papers, XI, 6, 1935), and Hull and Sydney Islands in the Phoenix group, where 31 archaeological sites were studied. In addition to the Solomon Islands, a number of Melanesian islands, which are usually regarded as Polynesian outliers, were visited. These were Nupaki and Naloko in the Santa Cruz Islands, Sikiana, Rennell, Bellona, Matema, in the Reef Islands, and Anuda. Observations were made, and Mr. Crocker gave the Museum a fine set of photographs.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d8-d9-d7" type="section">
              <head>Second Zaca Expedition (1934-1935)</head>
              <p>The second expedition organized by <name type="person" key="name-405094">Templeton Crocker</name> was accompanied by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>. The <hi rend="i">Zaca</hi> visited the Society Islands, Tatakoto and Hao in the Tuamotus, the Austral Islands, Rapa, Mangareva, Pitcairn, and Easter Island. Shapiro was able to procure additional physical measurements to round off the material for Polynesia.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d9" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The American Museum of Natural History</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Cooperation between Bishop Museum and the American Museum of Natural History was established in 1920 when plans were made for the ethnological survey of Polynesia. <name type="person" key="name-405074">Clark Wissler</name>, Curator of Anthropology at the American Museum, was made Consulting Anthropologist to Bishop Museum, and his experience and advice have proved invaluable throughout the years. The special field of cooperation was in physical anthropology and, by agreement, <name type="person" key="name-405083">Louis R. Sullivan</name> (B.A., Bates College; M.A., Brown University) was appointed Research Associate in Anthropology to Bishop Museum, on January 18. Sullivan had pursued graduate courses in anthropology, palaeontology, and anatomy at Columbia University and at the College of Physicians and Surgeons. On his release from service as anthropologist in the United States Army (1918-1919) he became Assistant Curator of Anthropology at the American Museum. In the planning of the Bayard Dominick Expeditions, the detailed plans for the field work in physical anthropology and the analysis of results were placed in the hands of Sullivan. To insure uniformity of technique and consequent comparability of results, methods of taking measurements and of recording descriptive observations were discussed with members of the expedition and, as far as practicable, actual field practice was given under his direction.</p>
          <p>The anthropometric cards filled in by members of the Bayard Dominick Expeditions in Samoa, Tonga, and the Marquesas were analyzed and worked up by Sullivan for publication by the Museum. He, himself, made <choice><orig>measure-<pb xml:id="n66" n="56"/>ments</orig><reg>measurements</reg></choice> on the Hawaiians, both adults and children. He worked up his material on the adult Hawaiians shortly before his death in 1925, and his manuscript was prepared for publication by <name type="person" key="name-405074">Clark Wissler</name>. Wissler also worked up Sullivan's notes on Hawaiian children.</p>
          <p><name type="person" key="name-102889">Harry L. Shapiro</name> (Ph.D., Harvard), who was a Bishop Museum Fellow in 1923, when he made a field study on the descendants of the mutineers of the <hi rend="i">Bounty</hi> living in Norfolk Island, was appointed Assistant Curator of Anthropology at the American Museum. Under the cooperation prevailing between the two institutions, he was made Research Associate in Anthropology to the Bishop Museum, and he continued Sullivan's work of analyzing the anthropometric cards returned by expeditions and preparing manuscripts for publications. His first work was on the Tahitian cards filled in by Stokes in 1922 and by Dr. and Mrs. Handy in 1923. In 1929, Shapiro spent 10 months in the Marquesas, Tuamotu, and Society Islands, where he joined the Bishop Museum Tuamotu Expedition and was assisted by Emory and Stimson. In 1934, he accompanied the <name key="name-405094" type="person">Templeton Crocker</name> Expedition to Tahiti, Tuamotus, Australs, Mangareva Islands, and Easter Island and further augmented the anthropometrical records. He worked up the field measurements made by me on my expedition to the Cook Islands and the manuscript was published by the Museum in 1936 (Memoirs, XII, 1).</p>
          <p>Field measurements made by Macgregor in Samoa, <name key="name-020057" type="place">Tonga</name>, <name key="name-123228" type="place">Tokelau</name>, and <name key="name-402127" type="place">Rotuma</name> and by <name type="person" key="name-207378">Earnest Beaglehole</name> in Pukapuka, as well as his own material, will be dealt with later by Shapiro, as time and other duties permit. It will be noted that field work in physical anthropology has been conducted by both institutions, the material prepared for publication by the American Museum, and the final publication by Bishop Museum. The material published by the Museum is shown in the following list:
<table><head>Anthropometrical Surveys</head><row><cell role="label"><hi rend="sc">Islands</hi></cell><cell role="label"><hi rend="sc">Field Observers</hi></cell><cell role="label"><hi rend="sc">Authors</hi></cell><cell role="label"><hi rend="sc">Bishop Museum Publications</hi></cell></row><row><cell>Samoa</cell><cell>E. W. Gifford W. C. McKern</cell><cell>L. R. Sullivan</cell><cell>Memoirs, VIII, 2, 1921</cell></row><row><cell/><cell>W. C. McKern</cell><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell>Tonga</cell><cell>E. W. Gifford W. C. McKern</cell><cell>L. R. Sullivan</cell><cell>Memoirs, VIII, 4, 1922</cell></row><row><cell/><cell>W. C. McKern</cell><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell>Marquesas</cell><cell>E. S. C. Handy W. C. Handy</cell><cell>L. R. Sullivan</cell><cell>Memoirs, IX, 2, 1923</cell></row><row><cell/><cell>W. C. Handy</cell><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell>Hawaii (adults)</cell><cell>L. R. Sullivan</cell><cell>L. R. Sullivan</cell><cell>Memoirs, IX, 4, 1927</cell></row><row><cell>Norfolk Island</cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name></cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name></cell><cell>Memoirs, XI, 1, 1929</cell></row><row><cell>Hawaii, (children)</cell><cell>L. R. Sullivan</cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-405074">Clark Wissler</name></cell><cell>Memoirs, XI, 2, 1930</cell></row><row><cell>Society Islands</cell><cell>E. S. C. Handy W. C. Handy J. J. F. G. Stokes</cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name></cell><cell>Memoirs, XI, 4, 1930</cell></row><row><cell/><cell>W. C. Handy</cell><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell/><cell>J. F. G. Stokes</cell><cell/><cell/></row><row><cell>Cook Islands</cell><cell>P. H. Buck</cell><cell>H. L. Shapiro P. H. Buck</cell><cell>Memoirs, XII, 1, 1936</cell></row><row><cell/><cell/><cell>P. H. Buck</cell><cell/></row></table></p>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n67" n="57"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d10" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Field Work in Hawaiian Archaeology</hi>
          </head>
          <p>To give students in anthropology an opportunity for field work, Bishop Museum from time to time attached a mainland student to the Museum staff as assistant ethnologist and assigned him to study the archaeology of one of the Hawaiian Islands. The appointments made and the fields of study in archaeology are as follows:
<table><row><cell>1920</cell><cell>Haleakala</cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name>, B.A., Dartmouth (Occasional Papers, VII, 11, 1921)</cell></row><row><cell>1921-22</cell><cell>Lanai</cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name> (Bulletin 12, 1924)</cell></row><row><cell>1924</cell><cell>Nihoa, Necker</cell><cell><name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name>, promoted from assistant ethnologist to ethnologist (Bulletin 53, 1928)</cell></row><row><cell>1928</cell><cell>Kauai</cell><cell>Wendell C. Bennett, Ph.B., Chicago (Bulletin 80, 1931)</cell></row><row><cell>1928</cell><cell>Maui (west)</cell><cell>Winslow M. Walker, M.A., California (manuscript)</cell></row><row><cell>1929</cell><cell>Oahu</cell><cell>J. Gilbert McAllister, B.A., Texas (Bulletin 104, 1933)</cell></row><row><cell/><cell>Kahoolawe</cell><cell>J. Gilbert McAllister; study made from Museum specimens (Bulletin 115, 1933)</cell></row><row><cell>1931</cell><cell>Hawaii</cell><cell>Alfred E. Hudson, Ph.B., Yale (manuscript)</cell></row><row><cell>1937</cell><cell>Molokai</cell><cell>Southwick Phelps, graduate student, Yale (manuscript)</cell></row></table></p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d11" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Bishop Museum Visiting Professor to Yale</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The affiliation between Bishop Museum and Yale University whereby the Director of the Museum was appointed from the Yale Faculty, led to the Museum reciprocating by financing a visiting lecturer to Yale, who had some practical knowledge of the Pacific area in anthropology or the natural sciences. Yale gave the lecturer the status of a full professor on the faculty during his term of appointment. The academic year at Yale commences in September and ends in May of the following year. The first appointment was for the academic year of 1931-1932. The following list gives the Visiting Professors and their field experience in the Pacific area:</p>
          <list>
            <item>
              <p>1931-32. Richard C. Thurnwald, Dr.jur., Professor of Ethnology, Race Psychology, and Sociology at the University of Berlin; field work in the Solomon Islands and New Guinea in anthropology.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1932-33. Peter H. Buck (<name type="person" key="name-202886">Te Rangi Hiroa</name>), D.S.O., M.D., Ch.B. (N.Z.), Ethnologist on Bishop Museum staff; Bishop Museum expedition to Samoa and the Cook Islands.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1933-34. Peter H. Buck, reappointed.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1934-35. <name type="person" key="name-401779">Carl Skottsberg</name>, Ph.D., Professor of Botany at University of Upsala' and Director of Botanical Gardens at Goteborg, Sweden; Bishop Museum Fellow, 1922-23; field work in Hawaii, Easter Island, and Juan Fernandez in botany.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1935-36. E. S. C. Handy, Ph.D. (Harvard), Ethnologist on Bishop Museum staff; Bayard Dominick Expedition to the Marquesas, Bishop Museum Expedition to the Society Islands, field work in Hawaii and Samoa.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1936-37. E. S. C. Handy, reappointed.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1937-38. <name type="person" key="name-405072">Charles G. Seligman</name>, M.D., F.R.C.P., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Ethnology at University of London; member of Cambridge Anthropological Expedition to Torres Straits and Borneo; Daniels Expedition to New Guinea.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1938-39. Alfred Métraux, Ph.D. (Paris), member Franco-Belgian Expedition to Easter Island; Bishop Museum Fellow, 1936-37 in anthropology.</p>
            </item>
            <pb xml:id="n68" n="58"/>
            <item>
              <p>1939-40. Harold St. John, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of Botany at University of Hawaii, Botanist on Bishop Museum staff; member of Mangarevan Expedition to southeastern Polynesia.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1940-41. Bronislaw Malinowski, Ph.D., D.Sc, Professor of Anthropology at University of London; member of Robert Mond Anthropological Expedition to New Guinea and northwest Melanesia.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>1941-42. Bronislaw Malinowski, reappointed.</p>
            </item>
          </list>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d12" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The University of Hawaii</hi>
          </head>
          <p>In 1920, a cooperative agreement was made with the University of Hawaii "whereby scientific research and the training of investigators may be promoted." This involved reciprocity in the use of libraries, laboratories, collections, and other research facilities. The Museum was to be the depository and curator of systematic collections and the University was to aid in collecting. The Museum was to aid in the publication of scientific papers originating in the University which fell within its field. Graduate students registered at the University were to be allowed to carry on research work at the Museum under the direction of members of the Museum staff.</p>
          <p>For some years, the Museum provided part of the salaries of two professors at the University and they were thus on the staff of both institutions, giving lectures at the University and doing research work at the Museum. Later the University was able to provide the full salaries, but the positions on the Museum staff continued. University students under the direction of their professors have added materially to the collections of the Museum in the natural sciences. Scientific papers by members of the University staff and graduate students have been published by the Museum. Members of the Museum staff have given courses in anthropology at the University. Skeletal material collected by Dr. Bowles of the University staff and his students in physical anthropology has been deposited in the Museum, thereby building up what is undoubtedly the largest collection of Hawaiian skeletal material in the world. The cooperation between the two institutions has resulted in benefit to each and good to science in general.</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d13" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Miscellaneous Publications</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Among the studies made by people or organizations not directly connected with the Museum but completed by the Museum as regards the publication of results are the following:</p>
          <p><hi rend="i">Hawaiian Dictionary</hi> (1921). The Board of Commissioners of Public Archives received a grant of $25,000 from the Legislature to produce a revision of the "Dictionary of the Hawaiian Language" prepared by Lorrin Andrews and published in 1865. The task was entrusted to the <name type="person" key="name-405092">Reverend Henry Hodges Parker</name>, who worked on the project for five years following his appointment on January 1, 1915. Early in 1921, the manuscript cards for the dictionary were transmitted by the Board of Archives to Bishop Museum, which consented to <pb xml:id="n69" n="59"/>do the editorial work necessary to prepare the volume for the press. Galley proof was read by Mr. Parker. The Board of Commissioners of Public Archives made the following acknowledgment in the Preface to the Dictionary published in 1922: "The Board is under obligation to the Bishop Museum for skilled assistance and for financial aid which has permitted the publication of the dictionary without further drafts on Territorial funds."</p>
          <p><hi rend="i">Ancient Hawaiian Music</hi> (1923-1924). The Hawaiian Legend and Folklore Commission (John R. Galt, Chairman) was set up by an act of the Legislature to make a survey of Hawaiian music. <name type="person" key="name-405081">Helen H. Roberts</name>, who had much experience in research work on Indian music, was appointed to make the study. Her field work in Hawaii resulted in a manuscript which included a description of musical instruments used by the Hawaiians, an analysis of various songs and chants, and the musical notation of a large series of chants. Her original notes and phonographic records were added to the Museum files, and her manuscript on "Ancient Hawaiian Music" was published by the Museum (Bulletin 29, 1926).</p>
          <p><hi rend="i">The Canoes of Oceania</hi> (1936). This exhaustive study was made by two English authorities, <name type="person" key="name-102577">A. C. Haddon</name>, F.R.S., Reader in Anthropology at Cambridge University, and James Hornell, who had specialized in the study of canoes and boats in all parts of the world. The field work of the authors in their expeditions to parts of Oceania was made possible through the generosity of the Trustees of the Percy Sladen Memorial Trust. Information from other parts was obtained through an exhaustive study of the literature, photographs, information from friends and correspondents, and the models in various museums. The results of their study were published by Bishop Museum in three volumes (Special Publications 27-29, 1936-38): volume 1, James Hornell, "Polynesia, Fiji, Micronesia"; volume 2, <name type="person" key="name-102577">A. C. Haddon</name>, "Melanesia, Queensland, New Guinea"; volume 3, both authors, "Definition of terms, general survey, and conclusions."</p>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Surveys of Museums</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The early explorers and their crews collected curios and souvenirs from the various Pacific islands which they visited. Such articles furnish valuable information concerning the arts and crafts which existed before material changes were effected through foreign impact. Probably most of these articles have found their way into museums and private collections where they may be studied, once their location is known. It is necessary, therefore, to follow up the field surveys in Polynesia by a survey of the museums in Europe, America, and elsewhere.</p>
            <p>The finest collection of Polynesian artifacts is in the British Museum. I studied there for three months and did not get through the examination of all the collection, which includes artifacts collected on the voyages of Cook, <choice><orig>Van-<pb xml:id="n70" n="60"/>couver</orig><reg>Vancouver</reg></choice>, Beechey, and others. It also includes the wonderful collection accumulated by the London Missionary Society from the Society, Cook, and Austral Islands. Material collected on Cook's voyages is to be found in Vienna, Florence, and elsewhere. The collection made by Joseph Banks on Cook's first voyage is in the Pitt-Rivers Museum, Oxford; <name type="person" key="name-170595">Anders Sparrman</name>'s collection, made on Cook's second voyage, is in the Royal Swedish Museum, Stockholm; <name type="person" key="name-102157">John Webber</name>'s collection, made on Cook's third voyage, is in the Bern Museum, Switzerland. It would be fascinating as well as valuable to track down the material brought back by the other early voyagers to the countries to which they returned. One wonders whether anything besides journals and charts can be traced back to the Spaniards, <name key="name-150171" type="person">Mendana</name>, <name key="name-401888" type="person">Quiros</name>, <name key="name-401711" type="person">Maurelle</name>, and <name key="name-401682" type="person">Boenechea</name>; to the Dutchmen, <name key="name-401754" type="person">Le Maire</name>, <name key="name-401759" type="person">Schouten</name>, <name key="name-034630" type="person">Tasman</name>, and <name key="name-401755" type="person">Roggeveen</name>; and so on to the British, French, and Russian voyagers who visited the Polynesian area. There is valuable material in <name key="name-401694" type="person">Petrograd</name>, Madrid, and the cities of Europe and Britain, and good material is to be found in the United States. Material collected by the whaling ships of New England in the early part of the nineteenth century is preserved in the Peabody Museums of Salem and Cambridge, Massachusetts. Collections made on the Wilkes Expedition are in the National Museum, Washington, and in the Philadelphia Academy of Science. Good local material is preserved in New Zealand museums and Bishop Museum.</p>
            <p>The difficulty in making a thorough survey of museums is that it requires the services of an expert who can identify Polynesian artifacts by their structure, not by their museum labels. A survey requires an examination of material labeled as Polynesian and the material in other locality cases as well, because there are frequent misplacements. Such a survey would not only reveal where valuable material is located, but would help museums to correct errors in identifications.</p>
            <p>The following visits to European museums, made by members of the Museum staff, may be regarded as reconnaissance visits which indicate the need for sufficient time to be devoted to the making of more complete records.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d2" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">W. T. Brigham, Director</hi> (1896)</head>
            <p>Dr. Brigham left Honolulu on January 28, 1896, and sailed for Europe via Australia. In Australia, he visited the museums of Sydney, Melbourne, Adelaide, and Albany. On the European continent, he studied the Pacific material in the museums at Naples, Rome, Vienna, Munich, Dresden, Berlin, Copenhagen, Hamburg, Amsterdam, Leiden, Brussels, Berne, and Paris; in England at London, Cambridge, and Oxford; and in the United States at Philadelphia, Washington, New York, Boston, Salem, Chicago, Salt Lake City, and San Francisco. His report with illustrations of the rarer and more striking artifacts in various museums was published by Bishop Museum as Occasional Papers, I, 1, 1898.</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n71" n="61"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d3" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Kenneth P. Emory, Ethnologist</hi> (1926)</head>
            <p><name key="name-401952" type="person">Mr. Emory</name>, after making an archaeological survey of the Society Islands, went to Europe to study Polynesian artifacts in European museums. He visited the Continental museums at Paris, Rome, Berne, and Neuchâtel; the English museums at London, Cambridge, and Oxford; and American museums at Cambridge, Salem, New Haven, New York, and Chicago. He obtained a large number of photographs and took careful notes of the more interesting material.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d4" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Robert P. Lewis, Associate in Ethnology</hi> (1926-1935)</head>
            <p>A lover of travel and provided with independent means, Mr. Lewis did fine work for the Museum in searching the museums of Europe and America for information about Hawaiian feather garments, thus earning the sobriquet of "Feather Cloak Lewis." He examined the material in Russia, and in Spain he located three cloaks, four capes, and seven helmets. In England, the cape given by Kamehameha II to Captain Starbuck was presented by his family to Mr. Lewis to convey to Bishop Museum as a gift to the people of Hawaii. A specimen of later work in the form of a peacock-feather cape was presented by Captain A. W. F. Fuller to the Museum through Mr. Lewis. The museums visited are too numerous to mention, suffice it to say that Mr. Lewis located feather capes and cloaks in no fewer than 80 collections in Europe. His photographs, drawings and notes have been incorporated into the Museum's photograph catalog. A fuller description of his work is to be found in his obituary notice in the Report of the Director of Bishop Museum for 1935 (pp. 37-39).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d5" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Peter H. Buck, Bishop Museum Visiting Professor to Yale University</hi> (1933)</head>
            <p>In the vacation between two terms at Yale, I visited Europe to study the Polynesian material in museums, concentrating on a detailed examination of the priceless collection in the British Museum. With the cooperation of the late Captain J. A. Joyce and his staff in the ethnographical department, the various artifacts were removed from their cases, photographed with a Leica camera, and notes made on the technical details. The fine private collection of Captain A. W. F. Fuller was also studied in detail, and the unique collection of W. O. Oldman was examined. Visits were made to the Horniman Museum (Forest Hill), the Chiselhurst Museum (owned by the late H. G. Beasley), Pitt-Rivers Museum (Oxford), Fitzwilliam Museum (Cambridge) and the museums at Bristol, Manchester and Liverpool. During a 20-day trip on the continent, the Polynesian collections were examined in the museums at Leipzig, Dresden, Vienna, Munich, Basle, Berne, Paris, and Boulogne. Just on a thousand photographs of Polynesian artifacts were taken, and these, with <choice><orig>nu-<pb xml:id="n72" n="62"/>merous</orig><reg>numerous</reg></choice> photographs taken in the United States at Salem, Cambridge, New York, Philadelphia and Washington, have been added to the Bishop Museum photograph catalog. For assistance in the project, I am under obligation to the National Research Council for a grant-in-aid.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d6" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Margaret Tltcomb, Librarian</hi> (1937)</head>
            <p><name type="person" key="name-401845">Margaret Titcomb</name>, after being coached by the ethnologists of Bishop Museum, searched a number of European museums during a visit on sabbatical leave. She paid particular attention to museums which had not been visited previously by members of the Bishop Museum staff, with good results. At Zurich, she located a collection made by Dr. Horner, who was astronomer with the Krusenstern Expedition of 1803-1806. At Caen, France, and at La Rochelle, material collected by Dumont d'Urville was seen. The unique fourlegged image of the Mangarevan god Tu was located in Rome. Some of the other museums visited were at Budapest, Geneva, Chambery, Florence, Brest, Cherbourg, Le Havre, Lille, Douai, and Braine-le-Comte. Photographs and notes taken on the tour were incorporated into the Museum's photograph catalog.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d14-d7" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">Kenneth P. Emory, Ethnologist</hi> (1940-1941)</head>
            <p>During a year at the Yale Graduate School, <name key="name-401952" type="person">Mr. Emory</name>, was given the project of adding to the Museum photograph catalog by completing a photograph study of the material at the Peabody Museums at Salem and Cambridge and making as complete a survey as possible of the Wilkes Expedition collection at the National Museum, Washington, and of the collection in the Museum of the Naval Academy at Annapolis. Much new material was brought to light and the Museum photograph catalog was considerably enlarged.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d15" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Photograph Catalog</hi>
          </head>
          <p>The photographs acquired from the expeditions to Europe and from other sources proved so numerous that a system had to be devised whereby they could be handled easily and intelligently. In addition to photographs of Museum artifacts, photographs taken in the field and from illustrations in the literature, and prints obtained through correspondence were added to the photograph catalog and the system adopted was described in the Director's Report for 1942 (pp. 29-31) as follows:</p>
          <list>
            <item>
              <p>The photographs are mounted on plain, 5x8 inch cards which fit into drawers in steel cabinets. Large photographs are reduced and composite photographs are cut in order to mount only one object on each card. There is no objection to mounting different views of the same object on one card if there is room. On the top left corner, the name of the group or island is stamped or written; on the top right corner is the name of the Museum or <pb xml:id="n73" n="63"/>collection where the artifact is stored. If known, the museum or collection number is written just below. The middle of the top border is reserved for the catalog classification and serial number of the photograph. On the left lower corner is recorded the number of the negative from which the print was taken.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>The photographs are classified according to their island of origin and each island or island group has one or more drawers labeled with the locality. The material from each locality is classified into main groups and subsidiary groups. The main groups are given initial figures such as 1, food; 2, houses; 3, plaiting, textiles, cordage; 4, clothing; 5, tools; 6, canoes; 7, fishing; 8, games and amusements; 9, musical instruments; 10, war materials, etc, Each main group is divided into classes distinguished by capital letters which follow the group figure. Thus, under 4 (clothing) are A, headdresses; B, capes; C, cloaks;, D, kilts and skirts; E, girdles, belts; F, sandals; G, bark cloth; H, fine mats; I, dyes. The main classes are again divided into types or varieties by the use of small letters. For example, 4A (headdresses) is divided into a, caps; b, circlets; c, composite headdresses; and d, wigs. In some classes such as 4Ab (circlets), it is necessary to make further subdivisions in order to keep similar artifacts together. Thus the circlets are subdivided according to material by adding another small letter as follows: a, feather; b, turtle shell; c, pearl shell; d, seeds; e, sennit; f, porpoise teeth; g, pandanus; h, hair; i, wood; j, tapa. After the final classification by letters, the individual photographs are given serial numbers in the order in which they were added to the catalog. For example, the turtle shell circlets common in the Marquesas have the classification 4, Ab, b, and the. serial numbers are given as additions are made. The system serves to keep photographs of a similar type together no matter when acquired. Thus all photographs dealing with a particular type of artifact can be extracted from the various drawers for a comparative study. The alphabetical classification is expandible and the classification and serial numbers are written in pencil so that they can be changed if reclassification becomes necessary as a result of further study.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>Complementary to the photographs are cards, 4X6 inches, which fit into smaller drawers in the cabinet above the larger photograph drawers. Arranged in the same way as the photographs and bearing the same classification and serial numbers, they give further details as to size, technique, and references to the literature in which descriptions or illustrations have been made, and also give the name of the object. As more detailed information is acquired, it is added to the cards. The classification adopted is typed out on cards to serve as an index for the catalog and for classifying additional photographs.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>It is now impossible for the Bishop Museum to acquire duplicates of many old artifacts possessed by other Museums, so the next best thing is to have pictures of them with descriptive notes. By building up its photograph catalog as the result of expeditions by staff members and by correspondence with other museums, the Bishop Museum is gradually bringing together in one institution a complete record of the various kinds of Polynesian artifacts throughout the world. From a study point of view, the Bishop Museum is actually richer than the museums which possess the isolated objects. As an illustration, there are to our present knowledge six wooden images of Mangarevan gods distributed as follows: two in Rome, and one each at the British Museum, Braine-le-Comte, St. Germain, and La Rochelle. It is safe to say that none of these museums know of the existence of specimens in other museums. The Bishop Museum's photograph catalog, however, has three photographs (front, back, and side views) of each of the six images as well as notes regarding their dimensions and general description. Thus though we may not have the substance, the imprisoned shadow has a material value.</p>
            </item>
            <item>
              <p>The classification adopted may not suit others in its details but the main principle is to keep types and varieties together and thus to facilitate comparative study within the group or over the whole area. The photograph catalog also serves the purpose of a reference library which is quickly consulted without the loss of time involved in searching through the pages of a number of volumes. As an aid to identifying the locality of Polynesian artifacts, it has proved invaluable.</p>
            </item>
          </list>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n74" n="64"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d7-d16" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Bishop Museum Publications</hi>
          </head>
          <p>Bishop Museum issued its first publication in 1892-1893 in the form of a preliminary catalog of the Museum's collections. It started a series termed Special Publications, which had no fixed page size. In 1897, the series of Occasional Papers in octavo size was begun with an account of the Director's tour round the world to visit museums for the examination of artifacts from the Pacific area. The Director's annual reports were printed as Occasional Papers, and many of them contained ethnological articles by J. F. G. Stokes as well as illustrations of newly acquired artifacts. In 1898, the Memoir series in quarto size was started, with the Director's study on Hawaiian featherwork. The Memoirs were used for long papers, such as Fornander's collection of Hawaiian antiquities and folklore and Brigham's studies on the Hawaiian collections in the Museum. The Museum had its own printing press and printer to deal with approved manuscripts.</p>
          <p>After 1920, the great increase in the number of manuscripts in ethnology and the natural sciences as a result of the Bayard Dominick and other expeditions, led to the abandonment of printing by the Museum and a contract with the <hi rend="i">Honolulu Star-Bulletin</hi> to print the Museum publications. The Occasional Papers in octavo were continued for papers of less than 50 printed pages. They were particularly useful for short taxonomic papers describing new species which were given priority to insure quick publication and protect an author's research work from being superseded elsewhere by quicker publication of later work. The Memoir, quarto size, was found to be inconvenient for the longer manuscripts, so a Bulletin series in royal octavo was commenced in 1923. The Memoir series was reserved for reports on physical anthropology in which the wide tables of physical measurements were better accommodated by the larger pages. The Special Publication series is used occasionally for manuscripts which for reasons such as size, covers, and subject, are better dealt with outside of the Museum's regular series of Bulletins and Occasional Papers.</p>
          <p>Bishop Museum, like other institutions, has adopted rules for the guidance of authors in preparing manuscripts for publication by the Museum. Though there may be more ways than one of preparing scientific papers, conformation to the style accepted by the publishing institution lessens the liability to mistakes by typist and printer and eases the work of the Museum's editor both in preparing manuscript for the printer and in reading proof. Anything that lessens labor also lessens the cost of publishing and funds are saved for further use. The experience of the Museum has been that scientists, no matter how eminent in their particular branch of research, are not immaculate with regard to their manuscripts. Inaccurate references are frequent and lead to the checking of every reference by the editor. Such a condition should not occur, yet its existence cannot be overlooked. It would be easier and less expensive for the Museum to publish manuscripts in the form in which they are submitted <pb xml:id="n75" n="65"/>and hold the author solely responsible for his errors of omission and commission. Yet, when errors are obvious, it seems more scientific to save science from itself, unpleasant and unappreciated though the task may be. The fact that errors have been overlooked in the past is no reason for our remaining short sighted in the present.</p>
          <p>Up to August 31, 1945, the Museum had published 12 volumes of Memoirs containing 39 papers; 186 Bulletins; 18 volumes of Occasional Papers containing 238 papers; and 36 Special Publications. Of these, the 124 works in anthropology are as follows: Memoirs, 30 papers; Bulletins, 65; Occasional Papers, 16 distinct articles, but shorter articles are included in many of the Director's Reports; Special Publications, 13.</p>
          <p>In the lists of literature which follow, the general literature and the literature of the individual islands, the Museum publications are separate.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d8" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Literature on Polynesia</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d1" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Early Voyages</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d1-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The discoveries in Polynesia have been enumerated because of the first contacts with the native inhabitants. The published journals of the voyages thus contain first-hand information concerning the culture of the people. They vary according to the length of contact and the amount of attention which the writers of the journals paid to recording the details of their contact with the natives. In the Tuamotus and other islands where anchorage was impossible or weather conditions were bad, ethnological information may be absent or small. No matter how little the information, however, it is valuable in filling in the picture of native culture before it underwent change from later, more frequent, or prolonged, European contact. Of all the early navigators who tried to record the details of their association with the Polynesians, Captain James Cook is easily the most outstanding.</p>
            <p>The journals of the early voyagers who visited the islands after their discovery are sometimes more valuable than those of the discoverers for reason of a longer stay or a more careful observance of the manners and customs of the people. Thus, Wilson when he discovered the Gambier (Mangareva) Islands did not land, and his observations were of necessity confined to describing a group of people he saw on an islet on the outer reef as the ship passed by. Beechey, who landed on the various islands some 28 years later, provided the first real picture of the culture of the people. Roggeveen, who discovered the Manua Islands of eastern Samoa in 1722, made his observations on the people through a telescope. There is a great difference between what might be termed telescopic information and contact information, yet telescopic information may be better than none. However, valuable as the early journals may be, there is always the possibility of personal errors and exaggerations on the part of the observers.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n76" n="66"/>
            <p>The rate of change in native culture due to contact with western civilization depended not so much on the date of first contact, but upon whether that contact became continuous through the establishment of white settlement. The various phases of native culture were also affected differently according to the reaction of the people and the amount of pressure brought to bear upon them from different directions. For instance, it was obvious to the natives that iron was vastly superior to stone, but they could not all abandon their stone implements until the supply of iron implements was assured. The change in religion after an initial period of doubt as to its advisability was rapid, because missionary settlement became permanent and their attack was sustained and continuous. Other elements in native culture, such as technical processes in building houses and canoes and social organization, changed much more slowly. Thus, the Wilkes Expedition in 1838-1842 was able to record an astonishing amount of valuable information. The changes recorded in chronological sequence of voyages form a record of the process of acculturation in the different island groups and have an important bearing on the present and the future.</p>
            <p>The following list of voyages is arranged chronologically and has been brought down to about the middle of the nineteenth century. The islands visited are named in the notes to the work quoted, but some have been omitted owing to lack of useful information concerning them. Later journals may be useful in indicating further acculturation changes, but aside from that, they are usually a repetition of what has been gained from earlier informants. Some voyages have been described by more than one author, and their works are included as they contain different details from the official account.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d1-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Chronological List of Early Voyagers</hi>
            </head>
            <list>
              <item>1595-1596, Mendaña, Alvaro de, Narrative of the second voyage of … Alvaro de Mendaña, by the Chief Pilot Pedro Fernandez de Quiros: Hakluyt Soc, new ser., vol. 14, pp. 1-157, 1904: The voyages of Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, 1595-1606, vol. 1.
<p>The Zaragoza account. Ships: <hi rend="i">San Jeronimo, Santa Isabel, San Felipe</hi>, and <hi rend="i">Santa Catalina</hi>. <hi rend="c">Marquesas</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1605-1606, Quiros, Pedro Fernandez de, Narrative of the voyage of Pedro Fernandez de Quiros in 1606, for the discovery of the Austrial Regions: Hakluyt Soc, new ser., vols. 14, pp. 161-320, and 15, 1904: The voyages of Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, 1595-1606, vols. 1-2.
<p>The Zaragoza account. Ships: <hi rend="i">San Pedro y San Pablo</hi> and <hi rend="i">San Pedro</hi>. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Swains Island</hi>.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n77" n="67"/>
              <item>1615-1617, Le Maire, Jacob, and Schouten, William, Voyage to Magellanica, Polynesia and Australasia. <hi rend="c">In</hi> John Callender's Terra Australis cognita, vol. 2, pp. 217-269, Edinburgh, 1768.
<p>Drawn up by Aris Claessen, translated into English in 1619. Found also in several other collections, as well as original editions. The Hakluyt Society issue ser. 2, vol. 18, pp. 169-232, 1906 lists the editions. Ships: <hi rend="i">Eendracht</hi> and <hi rend="i">Hoorn</hi>. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Tonga, Alofi, Futuna</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1642-1643, Tasman, Abel Janszoon, Journal of his discovery of Van Diemen's Land and New Zealand in 1642 with documents relating to his exploration of Australia in 1644 … facsimiles of the original manuscript … with an English translation … life and labors of Abel Janszoon Tasman, by J. E. Heeres …, Amsterdam, 1898.
<p>Also two other modern editions: one in Dutch by Posthumus Meyjes, published at The Hague, 1919, and a translation by M. F. Vigeveno, published by the Department of Internal Affairs, Wellington, entitled "Abel Janszoon Tasman and the discovery of New Zealand." Ships: <hi rend="i">Heemskercq</hi> and <hi rend="i">Zeehaen</hi>. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Tonga</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1721-1722, Roggeveen, Jacob, Dagverhaal der Ontdekkings-Reis … met den schepen der <hi rend="i">Arend, Thienhoven</hi> en de <hi rend="i">Afrikaanische Galei</hi> …, Dordt, 1728. Republished 1738 and 1758.
<p>Extract from Mynheer Jacob Roggeveen's official log of his discovery and visit to Easter Island in 1722, by Bolton G. Corney; Hakluyt Soc., ser. 2, vol. 13, 1908. <hi rend="c">Easter Island, Tuamotus, Samoa</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1721-1722, Behrens, Carl Frederick, Histoire de l'Expédition de trois vaisseaux … aux Terres Australes … par Monsieur de B***, vols. 1-2, La Haye, 1739.
<p>An account of Roggeveen's voyage; originally published in German. <hi rend="c">Easter Island, Tuamotus, Samoa</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1764-1766, Byron, John, A voyage round the world, in His Majesty's ship the <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi>, … with an accurate account of seven islands lately discovered in the south seas, by an officer on board the said ship, London, 1767.
<p><hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Pukapuka (Danger Island)</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1766-1768, Wallis, Samuel, An account of a voyage round the world … the <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi>. <hi rend="c">In</hi> John Hawkesworth's, An account of the voyages … for making discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere …, vol. 1, pp. 363-522, London, 1773.
<p><hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Society Islands, Tonga, Uvea (Wallis)</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1766-1769, Bougainville, Louis Antoine de, Voyage autour du monde, par la frégate du roi <hi rend="i">La Boudeuse</hi>, et sa flute <hi rend="i">L'Etoile, …</hi>, Paris, 1771.
<p>An English edition, which appeared in London in 1772, was translated by John Reinhold Forster. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Society Islands, Samoa</hi>.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n78" n="68"/>
              <item>1768-1771, Cook, James, first voyage.
<p>Ship: <hi rend="i">Endeavor</hi>. <hi rend="c">Society Islands, Tuamotus, Rurutu, New Zealand</hi>.</p>
<list><label>a.</label><item>A journal of a voyage round the world …, London, 1771. (The first printed account of Cook's first voyage; a compilation, the first half being a paraphrase of Parkinson's journal.)</item><label>b.</label><item>Cook, James, An account of a voyage round the world … <hi rend="c">In</hi> John Hawkesworth's, An account of the voyages … for making discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere …, vols. 2-3, London, 1773.</item><label>c.</label><item>Parkinson, Sydney, Journal of a voyage to the south seas, … London, 1773.</item><label>d.</label><item>Banks, Sir Joseph, Journal of the Right Hon. Sir Joseph Banks, during Captain Cook's first voyage. … Edited by Sir Joseph D.Hookar, London, 1896.</item></list></item>
              <item>1769-1770, Surville, M. de,
<p>See "Extrait du voyage de M. de Surville." <hi rend="c">In</hi> Crozet 1771-1772, pp. 251-290. <hi rend="c">New Zealand</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1770-1771, Gonzalez, Don Felipe, The voyage of Captain Don Felipe Gonzalez, in the ship … <hi rend="i">San Lorenzo</hi>, with the frigate <hi rend="i">Santa Rosalia</hi> … to Easter Island in 1770-1771, by Bolton G. Corney: Hakluyt Soc., ser. 2, vol. 13, 1908.
<p rend="c">Easter Island.</p></item>
              <item>1771-1772, Crozet,             , Nouveau voyage à la Mer du Sud, commencé sous les ordres de M. Marion (de Fresne) … achevé, après la mort de cet Officier, sous ceux de M. le Chevalier Duclesmeur … redigée d'après les plans et journaux de M. Crozet (by Alexis Marie de Rochon) …, Paris, 1783.
<p>Includes extract of Surville's voyage. Also English translation: Crozet's voyage to Tasmania, New Zealand, the Ladrone Islands, and the Philippines … translated by H. L. Roth …, London, 1891. <hi rend="c">New Zealand</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1772-1775, Cook, James, second voyage.
<p>Ships: <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi> and <hi rend="i">Adventure</hi>. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Society Islands, Tonga, Marquesas, Tuamotus, Niue, Easter Island</hi>.</p>
<list><label>a.</label><item>Cook, James, A voyage toward the South Pole, and round the world … <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi> and <hi rend="i">Adventure</hi> …, vols. 1-2 and atlas, London, 1777.</item><label>b.</label><item>Journal of the <hi rend="i">Resolution's</hi> voyage … also a journal of the <hi rend="i">Adventure's</hi> voyage … (usually attributed to John Marra), London, 1775.</item><label>c.</label><item>Forster, George, A voyage round the world … sloop <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi>, commanded by Captain James Cook …, vols. 1-2, London, 1777.</item><pb xml:id="n79" n="69"/><label>d.</label><item>Forster, John Reinhold, Observations made during a voyage round the world, on physical geography, natural history, and ethic philosophy … (<hi rend="i">Resolution</hi>), London, 1778.</item><label>e</label><item>A voyage round the world … by Captain James Cook … <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi> … Drawn up from authentic papers by an officer on board, London, 1781.</item><label>f.</label><item>Sparrman, Anders, Resa till Goda Hopps-Udden, sodra polkretsen och omkring jordkoltet …, pt. 1, Stockholm, 1783 (also translation into English, German, French, and Dutch); pt. 2, 1802-1818. (Part 2 is the volume concerning the south seas, subtitle is [translated] A voyage round the world with Capt. J. Cook and Mrs. [Messrs.] Forster. … No translation from the Swedish has been printed. Bishop Museum has manuscript translation by Alfred Métraux.)</item></list></item>
              <item>1772-1776, Boenechea, Domingo, Gayanago, Thomas, de Langara, Cayetano, and Rodrigues, Maximo, The quest and occupation of Tahiti by the emissaries of Spain in 1772-1776. Translated and compiled by Bolton G. Corney, vols. 1-3: Hakluyt Society, ser. 2, vols. 32, 36, and 43, 1913, 1914, 1918.
<p>Journals of the expeditions in the <hi rend="i">Aguila</hi>, and Spanish official papers. <hi rend="c">Society Islands, Tuamotus</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1776-1780, Cook, James, third voyage.
<p>Ships: <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> and <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi>. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Tonga, Society Islands, Hawaii, Cook Islands, Tubuai</hi>.</p>
<list><label>a.</label><item>Journal of Captain Cook's last voyage to the Pacific Ocean, on <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> … faithfully narrated from the original manuscript (variously attributed to John Rickman, John Ledyard, and Jared Sparks), London, 1781.</item><label>b.</label><item>Zimmermann, Heinrich, Reise um die Welt mit Captain Cook, Mannheim, 1781. (Also translated into French: Dernier voyage du Capitaine Cook autour du monde … Berne, 1782, again in 1783; translated into English by U. Tewsley and published as Bulletin 2, Alexander Turnbull Library, 1926, entitled, Zimmermann's account of the third voyage …"; also translated by F. W. Howay, with comments on the important accounts of this voyage, as one of the Canadian Historical Studies, Toronto, 1930, entitled, "Zimmermann's Captain Cook…."</item><label>c.</label><item>Ellis, William, An authentic narrative of a voyage performed by Captain Cook and Captain Clerke … <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi> and <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> …, vols.1-2, London, 1782.</item><label>d.</label><item>An authentic narrative of a voyage to the Pacific Ocean: performed by Captain Cook, and Captain Clerke … by an officer on board the <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> (John Ledyard?), vols. 1-2, Philadelphia, 1783.</item><pb xml:id="n80" n="70"/><label>e.</label><item>Cook, James, A voyage to the Pacific Ocean … for making discoveries in the northern hemisphere … performed under the direction of Captains Cook, Clerke, and Gore, in … the <hi rend="i">Resolution and Discovery</hi> …, vols. 1-3 and atlas, London, 1784. (The official account.)</item><label>f.</label><item>Samwell, David, A narrative of the death of Captain James Cook … and observations respecting the introduction of the venereal disease into the Sandwich Islands … <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi>, London, 1786. (<hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi> only.)</item><label>g.</label><item>Webber, John [erroneously given as James], Views in the south seas, from drawings by the late James Webber … the <hi rend="i">Resolution</hi> …, London, 1808. (Illustrations in color, with brief text, taken from Cook's work, by an editor.)</item></list></item>
              <item>1780-1781, Maurelle, Don Francisco Antonio, Narrative of an interesting voyage from Manila to Sainte Blaise … <hi rend="c">In</hi> Voyage of La Pérouse.
<p>See entry under 1785-1788, both English and French editions; translated by the editor from the original Spanish manuscript. Ship: <hi rend="i">La Princessa</hi>. <hi rend="c">Tonga (Late and Vavau), Ellice Islands</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1785-1788, La Pérouse, Jean Francois de Galaup de, Voyage de La Pérouse autour du monde … redige par M. L. A. Milet-Mureau …, vols. 1-4 and atlas, Paris, 1797.
<p>English translation, London, 1798. Ships: <hi rend="i">La Boussole</hi> and <hi rend="i">L</hi>' <hi rend="i">Astrolabe</hi>. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Easter Island, Tonga, Samoa</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1785-1788, Portlock, Nathaniel, A voyage round the world; but more particularly to the northwest coast of America … in the <hi rend="i">King George</hi> and <hi rend="i">Queen Charlotte</hi>, Captains Portlock and Dixon, London, 1789.
<p rend="c">Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1785-1788, Dixon, George, A voyage round the world; … in the <hi rend="i">King George</hi> and <hi rend="i">Queen Charlotte</hi>, Captains Portlock and Dixon, London, 1789.
<p rend="c">Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1787-1789, Bligh, William, A voyage to the south sea, undertaken … for the purpose of conveying the bread-fruit tree to the West Indies … ship <hi rend="i">Bounty</hi>, including an account of the mutiny … and the subsequent voyage … Friendly Islands to Timor …, London, 1792.
<p rend="c">Society Islands, Tonga.</p></item>
              <item>1788-1789, Meares, John, Voyages made … from China to the northwest coast of America …, London, 1790.
<p>Two voyages touched at Hawaii: Meares in the <hi rend="i">Felice</hi>, 1788; Douglas in the <hi rend="i">Iphigenia</hi>, accompanied by the <hi rend="i">North West America</hi>, in 1788-89. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1789, Mortimer, George, Observations and remarks made during a voyage to the islands of Teneriffe … Otaheite, Sandwich Islands … in the brig <hi rend="i">Mercury</hi> …, London, 1791.
<p rend="c">Society Islands, Hawaii.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n81" n="71"/>
              <item>1790-1791, Edwards, Edward, and Hamilton, George, Voyage of H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Pandora</hi> despatched to arrest the mutineers of the "Bounty" in the south seas …, London, 1915.
<p rend="c">Society Islands, Tonga, Samoa, Tuamotus, Tokelau.</p></item>
              <item>1790-1792, Marchand, Etienne, Voyage autour du monde … précédé d'une introduction historique … par C. P. Claret Fleurieu, vols. 1-4, Paris, 1796-1800.
<p>English translation, London, 1801. Ship: <hi rend="i">Le Solide</hi>. <hi rend="c">Marquesas</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1791-1792, Broughton, W. R., Log book of the tender <hi rend="i">Chatham</hi>, manuscripts in British Museum, nos. 1742-1751, 1791-1795.
<p>Broughton, commander of Vancouver's tender, discovered and described the Chatham Islands in 1791. <hi rend="c">Chatham Islands</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1791-1795, Vancouver, George, A voyage of discovery to the north Pacific Ocean and round the world … in the <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> … and … <hi rend="i">Chatham</hi>, vols. 1-3 and atlas of charts, London, 1798.
<p>Included is journal of Broughton, commander of the <hi rend="i">Chatham</hi>. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Marquesas, Rapa, Society Islands</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1791-1795, Menzies, Archibald, Journal of Archibald Menzies kept during his three visits to the Sandwich or Hawaiian Islands … when acting as surgeon and naturalist on board H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> (Captain George Vancouver).
<p>Edited by W. F. Wilson and entitled "Hawaii nei 128 years ago", Honolulu, 1920. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1791-1793, Bligh, William, Captain Bligh's second voyage to the south sea, by Ida Lee, London, 1920.
<p>Ships: <hi rend="i">Providence</hi> and <hi rend="i">Assistant</hi>. <hi rend="c">Society Islands, Cook Islands</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1791-1793, D'Entrecasteaux, Joseph Antoine Bruni, Voyage de Dentrecasteaux, envoyé à la recherche de La Pérouse …, edited by Elisabeth Paul Edouard de Rossel, vols. 1-2, Paris, 1808.
<p>Ships: <hi rend="i">La Recherche</hi> and <hi rend="i">L'Esperance</hi>. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Tonga</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1791-1793, Labillardière, Jacques Julien de, Rélation du voyage à la recherche de La Pérouse …, vols. 1-2 and atlas, Paris, An 8 (1800).
<p>Labillardière was naturalist on the <hi rend="i">Recherche</hi>. English translation, vols. 1-2, London, 1802. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Tonga</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1795-1798, Broughton, William Robert, A voyage of discovery to the north Pacific Ocean … sloop <hi rend="i">Providence</hi>, London, 1804.
<p rend="c">Society Islands, Hawaii.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n82" n="72"/>
              <item>1796-1798, Wilson, James, A missionary voyage to the south Pacific Ocean … ship <hi rend="i">Duff</hi> … compiled from journals of the officers and the missionaries … with a preliminary discourse on the geography and history of the south sea islands, and an appendix … of the natural and civil state of Otaheite …, London, 1799.
<p rend="c">Society Islands, Tonga, Mangareva, Marquesas, Rotuma.</p></item>
              <item>1800-1804, Turnbull, John, A voyage round the world … in which the author visited … the principal islands in the Pacific Ocean, 2d edition, London, 1813.
<p>Ship <hi rend="i">Margaret</hi>. <hi rend="c">Society Islands, Tonga, Hawaii, Tuamotus</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1803-1806, Krusenstern, Adam Johann von, Reise um die Welt … auf dem Schiffen <hi rend="i">Nadeshda</hi> und <hi rend="i">Newa</hi>, vols. 1-3 and atlas, St. Petersburg, 1810-1812, atlas, 1814.
<p>Atlas, folio, is rare, contains 4 plates for Polynesia, all Marquesan. Also English translation: Voyage round the world … <hi rend="i">Nadeshda</hi> and <hi rend="i">Neva</hi> …, vols. 1-2, London, 1813. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Marquesas</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1803-1806, Lisiansky, Urey, A voyage round the world … in the ship <hi rend="i">Neva</hi>, London, 1814.
<p>Krusenstern's voyage. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Easter Island, Marquesas</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1803-1806, Langsdorff, George Heinrich von, Voyages and travels in various parts of the world …, vols. 1-2, London, 1813-1814.
<p>Krusenstern's voyage. Ship: <hi rend="i">Nadeshda</hi>. <hi rend="c">Marquesas, Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1806-1812, Campbell, Archibald, A voyage round the world … in which Japan, Kamschatka, the Aleutian Islands, and the Sandwich Islands were visited …, Edinburgh, 1816.
<p>Ship: <hi rend="i">Thames Indiaman</hi>. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1811-1814, Franchère, Gabriel, Narrative of a voyage to the northwest coast of America … or the first American settlement on the Pacific. Translated and edited by J. V. Huntington, Redfield, 1854.
<p>Translated preface to the French edition dated 1819. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1812-1814, Porter, David, A voyage in the south seas … with particular details of the Gallipagos (<hi rend="i">sic</hi>) and Washington Islands … Frigate <hi rend="i">Essex</hi>, London, 1823.
<p rend="c">Marquesas.</p></item>
              <item>1813-1818, Corney, Peter, Voyages in the northern Pacific: narrative of several trading voyages … between the northwest coast of America, the Hawaiian Islands and China …, Honolulu, 1896.
<p>Reprinted from The London Literary Gazette, 1821. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n83" n="73"/>
              <item>1815-1818, Kotzebue, Otto von, Entdeckungs-Reise in der Süd-see und nach der Berings-strasse zur Erforschung einer nordöstlichen Durchfahrt … Schiffe <hi rend="i">Rurick</hi> …, vols. 1-3, Weimar, 1821.
<p>Also translated into English: A voyage of discovery into the south sea and Beering's Straits, for the purpose of exploring a north-east passage … ship <hi rend="i">Rurick</hi> …, vols. 1-3, London, 1821; also abridgement, vols. 1-2, London, 1821. Kotzebue's first voyage. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Easter Island</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1815-1818, Chamisso, Adelbert von, Reise um die Welt … brigg <hi rend="i">Rurik</hi>, Kapitain Otto von Kotzebue, vols. 1-2, Leipzig, 1836.
<p>Kotzebue's first voyage. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Easter Island</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1815-1818, Choris, Louis, Voyage pittoresque autour du monde … Paris, 1822.
<p>Kotzebue's first voyage. Ship: <hi rend="i">Rurick</hi>. Bishop Museum copy has also a second title page dated 1820. <hi rend="c">Hawaii, Easter Island</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1816-1819, Roquefeuil, Camille de, A voyage round the world … in the ship <hi rend="i">Le Bordelais</hi>, London, 1823.
<p rend="c">Marquesas, Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1817-1819, Golovnin, Vassili Mikhailovitch, Tour around the world, performed … on the sloop of war <hi rend="i">Kamchatka</hi>, St. Petersburg, 1822.
<p>Translated title, original in Russian. Hawaiian section has been translated into English by Ella Embree, manuscript in libraries in Honolulu. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1817-1820, Freycinet, Louis Claude Desaulses de, Voyage autour du monde … sur les corvettes … <hi rend="i">L'Uranie</hi> et <hi rend="i">La Physicienne</hi> … Historique, vols. 1-2 and atlas, Paris, 1827-1839.
<p rend="c">Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1817-1820, Arago, Jacques, Promenade autour du monde …, vols. 1-2 and atlas, Paris, 1822.
<p>Artist with Freycinet on <hi rend="i">L'Uranie</hi>. Also translated into English: Narrative of a voyage round the world …, London, 1823. Another account, Paris, 1840, in vols. 1-2, entitled: Souvenirs d'un aveugle: voyage autour du monde …, Paris, 1838; again in 1840. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1822-1825, Duperrey, Louis Isadore, Voyage autour du monde … <hi rend="i">La</hi> <hi rend="i">Coquille</hi> … Partie historique and atlas, Paris, 1826.
<p>Work not completed. Partie historique has no ethnological information, but atlas contains plates of <hi rend="c">Society Islands, New Zealand, Rotuma</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1822-1825, Lesson, René Primevère, Voyage autour du monde … <hi rend="i">La Coquille</hi> …, vols. 1-2, Paris, 1839.
<p>Duperrey's voyage. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Society Islands, New Zealand, Rotuma</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1823-1826, Kotzebue, Otto von, Neue Reise um die Welt… <hi rend="i">Predpriyatie</hi> …, vols. 1-2, Weimar, St. Petersburg, 1830.
<p>Kotzebue's second voyage. Also English translation: A new voyage round the world …, vols. 1-2, London, 1830. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Hawaii, Samoa, Society Islands</hi>.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n84" n="74"/>
              <item>1824-1825, Byron, George Anson, Voyage of H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Blonde</hi> to the Sandwich Islands …, London, 1826.
<p rend="c">Hawaii, Cook Islands (Mauke).</p></item>
              <item>1825-1828, Beechey, Frederick William, Narrative of a voyage to the Pacific and Beering's Strait, to cooperate with the Polar expeditions … ship <hi rend="i">Blossom</hi> …, vols. 1-2, London, 1831.
<p rend="c">Easter Island, Mangareva, Tuamotus, Society Islands, Hawaii, Pitcairn.</p></item>
              <item>1826-1829, Boelen, J., Reize naar de Oost-en Westkust van Zuid-Amerika … Sandwich en Philippinsche Eilanden … <hi rend="i">Wilhelmina en Maria</hi>, vols. 1-3, Amsterdam, 1835-1836.
<p rend="c">Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1826-1829, Dumont d'Urville, Jules Sébastian César, Voyage de la corvette L'Astrolabe … Histoire du voyage, vols. 1-5 and atlas, vols. 1-2, Paris, 1830-1833.
<p>Dumont d'Urville's first voyage. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Tonga</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1826-1829, Duhaut-Cilly, A., Voyage autour du monde, principalement à la Californie et aux Iles Sandwich …, vols. 1-2, Paris, 1834-1835.
<p>Ship: <hi rend="i">Heros</hi>. <hi rend="c">Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1827-1828, Dillon, Peter, Narrative and successful result of a voyage in the south seas … to ascertain the actual fate of La Perouse's expedition … accounts … of the south sea islanders, vols. 1-2, London, 1829.
<p>Ship: <hi rend="i">Research</hi>. <hi rend="c">New Zealand, Tonga, Rotuma, Tikopia</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1828-1834, Moerenhout, J. A., Voyages aux iles du grand ocean, contenant des documens nouveaus sur la géographie physique et politique, la langue, la littérature, la réligion …, vols. 1-2, Paris, 1837.
<p>A resume of three voyages. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Pitcairn, Easter Island, Rapa, Austral Islands, Mangareva, Society Islands</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1829-1830, Stewart, Charles S., A visit to the south seas, in the U. S. ship <hi rend="i">Vincennes</hi> …, vols. 1-2, New York, 1831.
<p rend="c">Marquesas, Society Islands, Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1830-1832, Meyen, F. J. F., Reise um die Erde … auf dem königlich preussischen see-handlungs-Schiffe <hi rend="i">Prinsess Louise</hi> …, vols. 1-2, Berlin, 1834-1835.
<p rend="c">Hawaii.</p></item>
              <item>1832-1836, Coulter, John, Adventures in the Pacific … (<hi rend="i">Stratford</hi>), Dublin, 1845.
<p rend="c">Marquesas, Society Islands.</p></item>
              <pb xml:id="n85" n="75"/>
              <item>1833-1836, Bennett, Frederick Debell, Narrative of a whaling voyage round the globe …, vols. 1-2, London, 1840.
<p>Ship: <hi rend="i">Tuscan</hi>. <hi rend="c">Society Islands, Hawaii, Marquesas</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1836-1839, Du Petit-Thouars, Abel Aubert, Voyage autour du monde sur la frégate <hi rend="i">La Venus</hi> … Rélation, vols. 1-4 (in two vols.), Atlas pittoresque, Paris, 1840-1845.
<p rend="c">Hawaii, Easter Island, Society Islands, New Zealand, Marquesas.</p></item>
              <item>1836-1842, Belcher, Sir Edward, Narrative of a voyage round the world … ship <hi rend="i">Sulphur</hi> …, vols. 1-2, London, 1843.
<p rend="c">Hawaii, Marquesas, Society Islands, Cook Islands, Tuamotus, Tonga.</p></item>
              <item>1837-1840, Dumont d'Urville, Jules Sébastian César, Voyage au Pôle Sud et dans l'Océanie sur les corvettes L'Astrolabe et La Zélée … Histoire du voyage, vols., 1-10 and atlas, Paris, 1841-1846.
<p>Dumont d'Urville's second voyage. <hi rend="c">Mangareva, Marquesas, New Zealand, Samoa, Society Islands, Tonga, Tuamotus</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1838-1842, Wilkes, Charles, United States Exploring Expedition, commanded by Charles Wilkes, vols. 1-5: Narrative, by Charles Wilkes; vol. 6: Ethnography and philology, by Horatio Hale; vol. 9: The races of man and their geographical distribution, by Charles Pickering, Philadelphia, 1845-1848.
<p>Ships: <hi rend="i">Peacock, Porpoise, Vincennes, Flying Fish;</hi> his other vessels did not reach Polynesia. <hi rend="c">Tuamotus, Society Islands, Samoa, New Zealand, Tonga, Tongareva, Tokelau, Ellice, Phoenix, Hawaii</hi>.</p></item>
              <item>1849, Erskine, John Elphinstone, Journal of a cruise among the islands of the western Pacific … ship <hi rend="i">Havannah</hi>, London, 1853.
<p rend="c">Niue, Samoa, Tonga.</p></item>
            </list>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d2" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">General Works on Polynesia</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d2-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>Apart from the logs of the early explorers, works dealing with Polynesia as a whole were not attempted until toward the latter end of the nineteenth century. <name type="person" key="name-402391">Abraham Fornander</name>, a school inspector in Hawaii, brought out the first volume of "The Polynesian race" in 1878. In 1890, J. Edge-Partington and Charles Heape published the first series of their "Ethnographical album of the Pacific islands." It contained line drawings of artifacts in various museums and private collections throughout the world. A second series followed in 1895 and a third in 1898. The work is of great value to museum workers and students, but locality errors occur due to primary error in the inaccurate labeling of so many museum specimens. Tregear's "Maori-Polynesian <choice><orig>compara-<pb xml:id="n86" n="76"/>tive</orig><reg>comparative</reg></choice> dictionary" was published in 1891 and Ratzel's "History of mankind," with a comparative study of the Oceanic area, was published in English in 1896. The first edition of <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name>'s "Hawaiki: the whence of the Maori" was printed in 1898, and though the title seems to restrict it to New Zealand, it is based on a comparative study of the traditions and genealogies from various Polynesian islands.</p>
            <p>After 1900, the number of works on Polynesia began to increase materially, and those of <name type="person" key="name-207515">J. Macmillan Brown</name>, published in 1924 and 1927, excited a good deal of interest at the time. Though Brown visited various Polynesian groups, including Easter Island, his theory of sunken archipelagos had been evolved before his travels commenced, and his investigations were directed toward interpreting material to support a preconceived theory. Another voluminous writer was <name type="person" key="name-203001">R. W. Williamson</name>, who wrote principally upon social organization and religion, but his work was based entirely on library material of which he was not always able to appraise the value correctly. However, his works contain an excellent review of the literature that was available at the time of writing. His posthumous works, edited by <name type="person" key="name-208976">Ralph Piddington</name>, contain references by the editor to the later research work conducted by Bishop Museum. Myths and traditions aroused the interest of such well-known authorities as <name type="person" key="name-123810">Sir James Frazer</name> in England and <name type="person" key="name-102881">Professor Roland Dixon</name> in America, and they contributed comparative studies on the Polynesian area. They were followed in this field by Andersen, Mackenzie, and Luomala. Traditional material regarding origins and voyages received further attention from <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name>, and religion was studied by <name key="name-202883" type="person">E. S. C. Handy</name>. Various other topical subjects were dealt with by authors whose names are included in the accompanying list on the general literature of Polynesia. Excellent studies on topical subjects in material culture were made by Hornell (canoes), Beasley (fishhooks), and Dodge (gourds). Some studies on museum and private collections are included in the list of general literature.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d2-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Bibliography</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d2-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>General</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andersen</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>Myths and legends of the Polynesians</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andersen</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>Maori music with its Polynesian background</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 10, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author>, <title>Culture peaks in Polynesia</title>: Man, vol. 37, no. 176, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian anthropology today</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, vol. 39, <biblScope>pp. 213-221</biblScope>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>The exploration of the Pacific</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beasley, Harry</hi> G.</author>, <title>Pacific islands records: fishhooks</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beckwith, Martha</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian mythology</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 19-38</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian voyagers</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 5, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">British Museum</hi></author>, <title>Handbook of the ethnographical collections</title>, <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brown</hi>, J. <hi rend="sc">Macmillan</hi></author>, <title>The riddle of the Pacific</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n87" n="77"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brown</hi>, J. <hi rend="sc">Macmillan</hi></author>, <title>Peoples and problems of the Pacific</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Buck</hi>, P. H., <hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P., <hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D., and <hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Terminology for ground stone cutting-implements in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 39, <biblScope>pp. 174-180</biblScope>, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Buck</hi>, P. H.</author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author>), <title>Vikings of the sunrise</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Buck</hi>, P. H.</author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author>), <title>Anthropology and religion</title>, <pubPlace>New Haven</pubPlace>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burney, James</hi></author>, <title>A chronological history of the discoveries in the south sea or Pacific Ocean</title>, vols. 1-5, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date from="1803" to="1817">1803-1817</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Western Polynesia, a study in cultural differentiation</title>: <publisher>Etnologiska Studier</publisher>, no. 7, <biblScope>pp. 1-192</biblScope>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Breed and border in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, vol. 41, <biblScope>pp. 1-21</biblScope>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Culture areas in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 349-363</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Polynesian music and dancing</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher> vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 331-346</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Carr, Denzel</hi></author>, <title>A note on Polynesian orthography</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc, Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 564-568</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Churchill, William</hi></author>, <title>The Polynesian wanderings</title>: <publisher>Carnegie Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Washington</pubPlace>, Pub. 134, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Churchill, William</hi></author>, <title>Club types of nuclear Polynesia</title>: <publisher>Carnegie Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Washington</pubPlace>, Pub. 255, <date when="1917">1917</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Davidson</hi>, J. W.</author>, <title>The Pacific and circum-Pacific appearance of the dart game</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 45, <biblScope>pp. 99-114</biblScope>, <biblScope>119-126</biblScope>; vol. 46, <biblScope>pp. 1-23</biblScope>; <date when="1936">1936</date>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dempwolff, Otto</hi></author>, <title>Vergleichende Lautlehre des Austronesischen Worterschatzes</title>, vols. 1-3, <pubPlace>Berlin</pubPlace>, <date from="1934" to="1938">1934-1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dixon, Roland</hi> B.</author>, <title>The mythology of all races</title>, vol. 9 (Oceania), <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1916">1916</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dixon, Roland</hi> B.</author>, <title>The problem of the sweet potato in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, new ser., vol. 34, no. 1, <biblScope>pp. 40-66</biblScope>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dodge</hi>, E. S.</author>, <title>Gourd growers of the south seas, Salem</title>, <pubPlace>Massachusetts</pubPlace>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Edge-Partington</hi>, J., and <hi rend="sc">Heape, Charles</hi></author>, <title>Ethnographical album of the Pacific Islands</title>, ser. 1-3, <pubPlace>Manchester</pubPlace>, <date when="1890">1890</date>, <date when="1895">1895</date>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ellis, William</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian researches</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1829">1829</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Firth</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>The analysis of mana</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 483-512</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fornander, Abraham</hi></author>, <title>The Polynesian race</title>, vols. 1-3, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date from="1878" to="1885">1878-1885</date>. Index by J. F. G. Stokes, B. P. Bishop Mus., Special Pub. 4, <date when="1909">1909</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Frazer, James</hi> G.</author>, <title>The belief in immortality and the worship of the dead</title>: vol. 2, among the Polynesians, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gudger</hi>, E. W.</author>, <title>Wooden hooks for catching shark and Ruvettus in the south seas</title>: <publisher>American Mus. Nat. Hist., Anthrop. Papers</publisher>, vol. 28, <biblScope>pp. 212-343</biblScope>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Perspectives in Polynesian religion</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 309-330</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hogbin</hi>, H. <hi rend="sc">Ian</hi></author>, <title>Law and order in Polynesia</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1934">1934</date>. (Based on Ontong Java.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lanyon-Orgill</hi>, P. A.</author>, <title>The origin of the Oceanic languages</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 52, <biblScope>pp. 25-45</biblScope>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lovett, Richard</hi></author>, <title>The history of the London Missionary Society</title>, <date from="1795" to="1895">1795-1895</date>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>Oxford</pubPlace>, <date when="1899">1899</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Luomala, Katharine</hi></author>, <title>Documentary research in Polynesian mythology</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 175-195</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Luomala, Katharine</hi></author>, <title>Notes on the development of Polynesian hero-cycles</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 367-374</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Macdonald</hi>, D.</author>, <title>Oceania: linguistic and anthropological</title>, <pubPlace>Melbourne</pubPlace>, <date when="1889">1889</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mackenzie, Donald</hi> C.</author>, <title>Myths and traditions of the south sea islands</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Makemson, Maud</hi> W.</author>, <title>The morning star rises</title>, <pubPlace>New Haven</pubPlace>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n88" n="78"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ngata, Apirana</hi> T.</author>, <title>Anthropology and the government of native races</title>: <publisher>Australasian Journal of Psychology and Philosophy</publisher>, vol. 16, no. 1, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Oldman</hi>, W. O.</author>, <title>Oldman collection of Polynesian artifacts</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 15, <date from="1938" to="1940">1938-1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Piddington, Ralph</hi></author>, <title>Methods of research in Polynesian ethnography</title>: <publisher>Sixth Pacific Sci.</publisher> Congress, Proc., <date when="1939">1939</date> (<pubPlace>California</pubPlace>), vol. 4, <biblScope>pp. 81-84</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Quatrefages de Breau</hi>, J. L. A. <hi rend="sc">De</hi></author>, <title>Les Polynesiens et leur migrations</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace> [<date when="1866">1866</date>].</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ratzel, Frederich</hi></author>, <title>The history of mankind</title>, vols. 1-3, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ray</hi>, S. H.</author>, <title>Polynesian linguistics</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 21, <biblScope>pp. 65-76</biblScope>, <biblScope>164-172</biblScope>; vol. 24, <biblScope>pp. 62-64</biblScope>, <biblScope>92-97</biblScope>; vol. 25, <biblScope>pp. 18-23</biblScope>, <biblScope>44-52</biblScope>, <biblScope>99-103</biblScope>; vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 34-43</biblScope>, <biblScope>99-105</biblScope>, <biblScope>170-179</biblScope>; vol. 28, <biblScope>pp. 168-177</biblScope>; vol. 29, <biblScope>pp. 76-86</biblScope>, <biblScope>207-214</biblScope>; vol. 30; <biblScope>pp. 28-34</biblScope>, <biblScope>103-118</biblScope>; <date from="1912" to="1917">1912-1917</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Read, Charles</hi> H.</author>, <title>On the origin and sacred character of certain ornaments of the S. E. Pacific</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 21, <biblScope>pp. 139-159</biblScope>, <date from="1891" to="1892">1891-1892</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>Recommendations for anthropological research in Polynesia</title>, First Pan-Pacific Scientific Conference, Proc, <date when="1920">1920</date> (<pubPlace>California</pubPlace>), <biblScope>pp. 103-123</biblScope>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Riesrnbrrg, Felix</hi></author>, <title>The Pacific Ocean</title>, <pubPlace>New York and London</pubPlace>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Rivers</hi>, W. H. R.</author>, <title>The history of Melanesian society</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>Cambridge</pubPlace>, <date when="1914">1914</date>. [Contains theories on Polynesian origins.]</bibl>
              <bibl><editor><hi rend="sc">Robson</hi>, R. W.</editor>, Editor, <title>The Pacific islands year book</title>. Five editions have appeared, Sydney and Suva, <date from="1932" to="1944">1932-1944</date>. (The <edition>1944 edition</edition> was condensed and reprinted as <title>"The Pacific islands handbook"</title> by <publisher>MacMillan</publisher>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1945">1945</date>.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>Hawaiki</title>, <edition>3d edition</edition>, <pubPlace>Christchurch</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>; <edition>4th edition</edition>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Söderstrom</hi>, J.</author>, <title>A. Sparrman's ethnological collection from James Cook's 2d expedition (1772-1775)</title>, <pubPlace>Stockholm</pubPlace>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stolpe, Hjalmar</hi></author>, <title>Collected essays on ornamental art</title>, <pubPlace>Stockholm</pubPlace>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>Studies in the anthropology of Oceania and Asia</title>: <publisher>Peabody Mus. of American Archaeology and Ethnology</publisher>, Harvard Univ. Papers, vol. 20, <date when="1943">1943</date>. (Dixon Memorial volume.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sullivan</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>The racial diversity of the Polynesian people</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 32, <biblScope>pp. 79-84</biblScope>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sullivan</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>Race types in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 22-26</biblScope>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tregear, Edward</hi></author>, <title>Maori-Polynesian comparative dictionary</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1891">1891</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Walker, Orsmond</hi></author>, <title>Tiurai le guerisseur, Société des Études Océaniennes</title>, Bull. no. 10, <biblScope>pp. 1-35</biblScope>, <date when="1925">1925</date>. [Summarized in Lowie, R. H., Individual differences and primitive culture, Schmidt-Festschrift (W. Koppers, ed), Vienna, 495-500, 1928.]</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williamson</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>The social and political system of central Polynesia</title>, vols. 1-3, <pubPlace>Cambridge</pubPlace>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williamson</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>Religious and cosmic beliefs of central Polynesia</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>Cambridge</pubPlace>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williamson</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>Religion and social organization in central Polynesia</title> (edited by <editor>Ralph Piddington</editor>), <pubPlace>Cambridge</pubPlace>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williamson</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>Essays in Polynesian ethnology</title> (edited by <editor>Ralph Piddington</editor>), <pubPlace>Cambridge</pubPlace>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d2-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>An index to the islands of the Pacific Ocean</title>, Mem., vol. 1, no. 2, <date when="1900">1900</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Greiner, Ruth</hi> H.</author>, <title>Polynesian decorative designs</title>, Bull. 7, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Polynesian religion</title>, Bull. 34, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Problems of Polynesian origins</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 9, no. 8, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hornell, James</hi></author>, <title>The canoes of Polynesia, Fiji, and Micronesia</title>, vol. 1: <title>Canoes of Oceania</title>, by A. C. Haddon and James Hornell, Special Pub. 27, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Luomala, Katharine</hi></author>, <title>Oceanic, American Indian, and African myths of snaring the sun</title>, Bull. 168, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Luomala, Katharine</hi></author>, <title>The Maui hero cycle in Oceania</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n89" n="79"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, Index to <title>"The Polynesian Race"</title> by Abraham Fornander (3 vols., <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date from="1878" to="1885">1878-1885</date>), Special Pub. 4, <date when="1909">1909</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Arts and Crafts of the Cook Islands</title>, Bull. 179, <biblScope>pp. 473-526</biblScope>, <date when="1944">1944</date>. (Historical reconstruction of cultural processes in Polynesia.)</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d3" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Easter Island</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d3-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-150173" type="place">Easter Island</name>, situated in latitude 27° 10' S. and longitude 109° 20' W., is the most easterly land settled by the Polynesians. It is a lone volcanic island 1,600 miles from Mangareva and 2,230 miles from South America. The island contains a number of extinct volcanic craters, between which are low lying plains formed by old lava flows. The soil is shallow, dry, and stony with meager vegetation and a scarcity of good timber. Rocky islets off the coast provide breeding places for migrating sea birds.</p>
            <p>Native tradition attributes the discovery of the island to Hotumatua, who, after sending some scouts ahead, arrived in his double voyaging canoe, of which the hulls were named respectively <hi rend="i">Oteka</hi> and <hi rend="i">Oua</hi>. He was accompanied in another canoe by the master craftsman Tukoihu. The genealogies are too uncertain to arrive at an approximate date. There is no traditional evidence that a name was applied to the island as a whole, but in later times Rapanui has come to be accepted as the native name.</p>
            <p>The Polynesian settlers introduced a number of food plants and the domestic fowl, but the coconut and the pandanus are absent. As substitutes for pandanus leaf, the outer skin from the trunks of banana plants and a coarse rush were used in plaiting mats and baskets. Large timber was nonexistent, hence the canoes were small and poorly made and paddles were made in two pieces which were lashed together. Large images made of volcanic tuff from one of the craters were characteristic of the local culture, as were wooden tablets incised with rows of conventional motifs which included human figures, birds, and ornaments. A complex was developed around the introduced fowl in which stone fowl houses were built, carved skulls used to increase the egg laying capacity of the poultry yard, and the quantity of chicken distributed at feasts denoted social status. An annual competition was connected with the arrival of sooty terns on the islet of Motunui. The chief whose retainer procured the first egg, became the bird-man for the year.</p>
            <p>The European discoverer was the Dutch navigator <name key="name-401755" type="person">Roggeveen</name>, who sighted the island on Easter Sunday, 1722. He named it Paaschen, hence the English form of Easter Island and the French Iie de Pâques. Behrens, who accompanied Roggeveen, wrote an exaggerated account, but subsequent visitors, such as <name key="name-207700" type="person">Cook</name> and <name key="name-134311" type="person">La Pérouse</name>, gave more reasonable accounts of what they saw. As many of the early voyagers passed round the Horn, it was convenient to call in at Easter Island to view the statues.</p>
            <p>The proximity of the island to South America made the inhabitants an easy prey to slavers, who forcibly carried off large numbers to work in the <pb xml:id="n90" n="80"/>Guano Islands off the coast of Peru. When the atrocities led Great Britain and France to exert pressure on the Peruvian Government, the survivors, who numbered about 100 out of an original 1,000, were returned. Eighty-five died of small-pox before Easter Island was reached, and the remaining 15 were cast ashore to infect the population, who died in such large numbers that survivors were unable to bury them.</p>
            <p>The first white settler was <name key="name-405113" type="person">Eugéne Eyraud</name>, a layman of the Congregation of the Sacred Heart of Picpus. He found it difficult at first to convince the natives that anything good could come from the white people who had wrought them so much harm. Fathers Hippolyte Roussel and Gaspard Zumbohm entered the field, and their teaching made progress. They introduced new fruits, vegetables, and animals. Bishop Jaussen, at Tahiti, was the first to draw attention to the carved wooden tablets which were collected for him by the missionaries in Easter Island. Missionary work was interrupted in 1870 by a French adventurer named Dutroux-Bornier who made their position so intolerable that the priests and their flocks left the island for Mangareva and Tahiti, leaving about 175 natives on the island. After the deserved slaying of Dutroux-Bornier in 1877, the Easter Islanders returned. Alexander P. Salmon, of good family on his Tahitian side, took over the sheep ranch which had been established, and the people had a happier time with a man who understood their feelings.</p>
            <p>H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Topaz</hi> visited the island in 1868 and took away the two statues which now adorn the portico of the British Museum. Palmer, the ship's surgeon, was the first to describe the statue quarry in the crater of Ranoraraku. The French warship <hi rend="i">La Flore</hi> touched briefly in 1872 and obtained a statue for the Trocadero Museum, Paris, and <name type="person" key="name-405086">Pierre Loti</name>, a midshipman, wrote a work which was more fanciful than accurate. The German sloop <hi rend="i">Hyane</hi> called in 1882, and its commander, Geiseler, made the most complete collection of native artifacts. The U.S.S. <hi rend="i">Mohican</hi> visited for a number of days in 1888, and Paymaster Thomson's report forms a good summing up of the information available at the time. He received much of his information from Alexander P. Salmon.</p>
            <p>Of other writers, <name type="person" key="name-405095">William Churchill</name> made an exhaustive study on the language which was published by the Carnegie Institute. <name type="person" key="name-207515">J. Macmillan Brown</name>, whose work is cited in the general literature, built up a theory that Easter Island is the unsubmerged peak of a larger land mass. The Routledge Expedition remained on the island for 16 months in 1914-1915, but, except for Mrs. Routledge's popular work, the published results have been disappointing. The Franco-Belgian Expedition of 1934-1935 (p. 54) has resulted in published papers on archaeology by <name type="person" key="name-405082">Henri Lavachery</name> and on ethnology by <name key="name-102888" type="person">Alfred Métraux</name>, whose work includes a summary on physical characteristics by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>.</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n91" n="81"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d3-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Easter Island</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d3-d2-d1" type="section">
              <p>Early Voyagers (see chronological list, pp. 66-75)</p>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Beechey</hi> (1825-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Behrens</hi> (1721-1722)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Chamisso</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Choris</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Du Petit-Thouars</hi> (1836-1839)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Gonzalez</hi> (1770-1771)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Langsdorff</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">La Pérouse</hi> (1785-1788)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Lisiansky</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Moerenhout</hi> (1828-1834)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Roggeveen</hi> (1721-1722)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d3-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Churchill, William</hi></author>, <title>Easter Island: the Rapanui speech and the peopling of southeast Polynesia</title>, <pubPlace>Washington</pubPlace>, <date when="1912">1912</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Eyraud</hi>, F. E.</author>, <title>Lettre du F. Eugène Eyraud au T. R. P. Supérieur général</title>: <publisher>Annales de la propagation de la foi</publisher>, vol. 38, <biblScope>pp. 52-71</biblScope>, <biblScope>124-138</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1866">1866</date>; vol. 39, <biblScope>pp. 250-259</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date from="1866" to="1867">1866-1867</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Geiseler</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Kaptänlieutenant</hi></author>), <title>Die Öster-Insel</title>, <pubPlace>Berlin</pubPlace>, <date when="1883">1883</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Jaussen, Tepano</hi></author>, <title>L'Iie de Pâques: historique et écriture</title>: <publisher>Bull. de Geogr. Hist, et Descriptive</publisher>, no. 2, <biblScope>pp. 240-270</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1893">1893</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lavachery, Henri</hi></author>, <title>Iie de Pâques</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lavachery, Henri</hi></author>, <title>Les pétroglyphes de l'Ile de Pâques</title>, Parties 1-2, <pubPlace>Anvers</pubPlace>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Loti, Pierre</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Julian Viaud</hi></author>), <title>Reflets sur la sombre route</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace> (n.d.).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Olivier, Pacôme</hi></author>, <title>Lettres du R. P. Pacôme Olivier … au T. R. P. Supérieur général</title>: <publisher>Annales de la propagation de la foi</publisher>, vol. 38, <biblScope>pp. 45-52</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1866">1866</date>; vol. 39, <biblScope>pp. 250-259</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1867">1867</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Palmer, J. Linton</hi></author>, <title>A visit to Easter Island, or Rapa Nui, in 1868</title>: <publisher>Roy. Geogr. Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 40, <biblScope>pp. 167-181</biblScope>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1870">1870</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Roussel, Hippolyte</hi></author>, <title>Vocabulaire de la langue de l'lle de Pâques ou Rapa nui</title>: <publisher>Le Muséon</publisher>, nos. 2-3, <biblScope>pp. 159-254</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Louvain</pubPlace>, <date when="1908">1908</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Roussel, Hippolyte</hi></author>, <title>Iie de Pâques</title>: <publisher>Ann. des Sacrés Coeurs</publisher>, nos. 305-309, <biblScope>pp. 355-360</biblScope>, <biblScope>423-430</biblScope>, <biblScope>462-466</biblScope>, <biblScope>495-499</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Routledge</hi>, C. S.</author>, <title>The mystery of Easter Island</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1919">1919</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thomson</hi>, W. J.</author>, <title>Te Pito te Henua or Easter Island</title>: U. S. Nat. Mus. Ann. Rept., <biblScope>pp. 447-552</biblScope>, <date when="1889">1889</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Zumbohm, Gaspard</hi></author>, <title>Lettres du R. P. … au Directeur des Annales sur la mission de l'Iie Pâques</title>: <publisher>Ann. des Sacrés Coeurs</publisher>, vols. 5-6, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date from="1879" to="1880">1879-1880</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d3-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Drapkin</hi>, I.</author>, <title>Contribution to a demographic study of Easter Island</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 11, no. 12, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Métraux, Alfred</hi></author>, <title>Ethnology of Easter Island</title>, Bull. 160, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <title>The physical relationships of the Easter Islanders</title>, Bull. 160, <biblScope>pp. 24-30</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d4" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Mangareva</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d4-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The Mangareva Islands, or Iles Gambier, are volcanic islands which lie at the eastern end of the Tuamotu Archipelago about 900 miles from Tahiti. The inhabited islands comprise Mangareva, Taravai, Aukena, and Akamaru, with some smaller islands which are surrounded by an outer coral reef through which there are three deep passages. On the bounding reef there are a number <pb xml:id="n92" n="82"/>of coral islets. Short valleys on the main islands have fertile soil capable of growing cultivated plants.</p>
            <p>Native traditions indicate that the earliest settlers filtered through from the Tuamotus. According to the recorded genealogies, a voyager named Tupa arrived from Iva in about the year 1300 A.D. and introduced the breadfruit, coconut, and other trees. He also introduced the worship of the god Tu and the building of maraes. He probably came from the Marquesas, to which he returned. Bananas, sweet potatoes, taros, and yams were also introduced, and as they do not grow in the neighboring Tuamotu atolls, they were probably introduced from the Marquesas, as was the paper mulberry, for clothing. The staple food of the islands is fermented breadfruit. The pig was present in the past, for it appears as a historical memory, but neither the dog nor the fowl was present. In the course of time, canoes were succeeded by rafts, both for fishing and inter-island transport. The social organization and religion had affinities with central Polynesia, but local variations developed.</p>
            <p>The European discoverer was Captain Wilson in the missionary ship <hi rend="i">Duff</hi> in 1797, but the first to land and give a good account of the people was <name type="person" key="name-401675">Captain F. W. Beechey</name> in H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Blossom</hi> in 1825. Moerenhout visited the islands and gave an account which is mixed with Tahitian material. Dumont d'Urville called in 1838, but changes had already occurred through missionary teaching. <name key="name-400804" type="person">P. A. Lesson</name> who accompanied <name key="name-207864" type="person">Dumont d'Urville</name> also wrote about the islands.</p>
            <p>The first settlers were the Roman Catholic missionaries Père <name key="name-405104" type="person">Honoré Laval</name> and Père Francoise d'Assise Caret of the Congregation of the Sacred Heart (Picpus) in 1834. They reduced the language to writing and encouraged the natives to record their history and customs in a native manuscript which has proved of great value. Laval wrote a manuscript based on the native history. After remaining for years in the archives of the Congregation, it was published in French in 1938 with the financial assistance of Bishop Museum. The French missionaries also published a grammar and dictionary on the language. Caret's letters from the islands were published in the Annals of the Association for the Propagation of the Faith.</p>
            <p>Caillot wrote on eastern Polynesia but his Mangarevan material, based on the native manuscript, is misleading through faulty translation. <name type="person" key="name-121391">Edward Tregear</name> also published a Mangarevan dictionary from material supplied by the French missionaries. The Routledge Expedition visited Mangareva and procured a copy of the native manuscript, but nothing eventuated in the way of publications.</p>
            <p>As ethnologists on the Bishop Museum Mangarevan Expedition, <name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name> and I visited the group in 1934, and our manuscripts on the ethnology and archaeology of Mangareva were published by the Museum. <name key="name-102889" type="person">Harry L. Shapiro</name> visited the group with the second <hi rend="i">Zaca</hi> Expedition and took physical measurements, which await study.</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n93" n="83"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d4-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Mangareva</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d4-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilson</hi> (1796-1798)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Beechey</hi> (1825- 1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Moeren Hout</hi> (1828-1834)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont D'urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d4-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><title>Annales de la propagation de la foi</title>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1835">1835</date>—.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Caillot</hi>, A. C. E.</author>, <title>Histoire de la Polynésie orientale</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Caret, Francoise-d'Assise</hi></author>, <title>Lettres: lles Gambier</title>: <publisher>Annales de la propagation de la foi</publisher>, 9, <biblScope>pp. 14-19</biblScope> (<date>Oct. 6, 1834</date>), <biblScope>pp. 33-42</biblScope> (<date>Dec. 31, 1834</date>), <biblScope>pp. 42-56</biblScope> (<date>Jan. 26, 1835</date>).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Couteaud</hi>, P.</author>, <title>Anthropologie et alimentation</title>: <publisher>La Presse Medicale</publisher>, no. 80, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cuzent, Gilbert</hi></author>, <title>Voyage aux Iles Gambier</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1872">1872</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>Essai de grammaire de la langue des lles Gambier au Mangaréva … et dictionnaire Mangaréviens</title>, <pubPlace>Braine-le-Comte</pubPlace>, <date when="1908">1908</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Laval, HonorÉ</hi></author>, <title>Mangareva, l'histoire ancienne d'un peuple Polynésien</title>, <pubPlace>Braine-le-Comte</pubPlace>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lesson</hi>, P. A.</author>, <title>Voyage aux Iles Mangareva</title>, <pubPlace>Rochefort</pubPlace>, <date when="1844">1844</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Mangarevan images</title>: <publisher>Ethnologia Cranmorensis</publisher>, no. 4, <biblScope>pp. 12-19</biblScope>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tregear</hi>, E.</author>, <title>A dictionary of Mangareva</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1899">1899</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d4-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Mangareva and neighboring atolls</title>, Bull. 163, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Ethnology of Mangareva</title>, Bull. 157, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d5" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Pitcairn</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d5-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-402080" type="place">Pitcairn</name> is a small volcanic island lying southeast of Mangareva. The vegetation is abundant, the soil fertile, and cultivable food plants thrive. The island was uninhabited when the mutineers of the <hi rend="i">Bounty</hi> settled there in 1790, but religious structures (maraes), skulls, bones, and stone implements bore silent evidence of its previous occupation by people of Polynesian stock.</p>
            <p>The first European to sight the island was Ensign Pitcairn on the <hi rend="i">Swallow</hi>, commanded by <name type="person" key="name-150153">Captain Philip Cartaret</name>, which had been separated in a storm from the <hi rend="i">Dolphin</hi> under <name key="name-150152" type="person">Captain Wallis</name>. This was in 1767, but Cartaret sailed on without landing. The mutineers of the <hi rend="i">Bounty</hi>, with Tahitian followers and Tahitian wives, remained in safe sanctuary on the island until they were discovered by Captain Folger in the <hi rend="i">Topaz</hi> in 1808. Beechey visited the island in 1825. Various accounts have been written about the descendants of the mutineers. Their culture is a late offshoot of Tahitian culture, influenced by Christianity.</p>
            <p>Owing to the danger of overcrowding from increase of population, some of the people were taken to <name key="name-021372" type="place">Norfolk Island</name>. The physical characteristics of the Norfolk Islanders were studied by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>, Bishop Museum Fellow in 1923. Later, Shapiro visited Pitcairn with the second <hi rend="i">Zaca</hi> Expedition and <pb xml:id="n94" n="84"/>was able to complete his measurements on the remaining descendants of the mutineers. He also wrote a general work on the six generations of people.</p>
            <p>The Franco-Belgian Expedition to Easter Island called at Pitcairn, and Lavachery wrote an article on its archaeology. Numbers of stone artifacts have found their way to museums and have been studied by Brown and Emory. Recently, <name key="name-404824" type="person">H. E. Maude</name>, as the representative of the British High Commission for the Western Pacific (including Pitcairn), was able to collect over 500 stone artifacts which are in safe storage until circumstances permit their study.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d5-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Pitcairn Island</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d5-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Beechey</hi> (1825-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bennett</hi> (1833-1836)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Moerenhout</hi> (1828-1834)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d5-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brown, John</hi> A.</author>, <title>Stone implements from Pitcairn Island</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 30, <biblScope>pp. 83-88</biblScope>, <date when="1900">1900</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Stone implements of Pitcairn Island</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 37, <biblScope>pp. 125-135</biblScope>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Keith</hi>, A.</author>, <title>The physical characteristics of two Pitcairn Islanders</title>: Man, vol. 17, <biblScope>pp. 121-131</biblScope>, <date when="1917">1917</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lavachery, Henri</hi></author>, <title>Contribution à l'étude de l'archéologie de l'lle Pitcairn</title>: <publisher>Soc. Am. de Belgique</publisher>, Bull. 19, <biblScope>pp. 1-30</biblScope>, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Nordhoff, Charles</hi></author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Hall, James</hi> N.</author>, <title>Pitcairn's Island</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Seurat</hi>, L. G.</author>, <title>Sur les anciens habitants de l'Ile de Pitcairn</title>: L'Anthropologie, vol. 15, <biblScope>pp. 369-372</biblScope>, <date when="1904">1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <title>The heritage of the Bounty</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shillibeer</hi>, J.</author>, <title>A narrative of the Briton's voyage to Pitcairn's Island</title>, 2d ed., <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1817">1817</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Young, Rosalind</hi> A.</author>, <title>Mutiny of the Bounty and story of Pitcairn Island 1790-1894</title>, <pubPlace>Oakland, California</pubPlace>, <date when="1894">1894</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d5-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publication</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <title>Descendants of mutineers of the Bounty</title>, Mem., vol. 11, no. 1, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d6" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Tuamotus</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d6-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The Tuamotu Archipelago, formerly referred to as Paumotu, consists of 78 atolls extending from the Society Islands to the Mangareva Islands, a stretch of about 900 miles. In depth they range between 14° and 23° S., the trend in direction being southeast. Many of the atolls are uninhabited but they are owned and visited by the people of neighboring inhabited atolls. The archipelago was annexed by France in 1844 with the exception of Ducie, Henderson, and Oeno at the extreme eastern end which, with Pitcairn, are British.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n95" n="85"/>
            <p>Owing to the wide extent of the archipelago, the individual atolls have been discovered by a number of explorers from Mendaña in 1595 to the Wilkes Expedition in 1840. The faulty methods of determining longitude in the earlier voyages make it difficult to identify many of the discoveries which were given European names. The list of early voyages to the Tuamotus is fairly long, but many accounts are scanty because the great depth of the ocean outside the reefs made it impossible for ships to anchor off the atolls. Even when boats were able to land, the stay was usually short. In many instances, the atolls were merely sighted and recorded or scanty observations on the people were made through the telescope.</p>
            <p>Of other writers, the earliest observers were the Roman Catholic missionaries, of whom <name key="name-405065" type="person">Montiton</name> was the most productive. Articles by Audran and Seurat contain good material, and <name key="name-121391" type="person">Tregear</name> compiled a Paumotuan dictionary which appeared in issues of the journal of the Polynesian Society.</p>
            <p>The Bishop Museum staff expedition to the Tuamotus, with <name key="name-401952" type="person">K. P. Emory</name> and <name type="person" key="name-102890">J. F. Stimson</name>, in 1929-31 was able to collect much information, as a motor launch was provided to visit the various islands. The expedition was joined by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>, who made records of the physical characters. Bishop Museum has published a good many of the expedition's reports, but some manuscripts await completion. Records of the music were made and have been studied by E. G. Burrows. Some of the material bearing on religion may be regarded as open to doubt, because a difference of opinion prevails regarding the veracity of some informants and the interpretation of their information. The Mangarevan Expedition of 1934 added further information.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d6-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Tuamotus</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d6-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Beechey</hi> (1825-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Behrens</hi> (1721-1722)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Belcher</hi> (1836-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Boenechea</hi> (1772-1776)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bougainville</hi> (1766-1769)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Byron</hi> (1764-1766)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1768-1771)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont D'urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Edwards</hi> (1790-1791)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1812-1815)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1823-1826)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Le Maire and Schouten</hi> (1615-1617)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Lesson</hi> (1822-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Moerenhout</hi> (1828-1834)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Quiros</hi> (1605-1606)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Roggeveen</hi> (1721-1722)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Turnbull</hi> (1800-1804)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wallis</hi> (1766-1768)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilson</hi> (1796-1798)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d6-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Audran, Hervé</hi></author><title>Traditions and notes on the Paumotu (or Tuamotu) Islands</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 27, <biblScope>pp. 26-35</biblScope>, <biblScope>90-92</biblScope>, <biblScope>132-136</biblScope>; vol. 28, <biblScope>pp. 31-38</biblScope>, <date when="1918">1918</date>, <date when="1919">1919</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n96" n="86"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Corney, Bolton</hi> G.</author>, <title>The quest and occupation of Tahiti by emissaries of Spain during the years 1772-1776</title>, vols. 1-3: <publisher>Hakluyt Soc.</publisher>, ser. 2, vols. 32, 36, 43, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1913">1913</date>, <date when="1914">1914</date>, <date when="1918">1918</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Tuamotuan concepts of creation</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 69-136</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>A newly discovered illustration of Tuamotu creation</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 569-578</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gessler, Clifford</hi></author>, <title>Road my body goes</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1937">1937</date>. (Also published as <publisher>Dangerous Islands</publisher>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Montiton</hi>, A. R.</author>, <title>Les Paumotus</title>: <publisher>Missions Catholiques</publisher>, vol. 6, <biblScope>pp. 339</biblScope>, <biblScope>341-344</biblScope>, <biblScope>354-356</biblScope>, <biblScope>366-367</biblScope>, <biblScope>378-379</biblScope>, <biblScope>490-491</biblScope>, <biblScope>498-499</biblScope>, <biblScope>502-504</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1874">1874</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tregear, Edward</hi></author>, <title>A Paumotuan Dictionary</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 2, <biblScope>pp. 195-202</biblScope>; vol. 3, <biblScope>pp. 1-8</biblScope>, <biblScope>51-58</biblScope>, <biblScope>113-120</biblScope>, <biblScope>179-186</biblScope>; vol. 4, <biblScope>pp. 1-16</biblScope>, <biblScope>73-88</biblScope>, <biblScope>157-160</biblScope>, <date from="1893" to="1895">1893-1895</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d6-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Native music of the Tuamotus</title>, Bull. 109, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Tuamotuan stone structures</title>, Bull. 118, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>The marae in Tuamotuan culture</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Tuamotuan material culture</title>, in preparation.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Mangareva and neighboring atolls</title>, Bull. 163, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stimson</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Tuamotuan religion</title>, Bull. 103, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stimson</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>The cult of Kiho-tumu</title>, Bull. 111, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stimson</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Legends of Maui and Tahaki</title> (trans.), Bull. 127, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stimson</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Tuamotuan legends, the demigods</title> (trans.), Bull. 148, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stimson</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Tuamotuan legends, the heroes</title> (trans.), manuscript.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d7" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Marquesas</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d7-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-150172" type="place">The Marquesas</name>, between latitude 7° 50' and 10° 35' S. and longitude 138° 25' and 140° 50' W., may be conveniently divided into two groups. The southeastern group consists of Fatuhiva, Tahuata, Hivaoa, Mohotane (Motane), and Fatuuku; the northwestern group of Uapou, Nukuhiva, Uahuku, Eiao, and Hatutu. These islands are volcanic with rugged ridges and drowned valleys. There are no true coastal plains, and the coastline is bounded by steep cliffs.</p>
            <p>The islands were first settled by a branch of Polynesians who termed themselves the Take. The ancient chants enumerate the islands of Havai'i, Opo'u, and Vevau through which the early ancestors passed, hence there is little doubt that they came from the Society Islands. They carried the Polynesian food plants with them and, as in Mangareva, fermented breadfruit became a staple food. Of the domestic animals, they had the pig and the fowl but the dog was absent. The people developed into distinct tribes inhabiting the various valleys and making war upon each other. Religion and social organization were developed from the central Polynesian pattern. Variation and local development were greater in material culture—in the form of houses, types of weapons and ornaments, for instance, and in the arts of carving and tattooing.</p>
            <p>The southeastern group formed the first discovery in Polynesia made by a European explorer, <name key="name-150171" type="person">Mendaña</name> having encountered four of them on his second <pb xml:id="n97" n="87"/>voyage across the Pacific in 1595. He named the individual islands Magdalena (Fatuhiva), San Pedro (Mohotane), Santa Christina (Tahuata) and Dominica (Hivaoa), and the group, he named Las Islas de Marquesas de Mendoza, after the Viceroy of Peru. The long Spanish name has been shortened to the Marquesas. Cook discovered the fifth island in 1774 and named it Hood Island (Fatuuku). The northwestern, group was discovered by <name type="person" key="name-401744">Joseph Ingraham</name>, an American fur trader, in 1791, and he named them Washington Islands. A large number of early voyagers called at the Marquesas for refreshment, for they were a convenient port of call for vessels rounding the Horn and sailing north to the Hawaiian Islands or the northwest American coast. The information in published journals of British, French, Russian, and American navigators is ample.</p>
            <p>Of later writers, Dordillon compiled a grammar and dictionary of the language, <name key="name-405114" type="person">Karl von den Steinen</name> published well-illustrated works on carving and tattooing, and Tautain wrote much on ethnological subjects. <name type="person" key="name-131218">Herman Melville</name> wrote an interesting popular book on his experiences in the Typee Valley.</p>
            <p>The Bayard Dominick Expedition visited the group in 1920. <name key="name-202883" type="person">E. S. C. Handy</name> wrote on the native culture, religion, and legends; and <name type="person" key="name-102885">Ralph Linton</name> described the archaeology and material culture. Willowdean Handy made contributions on tattooing and string figures, and music was studied by E. S. C. Handy and <name key="name-405115" type="person">Jane Winne</name> from records taken in the field. The records on physical characters were worked up by <name type="person" key="name-405083">Louis R. Sullivan</name>.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d7-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on the Marquesas</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d7-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Belcher</hi> (1836-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bennett</hi> (1833-1836)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Coulter</hi> (1832-1836)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont D'urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Du Petit-Thouars</hi> (1836-1839)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Krusenstern</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Langsdorff</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Lisiansky</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Marchand</hi> (1790-1792)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Mendana</hi> (1595-1596)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Porter</hi> (1812-1814)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Roqueeeuil</hi> (1816-1819)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Stewart</hi> (1829-1830)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Vancouver</hi> (1791-1795)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilson</hi> (1796-1798)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d7-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Christian</hi>, F. W.</author>, <title>Eastern Pacific Islands</title>: <publisher>Tahiti and the Marquesas</publisher>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Delmas</hi>, P. S.</author>, <title>La réligion ou le paganisme des Marquisiens</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dodge</hi>, E. S.</author>, <title>The Marquesan collection in the Peabody Museum of Salem</title>, <pubPlace>Salem</pubPlace>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dordillon</hi>, I. R.</author>, <title>Grammaire et dictionnaire de la langue des lies Marquises</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1904">1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Elbert, Samuel</hi> H.</author>, <title>Chants and love songs of the Marquesas Islands</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 50, <biblScope>pp. 53-91</biblScope>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy, Willowdean</hi> C.</author>, <title>L'art des Iles Marquises</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n98" n="88"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mathias, Le PÉre</hi> G.</author>, <title>Lettres sur les Iles Marquises</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1843">1843</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Melville, Herman</hi></author>, <title>Typee</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1876">1876</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shillibeer</hi>, J.</author>, <title>A narrative of the Briton's voyage to Pitcairn's Island</title>, 2d ed., <biblScope>pp. 35-76</biblScope>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1817">1817</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Steinen, Karl von den</hi></author>, <title>Reise nach den Marquesas-Inseln</title>: <publisher>Verhand. der Gesell</publisher>. für Erdkunde zu Berlin, vol. 25, <biblScope>pp. 489-513</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Berlin</pubPlace>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Steinen, Karl von den</hi></author>, <title>Marquesanische Knotenschnüre</title>: <publisher>Deutsche Gesell. Anthrop. Ethnol. und Urgeschichte, Korrespondenz-blatt</publisher>, vol. 34, <biblScope>pp. 108-115</biblScope>, <date when="1904">1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Steinen, Karl von den</hi></author>, <title>Die Marquesaner und ihre Kunst, primitive Südsee-ornamentik</title>, vol. 1, Tautauierung, <pubPlace>Berlin</pubPlace>, <date when="1925">1925</date>; vol. 2, Die Sammlungen, <pubPlace>Berlin</pubPlace>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tautain</hi>, L. F.</author>, <title>Etude sur le mariage des Polynesiens (Mao'i) des Iles Marquises</title>: L'Anthropologie, vol. 6, <biblScope>pp. 640-651</biblScope>, <date when="1895">1895</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tautain</hi>, L. F.</author>, <title>Notes sur l'éthnographie des Iles Marquises</title>: L'Anthropologie, vol. 7, <biblScope>pp. 543-552</biblScope>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tautain</hi>, L. F.</author>, <title>Sur I'anthropophagie et les sacrifices humains aux Iles Marquises</title>: L'Anthropologie, vol. 7, <biblScope>pp. 443-452</biblScope>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tautain</hi>, L. F.</author>, <title>Notes sur les constructions et monuments des Marquises</title>: L'Anthropologie, vol. 8, <biblScope>pp. 538-558</biblScope>, <biblScope>667-678</biblScope>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tautain</hi>, L. F.</author>, <title>Etude sur la dépopulation de l'Archipel des Marquises</title>: L'Anthropologie, vol. 9, <biblScope>pp. 298-318</biblScope>, <biblScope>418-436</biblScope>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Vincendon-Dumoulin</hi>, A. C.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Desgraz</hi>, C.</author>, <title>Iles Marquises ou Nouku-Hiva</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1843">1843</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d7-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Native culture of the Marquesas</title>, Bull. 9, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Winne, Jane</hi></author>, <title>Music of the Marquesas Islands</title>, Bull. 17, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Marquesan legends</title>, Bull. 69, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy, Willowdean</hi> C.</author>, <title>Tattooing in the Marquesas</title>, Bull. 1, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy, Willowdean</hi> C.</author>, <title>String figures from the Marquesas and Society Islands</title>, Bull 18, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Linton, Ralph</hi></author>, <title>Material culture of the Marquesas Islands</title>, Mem., vol. 8, no. 5, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Linton, Ralph</hi></author>, <title>Archaeology of the Marquesas Islands</title>, Bull. 23, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sullivan</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>Marquesan somatology</title>, Mem., vol. 9, no. 2, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d8" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">The Austral Islands and Rapa</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d8-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-401639" type="place">The Austral Islands</name>, about 400 miles to the south of the Society Islands, consist of the islands of Raivavae, Tubuai, Rurutu, and Rimitara, with the small uninhabited island of Maria (Hull) to the west. There is less published material about the early settlement of the Austral Islands than any other Polynesian group. However, the scraps which have been gathered indicate that settlement and culture came mainly from the Society Islands. The carving on ceremonial paddles from Raivavae resembles that on the ceremonial adz stands of Mangaia, but a careful analysis shows that they may have been developed independently. Coiled caps also occur in the Austral and Cook Islands, with certain differences in technique. Raivavae is rich in stone images, but none have been located in the other islands. Rurutu, however, had a wooden image of unique form which is now in the British Museum. Raivavae, Rurutu, and Tubuai had headdresses based on a coiled cap of similar technique, but the feather ornamentation that went with them was totally different in each island.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n99" n="89"/>
            <p>Rapa, which lies farther to the east, is a mountainous island that appears to have had a culture distinct from that of the Austral Islands. A unique feature is the presence of hill villages formed by terracing the hill tops or ridges and using steep ramparts and ditches for protective purposes.</p>
            <p><name key="name-207700" type="person">Captain Cook</name> discovered Rurutu in 1769 and Tubuai in 1777. Raivavae was sighted by Gayanagos in 1775, but he merely passed by without seeing anything of the inhabitants. <name key="name-134348" type="person">Vancouver</name> discovered Rapa in 1791 and gave a good account of what he saw.</p>
            <p>Of other writers, <name key="name-121365" type="person">Ellis</name> has some interesting notes in his "Polynesian Researches." The other material is scanty but is cited, as there is so little on record.</p>
            <p>The Bishop Museum sent one Bayard Dominick Expedition to the Austral Islands in 1920, R. T. Aitken making a field study in Tubuai and J. F. G. Stokes working on Raivavae and Rapa. F. Alan Seabrook, who lived on Rurutu, wrote a manuscript on the ethnology of the island which was acquired by Bishop Museum. Through the generosity of Cornelius Crane, <name type="person" key="name-102890">J. F. Stimson</name> was financed through the Museum for field work in the Austral Islands, but his material has yet to be worked up.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d8-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Austral Islands and Rapa</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d8-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Vancouver</hi> (1791-1795)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d8-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brown</hi>, J. M.</author><title>Raivavai and its statues</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 38, <biblScope>pp. 105-121</biblScope>, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Caillot</hi>, A. C. E.</author>, <title>Histoire de l'Ile Oparo ou Rapa</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Douglas</hi>, A. J. A.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Johnson</hi>, P. H.</author>, <title>The south seas today</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1926">1926</date> [Rurutu, Rapa].</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ellis, William</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian researches</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1829">1829</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hill</hi>, H. U.</author>, <title>Wood carvings of the Austral Islands</title>: <publisher>Univ. Pennsylvania Mus.</publisher>, Jour., vol. 12, <biblScope>pp. 179-199</biblScope>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Montgomery, James</hi></author>, <title>Journal of voyage and travels by the Rev. Daniel Tyerman and George Bennet</title>, Esq…., vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1831">1831</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Routledge</hi>, S.</author><hi rend="sc">and</hi><author>K.</author>, <title>Notes on some archaeological remains in the Society and Austral Islands</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 51, <biblScope>pp. 438-455</biblScope>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>Three Polynesian drums</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 42, <biblScope>pp. 308-309</biblScope>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d8-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Aitken</hi>, R. T.</author>, <title>Ethnology of Tubuai</title>, Bull. 70, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Seabrook</hi>, F. <hi rend="sc">Alan</hi></author>, <title>Ethnology of Rurutu</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Seale, Alvin</hi></author>, <title>Expedition to southeastern Polynesia in 1902</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Raivavae</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Ethnology of Rapa</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n100" n="90"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d9" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Society Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d9-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The Society Islands are the geographical center of Polynesia and, in ancient times, also the cultural center. The islands are conveniently ranged in two groups, the windward and the leeward islands. The main islands of the windward group are <name key="name-000007" type="place">Tahiti</name> and Moorea, with the smaller islands of Meetia, Teti-aroa, and Tapuaemanu. The leeward group comprises the large islands of Raiatea, Tahaa, Huahine, and Borabora, with the small islands of Tubai, Maupiti, Mopihaa, Fenuaura, and Motuone. The large islands are mountainous and well forested and have fertile valleys. The bounding coral reef is some distance from the shore in places, with deep lagoons affording anchorage to ships which may enter through deep channels in the reef.</p>
            <p>The traditions of the people indicate that the islands were first settled by people referred to as the Manahune and that later a more highly developed culture spread from <name key="name-402102" type="place">Raiatea</name>. The settlement period is so far back that the first ancestors and their voyaging canoes have been forgotten. It is evident that the culture developed in the Society Islands was diffused as far as the marginal areas of <name key="name-019821" type="place">Hawaii</name>, <name key="name-150173" type="place">Easter Island</name>, and New Zealand.</p>
            <p><name key="name-000007" type="place">Tahiti</name> and Moorea of the windward islands were discovered by <name key="name-150152" type="person">Wallis</name> in 1767 and <name key="name-131266" type="person">Bougainville</name> arrived during the following year. The leeward islands were discovered by <name key="name-207700" type="person">Cook</name> in 1769. A large number of early voyagers visited the islands, as may be seen from the literature list, and consequently the amount of published material is very rich. Cook's three voyages are particularly good, and <name key="name-102157" type="person">Webber</name>'s drawings, made during Cook's third voyage, are excellent.</p>
            <p>Of other writers, the work of the missionary <name type="person" key="name-121365">William Ellis</name> on "Polynesian Researches" is a classic. Montgomery's journal of the travels of the Reverend Tyerman and George Bennet is mainly a rehash of Ellis' work, as far as the Society Islands are concerned. The Roman Catholic Bishop, Tepano Jaussen, compiled a grammar and dictionary on the language. The Memoirs of Arii Taimai, edited by Henry Adams, is good, and so is Corney's work on the emissaries of Spain.</p>
            <p>Bishop Museum's contribution commenced with the staff expedition to the Society Islands in 1923 with <name key="name-202883" type="person">E. S. C. Handy</name>, Mrs. <name key="name-400673" type="person">W. C. Handy</name>, and <name key="name-405115" type="person">Jane Winne</name>. Reports were made on history, culture, and arts and crafts. A second staff expedition, in 1925 by <name key="name-401952" type="person">K. P. Emory</name>, dealt with archaeology. A valuable manuscript on "Ancient Tahiti", written by <name type="person" key="name-202884">Miss Teuira Henry</name> from information recorded by the Reverend Orsmund, an early worker of the <name key="name-200279" type="organisation">London Missionary Society</name>, was published by the Museum. Anthropometrical records made by Mr. and Mrs. Handy and J. F. G. Stokes were worked up by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>.</p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n101" n="91"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d9-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on the Society Islands</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d9-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Beechey</hi> (1825-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Belcher</hi> (1836-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bennett</hi> (1833-1836)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bligh</hi> (1787-1789)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bligh</hi> (1791-1793)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Boenechea</hi> (1772-1776)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Broughton</hi> (1795-1798)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bougainville</hi> (1766-1769)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1768-1771)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1776-1780)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Coulter</hi> (1832-1836)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont d'Urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Duperrey</hi> (1822-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Du Petit-Thouars</hi> (1836-1839)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Edwards</hi> (1790-1791)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1823-1826)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Lesson</hi> (1822-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Moerenhout</hi> (1828-1834)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Mortimer</hi> (1789)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Stewart</hi> (1829-1830)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Turnbull</hi> (1800-1804)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Vancouver</hi> (1791-1795)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wallis</hi> (1766-1768)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilson</hi> (1796-1798)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d9-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Adams, Henry</hi></author>, <title>Memoirs of Arii Taimai</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1901">1901</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andrews, Edmund</hi></author><hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Irene</hi></author>, <title>A comparative dictionary of the Tahitian language</title>, <pubPlace>Chicago</pubPlace>, <date when="1944">1944</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bovis</hi>, E. <hi rend="sc">de</hi></author>, <title>État de la société Taitienne a l'arrivée des Européens, Papeete</title>, <pubPlace>Tahiti</pubPlace>, <date when="1909">1909</date>. (Reprinted from Revue Coloniale, Deuxiéme serie, vol. 14, <biblScope>pp. 368-408</biblScope>, <date when="1855">1855</date>.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Corney, Bolton</hi> G.</author>, <title>The quest and occupation of Tahiti by emissaries of Spain during the years 1772-1776</title>, vols. 1-3; Hakluyt Soc., ser. 2, vols. 32, 36, 43, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1913">1913</date>, <date when="1914">1914</date>, <date when="1918">1918</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cuzent, Gilbert</hi></author>, <title>Iles de la Société; Tahiti …</title>, <pubPlace>Rochefort</pubPlace>, <date when="1860">1860</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Davis</hi>, I.</author>, <title>A Tahitian and English dictionary</title>, <pubPlace>Tahiti and London</pubPlace>, <date when="1851">1851</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ellis, William</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian researches</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1829">1829</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Huguenin, Paul</hi></author>, <title>Raiatea la sacrée</title>, <pubPlace>Neuchatel</pubPlace>, <date when="1902">1902</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Jaussen, Tepano</hi></author>, <title>Grammaire et dictionnaire de la langue Maori, dialecte Tahitian</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Montgomery, James</hi></author>, <title>Journal of voyages and travels by the Rev. Tyerman and George Bennet</title>, …, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1831">1831</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Nordhoff, Charles</hi></author>, <title>Notes on the off-shore fishing of the Society Islands</title>, Polynesian Soc, Jour., vol. 39, <biblScope>pp. 137-173</biblScope>, <biblScope>221-262</biblScope>, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Perkins, Edward</hi> T.</author>, <title>Na Motu: reef rovings in the South Seas</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1854">1854</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Roth</hi>, H. L.</author>, <title>Tatu in the Society Islands</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 35, <biblScope>pp. 283-294</biblScope>, <date when="1905">1905</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>Société des Etudes Oceaniennes</title>, Bulletin, vol. 1, <date when="1917">1917</date>—.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Canoe outrigger-attachments in Tahiti and New Zealand</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 38, <biblScope>pp. 183-215</biblScope>, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>The feather cloak of Tahiti</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 52, <biblScope>pp. 12-15, 100</biblScope>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>The south sea islander; … state of society in the island of Otaheite …</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1820">1820</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Vincendon-Dumoulin</hi>, A. C.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Desgraz</hi>, C.</author>, <title>Iles Tahiti</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1844">1844</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d9-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bouge</hi>, L. J.</author>, <title>Notes on Polynesian pounders</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 9, no. 2, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Stone remains of the Society Islands</title>, Bull. 116, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>History and culture in the Society Islands</title>, Bull. 79, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n102" n="92"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Houses, boats, and fishing in the Society Islands</title>, Bull. 90, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, W. C</author>, <title>Handcrafts of the Society Islands</title>, Bull. 42, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Henry, Teuira</hi></author>, <title>Ancient Tahiti</title>, Bull. 48, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <title>Physical characters of the Society Islanders</title>, Mem., vol. 11, no. 4, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Silverthorne, Henry</hi></author>, <title>Society Islands pounders</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 11, no. 17, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Cook Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d1" type="preamble">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Lower Cook Group</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The <name key="name-031209" type="place">Cook Islands</name> proper, consisting of the volcanic islands of <name key="name-120353" type="place">Rarotonga</name>, <name key="name-402097" type="place">Mangaia</name>, Atiu, Mauke, Mitiaro, and <name key="name-402116" type="place">Aitutaki</name> with the small coral atoll of Manuae, lie southwest of the Society Islands on the sea route to New Zealand. The islands have fringing coral reefs with no deep outer lagoons or good boat passages through the encircling reef. The valleys and coastal flats are fertile, and suitable timber for canoes was fair in quantity. Mangaia, Atiu, and Mauke have raised walls of coral, termed makatea, a varying distance in from the coast line, due to volcanic upheaval of the islands.</p>
            <p>The definite settlement of Rarotonga was by the ancestors Tangiia and Karika, in about the middle of the thirteenth century. Aitutaki appears to have been settled at an earlier period by Ru. Atiu, Mauke, and Mitiaro have similar traditions of settlement by ancestors from whom the chiefly families claim descent. Mangaia differs in having a mythical origin in which the island emerged from the underworld with the ancestors of the present people upon it. Traditions and genealogies indicate that the islands were settled from the Society Islands, principally Tahiti. All the cultivable food plants were introduced, but the distribution of domestic animals varies, Aitutaki and Mangaia not having the pig. The tribal system and social organization indicate derivation from a central Polynesian pattern, as does the religion with respect to gods, temples, and ritual. In material culture, differences due to local development are present and the island of Mangaia differs much from the others in its arts and crafts.</p>
            <p><name key="name-207700" type="person">Captain James Cook</name> discovered Manuae in 1773 and named it Hervey Island, a name which was subsequently applied to the whole group and later changed officially to the Cook Islands. Cook also discovered Mangaia and Atiu in 1777. <name key="name-111708" type="person">Bligh</name> discovered Aitutaki in 1789. The most important island, Rarotonga, was not officially discovered until 1823, when it was visited by the missionary <name type="person" key="name-200573">John Williams</name>, who also visited Mauke. Native traditions indicate that Rarotonga was visited before Williams, when a ship carried off some of the inhabitants to Aitutaki. <name key="name-401730" type="person">Byron</name> called in at Mauke in 1825 and Belcher at Rarotonga in 1840.</p>
            <p>The London Missionary Society established a station at Aitutaki and later at Mangaia and Rarotonga. When the people became converted to Christianity, they handed over many of their religious symbols to the missionary and their valuable collection is now in the British Museum. John Williams made various <pb xml:id="n103" n="93"/>visits to the group, and his work on "Missionary Enterprises" contains valuable ethnological information. The Reverend <name key="name-202923" type="person">W. W. Gill</name>, who was stationed at Mangaia, wrote several works on the islands which supply good source material. A work by the <name type="person" key="name-200070">Reverend Aaron Buzacott</name>, who was stationed at Rarotonga, describes the mission but is poor as regards native information.</p>
            <p>Of Government officials, Frederick J. Moss wrote a general work, <name key="name-208105" type="person">Lieutenant Colonel Gudgeon</name> contributed some interesting articles to the <name key="name-121698" type="work">Journal of the Polynesian Society</name>, and <name key="name-121166" type="person">Stephen Savage</name> compiled an exhaustive dictionary, which has not yet been published. I visited the islands in 1926 under the auspices of the Board of Maori Ethnological Research, which published my work on the material culture of Aitutaki.</p>
            <p>Bishop Museum published a vocabulary of the Mangaian language by F. W. Christian and the Diary of Andrew Bloxam, the naturalist with Byron on the <hi rend="i">Blonde</hi> (1824-1825). The Museum also sent me on a field expedition in 1929, when all the islands in the group were visited and measurements taken of the people. Two reports on the lower group were published, one on the arts and crafts containing much information derived from museum material in Europe and America. The anthropometrical observations were worked up by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on the Lower Cook Group</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Belcher</hi> (1836-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Byron</hi> (1824-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1776-1780)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bligh</hi> (1791-1793)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Buzacott, Aaron</hi></author>, <title>Mission life in the islands of the Pacific</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1866">1866</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dodge</hi>, E. S.</author>, <title>The Hervey Islands adzes in Peabody Museum of Salem</title>, <pubPlace>Salem</pubPlace>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Giglioli</hi>, E. H.</author>, <title>Delle ascie litiche di Mangaia …</title>: <publisher>Archivio per l'Antropologia e l'Etnologia</publisher>, vol. 32, <biblScope>pp. 291-301</biblScope>, <date when="1902">1902</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>Myths and songs from the South Pacific</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1876">1876</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>Life in the southern isles</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1876">1876</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>Historical sketches of savage life in Polynesia</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1880">1880</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>From darkness to light in Polynesia</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1894">1894</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>Mangaia (Hervey Islands)</title>: <publisher>Australasian Assoc. Adv. Science</publisher>, Report of 2d meeting, <biblScope>pp. 323-353</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Melbourne</pubPlace>, <date when="1894">1894</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gruning</hi>, E. L.</author>, <title>Notes on burial caves in the Cook group, south Pacific</title>: <publisher>Ethnologia Cranmorensis</publisher>, no. 1, <biblScope>pp. 21-25</biblScope>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gudgeon</hi>, W. E.</author>, <title>Phallic emblems from Atiu Islands</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 13, <biblScope>pp. 210-212</biblScope>, <date when="1904">1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gudgeon</hi>, W. E.</author>, <title>The origin of the ta-tatau or heraldic marks at Aitutaki Island</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 14, <biblScope>pp. 217-218</biblScope>, <date when="1905">1905</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Moss</hi>, F. J.</author>, <title>The Maori polity of the island of Rarotonga</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 3, <biblScope>pp. 21-26</biblScope>, <date when="1894">1894</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Oldman</hi>, W. O.</author>, <title>Oldman collection of Polynesian artifacts</title>, Tahiti, Austral and Cook Islands, Polynesian Soc, Mem. 15, <date from="1938" to="1940">1938-1940</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n104" n="94"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Read, Charles</hi> H.</author>, <title>On the origin and sacred character of certain ornaments of the S. E. Pacific</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 21, <biblScope>pp. 139-159</biblScope>, <date when="1892">1892</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Savage, Stephen</hi></author>, <title>Dictionary of the Cook Islands language</title>, manuscript copy in Bishop Museum.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>Notes on pearl shell pendants in the Cook Islands</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 44, <biblScope>pp. 187-189</biblScope>, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stolpe</hi>, K. <hi rend="sc">Hjalmar</hi></author>, <title>Collected essays on ornamental art</title>, <pubPlace>Stockholm</pubPlace>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Ariki-Tara-are</hi></author>, <title>History and traditions of Rarotonga</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 8, <biblScope>pp. 61-88</biblScope>, <biblScope>171-178</biblScope>, <date when="1899">1899</date>; vol. 27, <biblScope>pp. 178-198</biblScope>, <date when="1918">1918</date>; vol. 28, <biblScope>pp. 55-78</biblScope>, <biblScope>134-151</biblScope>, <biblScope>183-208</biblScope>, <date when="1919">1919</date>; vol. 29, <biblScope>pp. 1-19</biblScope>, <biblScope>45-69</biblScope>, <biblScope>107-127</biblScope>, <biblScope>165-188</biblScope>, <date when="1920">1920</date>; vol. 30, <biblScope>pp. 1-15</biblScope>, <biblScope>54-70</biblScope>, <biblScope>129-141</biblScope>, <biblScope>201-226</biblScope>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>The material culture of the Cook Islands (Aitutaki)</title>: <publisher>Board Maori Ethnol. Res.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 1, <pubPlace>New Plymouth</pubPlace>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Fish poisoning in Rarotonga</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 37, <biblScope>pp. 57-66</biblScope>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williams, John</hi></author>, <title>Missionary enterprises</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bloxam, Andrew</hi></author>, <title>Diary of, Special Pub</title>. 10, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Christian</hi>, F. W.</author>, <title>Vocabulary of the Mangaian language</title>, Bull. 11, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Buck</hi>, P. H.</author>, <title>Physical characters of the Cook Islanders</title>, Mem., vol. 12, no. 1, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Mangaian society</title>, Bull. 122, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Arts and crafts of the Cook Islands</title>, Bull. 179, <date when="1944">1944</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d3" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">The Northern Cook Group</hi>
            </head>
            <p>The northern Cook group consists of a number of widely scattered atolls which were included in the Cook Islands for administrative purposes. The inhabited atolls consist of <name key="name-405117" type="place">Manihiki</name>, <name key="name-405118" type="place">Rakahanga</name>, <name key="name-402108" type="place">Tongareva</name> (Penrhyn), and <name key="name-405116" type="place">Pukapuka</name>. The uninhabited atolls comprise Nassau, Suvorov, and Palmerston, but Palmerston is now occupied by members of the Marsters family. Marsters, an Englishman, rented the island from the Cook Islands Administration and raised a large family from a succession of three wives.</p>
            <p>Manihiki and Rakahanga are 20 miles apart, and originally the people lived on one atoll for a year and then migrated to the other for a year. The annual migration ceased in 1852, when the missionaries persuaded the people to divide for permanent location on each atoll. Tradition states that their ancestor, Hiku, came from Rarotonga. <name key="name-207405" type="person">Bellingshausen</name> discovered Rakahanga in 1820 and named it Grand Duke Alexander Island. Captain Patrickson of the <hi rend="i">Good Hope</hi> discovered Manihiki in 1822 and named it Humphrey Island. He also gave the name of Reirson Island to Rakahanga. The outer reef in each atoll has no large passages.</p>
            <p><name key="name-402108" type="place">Tongareva</name> was discovered by Lieutenant Watt or Captain Sever in the <hi rend="i">Lady Penrhyn</hi> in 1788, hence the alternate name. It is on latitude 9° S., and passing sailing ships checked their latitude by it. It has a large central lagoon with three deep passages which will admit vessels of fair size. Native <choice><orig>myth-<pb xml:id="n105" n="95"/>ology</orig><reg>mythology</reg></choice> gives descent from Atea and Hakahotu, and tradition also gives descent from early voyagers named Mahuta and Taruia who visited at different periods. The dialect has the <hi rend="i">s</hi> sound, in addition to <hi rend="i">h</hi>, and the sibilant <hi rend="i">tch</hi> in place of <hi rend="i">t</hi> in some words. A number of maraes on the various islets were in a fair state of preservation in 1929.</p>
            <p>Pukapuka, or Danger Island, is the most westerly of the group, lying in longitude 165° 45' W. and 10° 53' S. The origin of the inhabitants is clothed with myth connected with the growth of the island and the emergence from a rock of the first inhabitant, Mataliki. A god instructed him where to obtain a wife, and so their world began. Pukapukan culture has more affinity with that of Samoa than with that of the Cook Islands. The island was definitely sighted in 1765 by <name key="name-150151" type="person">Commodore John Byron</name>, who named it Danger Island because the high surf on the reef prevented boats from landing.</p>
            <p>Little information is to be obtained from the early explorers, as the atolls were rarely visited. Tongareva was visited by <name key="name-401800" type="person">Kotzebue</name> in 1816, and his artist, <name key="name-401695" type="person">Choris</name>, made some additional observations. The <hi rend="i">Porpoise</hi>, one of the ships of <name key="name-101759" type="person">Wilke</name>'s Expedition, called in in 1841. Neither expedition landed, but observations were made on the people who came out in canoes. A trader named Lamont was wrecked on Tongareva in 1853, and his book contains the best description of atoll life. The <name key="name-202923" type="person">Reverend W. W. Gill</name> contributed some information in his works.</p>
            <p>The first <hi rend="i">Zaca</hi> expedition called at Pukapuka, and <name type="person" key="name-101716">Gordon Macgregor</name> contributed some notes on the ethnology of the atoll. <name type="person" key="name-207378">Ernest Beaglehole</name>, on a Bishop Museum Fellowship, made a field survey during seven and a half months in 1934-1935, assisted by his wife, <name key="name-110204" type="person">Pearl Beaglehole</name>. They wrote a comprehensive study on ethnology which the Museum published. Manuscripts on myths, stories, and chants and on string figures await publication. Physical measurements were also made.</p>
            <p>On the Bishop Museum staff expedition to the Cook Islands, I visited Rakahanga, Manihiki, and Tongareva, and my reports were published. Physical characters were included in the work on the Cook Islands prepared by <name type="person" key="name-102889">H. L. Shapiro</name>.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d4" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on the Northern Cook Group</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d4-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Byron</hi> (1764-1766)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Choris</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d4-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author><hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Pearl</hi></author>, <title>Personality development in Pukapukan children. In Language, Culture, and Personality</title>: <title>Essays in memory of Edward Sapir</title> (Ed. by <editor>Leslie Spier</editor> and others), <pubPlace>Menasha, Wisconsin</pubPlace>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n106" n="96"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Manihiki inlaid bowls</title>: <publisher>Ethnologia Cranmorensis</publisher>, no. 4, <biblScope>pp. 20-26</biblScope>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>Life in the southern isles</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1876">1876</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>A word about the original inhabitants of Pukapuka Island</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 21, <biblScope>pp. 120-124</biblScope>, <date when="1912">1912</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>The origin of the island of Manihiki</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 24, <biblScope>pp. 144-151</biblScope>, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lamont</hi>, E. H.</author>, <title>Wild life among the Pacific islanders</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1867">1867</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d10-d4-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author><hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Pearl</hi></author>, <title>Ethnology of Pukapuka</title>, Bull. 150, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author><hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Pearl</hi></author>, <title>Myths, stories, and chants from Pukapuka</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Pearl</hi></author>, <title>String figures in Pukapuka</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Macgregor, Gordon</hi></author>, <title>Notes on the ethnology of Pukapuka</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 11, no. 6, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Buck</hi>, P. H.</author>, <title>Physical characters of the Cook Islanders</title>, Mem., vol. 12, no. 1, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Ethnology of Tongareva</title>, Bull. 92, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Ethnology of Manihiki-Rakahanga</title>, Bull. 99, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d11" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Equatorial Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d11-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The name equatorial islands is a convenient term to cover several groups of small islands scattered between 150° and 160° W. longitudes and between about 6° N. and 11° S. of the equator. They comprise <name key="name-405119" type="place">the Line Islands</name> to the east and the Phoenix Islands and Howland and Baker to the west. The Line Islands north of the equator consist of Christmas, Fanning, Washington, Palmyra, and Kingmans Reef, whereas the Line Islands south of the equator comprise Jarvis, Maiden, Starbuck, Caroline, Vostok, and Flint. The Phoenix group consists of eight islands named Sydney, Phoenix, Enderbury, Canton, Hull, Birnie, Gardner, and McKean. They are all atolls and were uninhabited at the time of discovery. They were passed by in the early days, until they were found to have considerable deposits of guano. Some were later used for coconut plantations, and in recent times, the development of air transport has made some of them valuable airports.</p>
            <p>Cook discovered Christmas Island in 1777 and spent Christmas Day on the atoll. The other northern Line Islands were discovered by <name key="name-402152" type="person">Captain Fanning</name> of the American ship <hi rend="i">Betsy</hi> in 1798. The discoverers of the southern Line Islands had little to impart, except <name key="name-401730" type="person">Captain Lord Byron</name> in H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Blonde</hi> who discovered Maiden in 1825 and gave an account and a drawing of a marae on the island. The discoveries of the Phoenix Islands and Howland and Baker are shrouded in uncertainty.</p>
            <p>Stone remains or other traces of previous human visits or occupation have been found on Washington, Fanning, Christmas, and Maiden and on Caroline in the Line Islands, on Howland Island, and on Sydney and Hull in the Phoenix Islands. Literature on the area is scanty.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n107" n="97"/>
            <p>Bishop Museum, following its policy of regional survey, has gathered such information as was possible. The Whippoorwill Expedition examined the archaeological remnants on Howland in 1924. The Kaimiloa Expedition of 1924 gave <name type="person" key="name-401952">Kenneth P. Emory</name> the opportunity of visiting Fanning, Christmas, and Malden and making field observations. Part of a canoe found in a bog in Washington Island was given by the Greig brothers to the Museum, and from their notes and scanty references in the literature, Emory was able to write up the archaeology of the equatorial islands, omitting Caroline Island and the Phoenix Islands.</p>
            <p>The Phoenix Islands were visited by the <hi rend="i">Zaca</hi> Expedition in 1933, and <name type="person" key="name-101716">Gordon Macgregor</name> made a survey of the archaeological remains, but his manuscript has yet to be published.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d11-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Equatorial and Phoenix Islands</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d11-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Byron</hi> (1824-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1776-1780)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilson, James</hi> (1796-1798)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d11-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Becks, Louis</hi></author>, <title>Wild life in the southern seas</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brown</hi>, J. M.</author>, <title>Peoples and problems of the Pacific</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fanning, Edmund</hi></author>, <title>Voyages and discoveries in the south seas</title>, <pubPlace>Salem</pubPlace>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Rougier, Emmanuel</hi></author>, <title>Ile de Christmas</title>: <publisher>Soc. des Etudes Océaniennes</publisher>, Bull. 1, <biblScope>pp. 25-30</biblScope>, <date when="1917">1917</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d11-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bloxam, Andrew</hi></author>, <title>Diary of</title>, Special Pub. 10, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Archaeology of the Pacific equatorial islands</title>, Bull. 123, <date when="1934">1934</date>. [Includes <pubPlace>Howland, Palmyra, Washington, Fanning, Christmas, Jarvis, Malden, and Starbuck Islands</pubPlace>.]</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Macgregor, Gordon</hi></author>, <title>Archaeology of the Phoenix Islands</title>, manuscript in preparation.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d12" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Samoa</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d12-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The Samoan islands form an important center for western Polynesia. They are now divided into two groups: Western Samoa, consisting of Upolu and Savaii with the small islands of Manono and Apolima; and Eastern Samoa, comprising the large island of Tutuila and the Manua group of Ofu, Olosega, and Tau. Western Samoa is administered by New Zealand, originally under mandate from the League of Nations. Eastern Samoa is administered by the United States Navy, and the Naval Station at <name key="name-405107" type="place">Pago Pago</name> has the finest harbor in the two groups.</p>
            <p>Samoan mythology states that after the creation of the islands by the god Tagaloa, the inhabitants developed from worms. The Samoan mythology and <pb xml:id="n108" n="98"/>religion forms a western Polynesian pattern which differs widely from that of other parts of Polynesia, and the social organization is somewhat unique. The great development of power by talking chiefs in administrative activities even influenced the succession to chiefly titles. Some customs, such as the power of the sister's son over his maternal uncle's family and brother-and-sister avoidance have evidently diffused from Fiji for they are not present in the parts of Polynesia to the east. In material culture, a guild of carpenters controlled the building of the better houses and canoes, and even high chiefs had to submit to their labor rules.</p>
            <p>The first European discoverer was the Dutch navigator, <name key="name-401755" type="person">Roggeveen</name>, who sighted the Manua group in 1722, but he did not land. The other islands were seen by <name key="name-131266" type="person">Bougainville</name> in 1778 and, owing to the speed of the native canoes with lateen sails, he named the group the Archipelago of the Navigators. Other well-known navigators who visited were <name key="name-134311" type="person">La Pérouse</name>, <name key="name-401800" type="person">Kotzebue</name>, and <name key="name-207864" type="person">Dumont d'Urville</name>. The <name key="name-101759" type="person">Wilkes</name> Expedition also made important observations.</p>
            <p>Among the missionaries, <name key="name-203017" type="person">Stair</name> and Turner contributed general works and <name key="name-121542" type="person">Pratt</name> compiled a <name key="name-121543" type="work">dictionary and grammar</name>. Of other writers, <name key="name-402182" type="person">Pritchard</name> published his reminiscences and <name key="name-405105" type="person">Augustin Krämer</name> published his "Samoa-Inseln" in German; Fraser contributed articles in the Polynesian Journal; and <name key="name-203011" type="person">Keesing</name> wrote a work on "Modern Samoa."</p>
            <p>The Bishop Museum-Bayard Dominick Expedition to Tonga took physical measurements in Samoa en route. <name key="name-202883" type="person">E. S. C. Handy</name> and Mrs. <name key="name-400673" type="person">W. C. Handy</name> made some field studies on their way back from the Bishop Museum staff expedition to the Society Islands. Other Museum field expeditions took place in 1926 and 1927, and during the latter, I made an exhaustive study on material culture. <name key="name-035847" type="person">Margaret Mead</name>, on a National Research Fellowship, contributed a work on the social organization of Manua, published by the Museum, and also a work on "Coming of Age in Samoa" which was published in London. An independent study by <name type="person" key="name-405077">John W. Coulter</name> on land utilization was published by the Museum.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d12-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Samoa</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d12-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Behrens</hi> (1721-1722)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bougainville</hi> (1766-1769)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont d'Urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Edwards</hi> (1790-1791)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Erskine</hi> (1849)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1823-1826)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">La PÉrouse</hi> (1785-1788)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Roggeveen</hi> (1721-1722)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d12-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Churchward, Spencer</hi></author>, <title>A new Samoan grammar</title>, <pubPlace>Melbourne</pubPlace>, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fraser, John</hi></author>, <title>Folk songs and myths from Samoa</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 5, <biblScope>pp. 171-183</biblScope>; vol. 6, <biblScope>pp. 19-36</biblScope>, <biblScope>67-76</biblScope>, <biblScope>107-122</biblScope>; vol. 7, <biblScope>pp. 15-29</biblScope>; vol. 9, <biblScope>pp. 125-134</biblScope>, <date from="1896" to="1898">1896-98</date>, <date when="1900">1900</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n109" n="99"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Freeman</hi>, J. D.</author>, <title>The Falemaunga caves</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 53, <biblScope>pp. 86-106</biblScope>, <date when="1944">1944</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Keusing, Felix</hi> M.</author>, <title>Modern Samoa</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Keesing, Felix</hi> M.</author>, <title>The Taupo system of Samoa—a study in institutional change</title>: <publisher>Oceania</publisher>, vol. 8, <biblScope>pp. 1-14</biblScope>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">KrÄmer, Augustin</hi></author>, <title>Samoa-Inseln</title>, 2 vols., <pubPlace>Stuttgart</pubPlace>, <date when="1903">1903</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lewis, Aletta</hi> M.</author>, <title>They call them savages</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mead, Margaret</hi></author>, <title>The role of the individual in Samoan culture</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 58, <biblScope>pp. 481-496</biblScope>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mead, Margaret</hi></author>, <title>Coming of age in Samoa</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Powell</hi>, T.</author>, <title>Some folk-songs and myths from Samoa</title>, translated by T. Powell and G. Pratt …: <publisher>Royal Soc.</publisher> <pubPlace>New South Wales</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 24, <biblScope>pp. 195-217</biblScope>; vol. 25, <biblScope>pp. 241-286</biblScope>; vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 264-301</biblScope>; vol. 29, <biblScope>pp. 366-393</biblScope>, <date from="1890" to="1895">1890-1895</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pratt, George</hi></author>, <title>Grammar and dictionary of the Samoan language</title>, 4th edition, <pubPlace>Samoa</pubPlace>, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pritchard</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Polynesian reminiscences</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1866">1866</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Rowe, Newton</hi> A.</author>, <title>Samoa under the sailing gods</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Schultz</hi>, E.</author>, <title>The most important principles of Samoan family law, and the laws of inheritance</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 20, <biblScope>pp. 43-53</biblScope>, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stair</hi>, J. B.</author>, <title>Old Samoa</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Pan-pipes in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 50, <biblScope>pp. 173-184</biblScope>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Turner, George</hi></author>, <title>Samoa a hundred years ago and long before …</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1884">1884</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d12-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Coulter, John</hi> W.</author>, <title>Land utilization in American Samoa</title>, Bull. 170, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author><hi rend="sc">and</hi><author>W. C.</author>, <title>Samoan housebuilding, cooking, and tattooing</title>, Bull. 15, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hornell, James</hi></author>, <title>String figures of Fiji and western Polynesia</title>, Bull. 39, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mead, Margaret</hi></author>, <title>Social organization of Manua</title>, Bull. 76, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sullivan</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>Contribution to Samoan somatology; based on field studies of E. W. Gifford and W. C. McKern</title>, Mem., vol. 8, no. 2, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Samoan material culture</title>, Bull. 75, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d13" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Tonga</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d13-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The Tongan islands to the south of Samoa consist of three groups: Tongatabu and Eua to the south, the Haapai group of low lying atolls in the middle, and Vavau with a number of small islands to the north. North of Vavau are the smaller Tongan islands of Niuatobutabu and Tafahi, lying close together, with Niuafoou farther west.</p>
            <p>The early settlers evidently came from the Samoan Islands, with which the mythical origin from worms and the myth about Maui fishing up islands are shared. The culture has strong affinity with Samoan, but the talking chiefs (<hi rend="i">matabule</hi>) never attained as much power as those (<hi rend="i">tulafale</hi>) of Samoa. All the Polynesian cultivated food plants and domestic animals were present in Tongatabu and Vavau. A good deal of fighting took place between the three groups, but the highest ranking chiefs were established in Tongatabu, which continues to be the seat of government of the independent Kingdom of Tonga.</p>
            <p>The first white voyagers to encounter the group were <name key="name-401754" type="person">Le Maire</name> and <name key="name-402005" type="person">Schouten</name>, who discovered in 1616 two of the northern islands which they named Cocos (Tafahi) and Traitors Island (Niuatobutabu). They traded <pb xml:id="n110" n="100"/>with the inhabitants and were entertained by the king. The next discoverer was Tasman (1643), who, coming from New Zealand, discovered Pylstaart, away to the south, and then Amsterdam (Tongatabu) and Middleburg (Eua). He sailed on to Nomuka in the Haapai which he named Rotterdam. The Vavau group escaped discovery until 1780 when a Spaniard named <name key="name-401711" type="person">Maurelle</name>, who had been driven south by contrary winds, came upon Late Island and Vavau, which he named Majorca. A number of noted voyagers visited the islands, including Cook who, as usual, recorded much valuable information. <name key="name-402138" type="person">Labillardière</name>, the scientist with the <name key="name-101196" type="person">D'Entrecasteaux</name> Expedition, also recorded much valuable information.</p>
            <p>Of other writers, the work best known is Mariner's Tonga, which was written by John Martin from the oral accounts of <name key="name-101232" type="person">William Mariner</name>, a shipwrecked sailor. The Wesleyan missionary, <name type="person" key="name-405093">Shirley W. Baker</name>, compiled a dictionary, and <name type="person" key="name-200573">John Williams</name> gives interesting information regarding his visit to Haapai. <name key="name-402405" type="person">Basil Thomson</name>'s work is interesting and amusing.</p>
            <p>The Bayard Dominick Expedition in 1920 resulted in important contributions by <name type="person" key="name-202890">E. W. Gifford</name> and W. C. McKern. Bishop Museum also published manuscripts by E. E. V. Collocott and J. D. Whitcombe. The Lau Islands in the Fiji Archipelago were peopled from Tonga and a manuscript concerning them by <name type="person" key="name-405064">A. M. Hocart</name> was published by the Museum. Later, Laura Thompson visited southern Lau on a Bishop Museum Fellowship, and her study was published.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d13-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Tonga</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d13-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Belcher</hi> (1836-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bligh</hi> (1787-1789)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1776-1780)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">D'Entrecasteaux</hi> (1791-1793)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dillon</hi> (1827-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumontd'Urville</hi> (1826-1829)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont d'Urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Edwards</hi> (1790-1791)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Erskine</hi> (1849)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">LabillardiÈre</hi> (1791-1793)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">La PÈrouse</hi> (1785-1788)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Le Maire</hi> (1615-1617)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Maurelle</hi> (1780-1781)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Schouten</hi> (1615-1617)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Tasman</hi> (1642-1643)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Turnbull</hi> (1800-1804)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wallis</hi> (1766-1768)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilson</hi> (1796-1798)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d13-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Baker</hi>, S. W.</author>, <title>A Tongan and English vocabulary</title>, <pubPlace>Auckland</pubPlace>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole</hi></author>, <title>Ernest and Pearl, Pangai, a village in Tonga</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 18, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mariner, William</hi></author>, see Martin.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Martin, John</hi></author>, <title>An account of the natives of the Tongan Islands</title>, compiled and arranged from the communications of Mr. William Mariner, 2 vols., <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1817">1817</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Material representatives of Tongan and Samoan gods</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 44, <biblScope>pp. 48-53</biblScope>, <biblScope>85-96</biblScope>, <biblScope>153-162</biblScope>, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Additional wooden images from Tonga</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 46, <biblScope>pp. 74-82</biblScope>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n111" n="101"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Pan-pipes in Polynesia</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 50, <biblScope>pp. 173-184</biblScope>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thomson, Basil</hi></author>, <title>The diversions of a prime minister</title>, <pubPlace>Edinburgh and London</pubPlace>, <date when="1894">1894</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Vason, George</hi></author>, <title>An authentic narrative of four years residence at Tongataboo …</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1810">1810</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">West, Thomas</hi></author>, <title>Ten years in south-eastern Polynesia (Tonga)</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1865">1865</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williams, John</hi></author>, <title>Missionary enterprises</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1839">1839</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d13-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Collocott</hi>, E. E. V.</author>, <title>Proverbial sayings of the Tongans</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 8, no. 3, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Collocott</hi>, E. E. V.</author>, <title>Tongan astronomy and the calendar</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 8, no. 4, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Collocott</hi>, E. E. V.</author>, <title>Tales and poems of Tonga</title>, Bull. 46, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gifford</hi>, E. W.</author>, <title>Tongan place names</title>, Bull. 6, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gifford</hi>, E. W.</author>, <title>Tongan myths and tales</title>, Bull. 8, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gifford</hi>, E. W.</author>, <title>Tongan Society</title>, Bull. 61, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hocart</hi>, A. M.</author>, <title>The Lau Islands</title>, Bull. 62, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mckern</hi>, W. C.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Tonga</title>, Bull. 60, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mckern</hi>, W. C.</author>, <title>Tongan material culture</title>, manuscript.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sullivan</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>Tongan somatology</title>: based on the field studies of E. W. Gifford and W. C. McKern, Mem., vol. 8, no. 4, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thompson, Laura</hi></author>, <title>Southern Lau, Fiji: an ethnography</title>, Bull. 162, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Whitcombe</hi>, J. D.</author>, <title>Notes on Tongan ethnology</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 9, no. 9, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d14" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Niue</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d14-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-123229" type="place">Niue</name> is a raised coral island with an average height of 220 feet above sea level. It is situated in latitude 19°10' S. and longitude 169° 17' W., the nearest island being Vavau, 250 miles away. Though the land consists entirely of coral, it grows large trees and cultivable plants such as bananas, yams, and the paper mulberry. It is surrounded by a close fringing reef and there is no anchorage outside it.</p>
            <p>The traditions, dialect, and culture would indicate that the island was settled from Tonga. Traditional material is poor for there are no hereditary lines of chiefs and no lengthy genealogies. The people did not tattoo, or drink kava, though the kava plant grew readily. The people are industrious and make reliable seamen.</p>
            <p>The island was discovered by <name key="name-207700" type="person">Cook</name> on his second voyage, and owing to a hostile demonstration on his landing, he named it Savage Island. Various navigators passed the island, but there was no anchorage, hence no inducement to land. <name key="name-401688" type="person">Erskine</name> made a visit as late as 1849. The <name key="name-200279" type="organisation">London Missionary Society</name> established a station in 1862, and the island became a British protectorate in 1900. <name key="name-402405" type="person">Basil Thomson</name>, the government official who hoisted the flag, wrote an interesting book on the island. The administration was entrusted to New Zealand, and <name type="person" key="name-209282">S. Percy Smith</name>, who was sent as the first government agent in 1901, contributed a number of interesting articles to the Polynesian Journal. <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name> collaborated with <name type="person" key="name-121391">Edward Tregear</name> in producing a grammar and vocabulary of the language.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n112" n="102"/>
            <p><name type="person" key="name-400672">Edwin B. Loeb</name>, of the University of California, made a field study in 1923-1924, and his work on the history and traditions of the island was published by the Museum.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d14-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Niue</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d14-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Erskine</hi> (1849)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d14-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Loeb</hi>, E. M.</author>, <title>The shaman of Niue</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 393-402</biblScope>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>Niue Island and its people</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 11, <biblScope>pp. 80-106</biblScope>, <biblScope>163-178</biblScope>, <biblScope>195-218</biblScope>; vol. 12, <biblScope>pp. 1-31</biblScope>, <biblScope>85-119</biblScope>, <date when="1902">1902</date>, <date when="1903">1903</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Tregear, Edward</hi></author>, <title>Vocabulary and grammar of the Niue dialect</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1907">1907</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author>P. H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Some notes on the small outrigger canoe of Niue-fekai</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 3, <biblScope>pp. 91-94</biblScope>, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thomson, Basil</hi></author>, <title>Savage Island</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1902">1902</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d14-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publication</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Loeb</hi>, E. M.</author>, <title>History and traditions of Niue</title>, Bull. 32, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d15" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Tokelau</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d15-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The <name key="name-123228" type="place">Tokelau</name>, or Union Islands, comprise four atolls: Atafu (Duke of York), Nukunono (Duke of Clarence), Fakaofu (Bowditch), and Olosega (Swains Island). They lie in general northwest-southeast line between latitude 8° and 11' S. and longitude 171° and 173° W. Atafu is the most northerly and Olosega the most southerly.</p>
            <p>Olosega was one of the islands discovered by Quiros, who sighted it on March 1, 1606, and named it la Peregrine He went ashore and recorded quite a good description of the people, whom he numbered at 500. Espinosa named the island Gente Hermosa from the beauty of the inhabitants. For some unknown reason, the local population seems to have disappeared or migrated, for since the occupation of the island by the Jennings family in 1856, the inhabitants seem to have been recruited mostly from Atafu and Fakaofu. A long period elapsed before the other three atolls were discovered, the next atoll being Atafu on June 24, 1765, by <name key="name-150151" type="person">Byron</name> (1764-1766), who named it Duke of York Island. Nukunono was next, in 1791, when it was discovered by <name key="name-401716" type="person">Captain Edwards</name> (1790-1791) in the <hi rend="i">Pandora</hi>. He evidently followed Byron's idea of nomenclature, naming the atoll Duke of Clarence Island. Fakaofu was not discovered until long after, when <name key="name-402047" type="person">Captain Hudson</name> of the <name key="name-101759" type="person">Wilkes</name> Expedition (1838-1842) found it and, with more democratic tastes, named it Bowditch Island.</p>
            <p>In addition to the journals of the early voyagers, <name key="name-120617" type="person">Horatio Hale</name>, a member of the Wilkes Expedition, made a valuable contribution on this and other <pb xml:id="n113" n="103"/>groups in his work on the ethnography and philology of the expedition. Little was contributed by other writers and such as there was has been incorporated by Macgregor in his work.</p>
            <p><name type="person" key="name-101716">Gordon Macgregor</name> visited the group in 1932 on a Bishop Museum Fellowship. His work on the ethnology of the group covered social organization, religion, and material culture.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d15-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on the Tokelau Islands</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d15-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Byron</hi> (1764-1766)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Edwards</hi> (1790-1791)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Quiros</hi> (1605-1606)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d15-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows, William</hi></author>, <title>Some notes and legends of a south sea island [Fakaofu]</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 32, <biblScope>pp. 143-173</biblScope>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hale, Horatio</hi></author>, <title>Ethnography and philology</title>, U. S. Exploring Expedition, Narrative, vol. 6, <pubPlace>Philadelphia</pubPlace>, <date when="1846">1846</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lister</hi>, J. J.</author>, <title>Notes on the natives of Fakaofu (Bowditch Island) Union Group</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 22, <biblScope>pp. 43-63</biblScope>, <date when="1891">1891</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>A note on the Tokelau or Union Group</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 31, <biblScope>pp. 91-93</biblScope>, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d15-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publication</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Macgregor, Gordon</hi></author>, <title>Ethnology of Tokelau</title>, Bull. 146, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d16" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Futuna and Alofi</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d16-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-402069" type="place">Futuna</name> and <name key="name-402070" type="place">Alofi</name> are small volcanic islands surrounded by fringing coral reefs. The reefs of the two islands at their nearest points are separated by a deep channel about a quarter of a mile wide. They lie around 14° S. latitude and 178° W. longitude and are about 160 miles southwest of Uvea. The islands were first visited by <name key="name-401754" type="person">Le Maire</name> and <name key="name-402005" type="person">Schouten</name> in 1616 and named the Hoorn Islands after the town of Hoorn in Holland.</p>
            <p>The traditions of different districts indicate that the earliest settlers came in separate small groups. The opinion held now is that they came from Samoa, but at an early stage before some of the more elaborate customs and techniques had been developed.</p>
            <p>A mission was established by French Roman Catholics and information concerning the islands is to be found in the letters of the missionaries published in missionary journals.</p>
            <p>Bishop Museum sent <name key="name-400675" type="person">Edwin G. Burrows</name> to the islands in 1932 on a Bishop Museum Fellowship. His work on the Ethnology of Futuna and on the music have been published by the Museum.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n114" n="104"/>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d16-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Futuna and Alofi</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d16-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Le Maire and Schouten</hi> (1615-1617)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bougainville</hi> (1766-1769)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d16-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><title>Annales de la propagation de la foi</title>, vols. 12-50, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date from="1838" to="1877">1838-1877</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>Annales des missions d'Océanie</title>, correspondence des premiers missionaires, Soc. de Marie, vol. 1, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1895">1895</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bourdin, Le PÈre</hi></author>, <title>Vie du vénérable P.M.L. Chanel, prêtre de la Société de Marie</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1867">1867</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Grezel, Le PÈre</hi></author>, <title>Dictionnaire Futunien-Francais</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1878">1878</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hocart</hi>, A. M.</author>, <title>Chieftainship and the sister's son in the Pacific</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, new ser., vol. 17, no. 4, <biblScope>pp. 631-646</biblScope>, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Laeerrière, Julien</hi></author>, <title>Voyage aux Iles Tonga-Tabou, Wallis, et Foutouna</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1845">1845</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>Futuna, or Horne Island and its people</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 1, <biblScope>pp. 33-52</biblScope>, <date when="1892">1892</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d16-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Ethnology of Futuna</title>, Bull. 138, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Songs of Uvea and Futuna</title>, Bull. 183, <date when="1945">1945</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d17" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Uvea</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d17-d1" type="preamble">
            <p><name key="name-405120" type="place">Uvea</name> is a low-lying volcanic island with both fringing coral reef and an outer barrier reef completely surrounding the island, but with four passages. The lagoon within the barrier reef ranges in width from less than two miles to about five miles. Its latitude is 13° S. and its longitude 176° W. The area is about 23 square miles, and the population in 1923 was 4,878. The island was discovered by <name key="name-150152" type="person">Wallis</name> in 1767 and was named after him. The people are Polynesian, and both traditions and culture elements connect them with Tonga; but there are suggestions of a pre-Tongan population which was also Polynesian.</p>
            <p>The Marist priest, Monseigneur Bataillon, commenced a mission in 1837. Negotiations commenced with France in 1842, and ultimately Uvea, Futuna, and Alofi came under the administration of France.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d17-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Uvea</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d17-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wallis</hi> (1766-1768)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d17-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><title>Annales de la propagation de la foi</title>, vols. 13 ff., <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1838">1838</date>—.</bibl>
              <bibl><title>Annales des missions d'Océanie</title>, correspondence des premiers missionaires, Soc. de Marie, vol. 1, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1895">1895</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n115" n="105"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bataillon, Pierre</hi></author>, <title>Langue d'Uvea</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dix</hi>, W. G.</author>, <title>Wreck of the Glide</title>, with recollections of Fiji and of Wallis Island, <pubPlace>New York and London</pubPlace>, <date when="1848">1848</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Mangeret, Le Pére</hi></author>, <title>Monseigneur Bataillon et les missions d'Océanie</title>, <pubPlace>Lyon</pubPlace>, <date when="1884">1884</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Viala</hi>, M.</author>, <title>Les Iles Wallis et Horn</title>: <publisher>Soc. Neuchateloise de Géographie</publisher>, Bull. 28, <biblScope>pp. 209-286</biblScope>, <date when="1919">1919</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d17-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Ethnology of Uvea (Wallis Island)</title>, Bull. 145, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Burrows</hi>, E. G.</author>, <title>Songs of Uvea and Futuna</title>, Bull. 183, <date when="1945">1945</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d18" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Ellice Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d18-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The <name key="name-029933" type="place">Ellice Islands</name>, nine atolls lying between latitudes 5°30' and 11°30' S. and between longitudes 176° and 180° E., form the most westerly Polynesian group. The native names of the islands are Nurakita, Nukulaelae, Funafuti, Nukufetau, Vaitupu, Nui, Nanomanga, Niutao, and Nanomea. Details of the islands are given in Findlay's Pacific Ocean Directory. The group is administered from Fiji as part of the Gilbert and Ellice Islands Protectorate.</p>
            <p>The inhabitants are Polynesians with the exception of those on Nui, which was peopled from the Gilbert Islands. The people were described by Whitmee as quiet and peaceable, and ordinary disputes were settled by their chiefs. The economy of the people is based on the coconut and on fish, as it is in other coral atolls. In language and material culture, as evidenced in bonito fishing, the people have clearly marked affinity with Samoa. Traditions also point to Samoa as their place of origin.</p>
            <p>The individual islands have received various English names, bestowed upon them by whalers and other visiting ships. Nanomea has been identified as the St. Augustine Island seen by <name key="name-401711" type="person">Maurelle</name> in 1781. The brig <hi rend="i">Elizabeth</hi> visited this island in 1809. Captain Peyster, in the <hi rend="i">Rebecca</hi>, is credited with the discovery of <name key="name-021215" type="place">Funafuti</name> and Nukufetau in 1819. <name key="name-402047" type="person">Captain Hudson</name> of the Wilkes Expedition visited the group in 1841 in the <hi rend="i">Peacock</hi> and, regarding two of the atolls as new discoveries, named them Hudson (Nanomanga) and Speiden (Niu-tao). Hudson appears to have been the first to give any worthwhile account of the native inhabitants, as recorded in the account of the Wilkes Expedition.</p>
            <p>The Reverend S. J. Whitmee made some valuable observations on each atoll during a missionary cruise in 1870, and <name key="name-201046" type="person">Captain Moresby</name>, R.N., added a little further information from a visit of H.M.S. <hi rend="i">Basilisk</hi> in 1872. Turner, Gill, <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name>, and Newell also recorded fragments which are useful. The first real contribution to ethnology was made by <name type="person" key="name-405073">Charles Hedley</name> of the Australian Museum, Sydney, who was the Australian representative on the Funafuti Coral Reef Boring Expedition of the Royal Society (London). Hedley spent two and a half months on Funafuti in 1896 and, in addition to his zoological and botanical work, made a fine record of the native customs and their material <pb xml:id="n116" n="106"/>culture. Another valuable study was made by <name type="person" key="name-202895">D. G. Kennedy</name> on the culture of Vaitupu. Kennedy was a resident official at Vaitupu in the service of the Western Pacific High Commission which is administered from Fiji. The technical details given in the work are of the highest standard of careful recording.</p>
            <p>Bishop Museum has not had the opportunity so far of doing field work in the Ellice Islands. Though the individual atolls of Funafuti and Vaitupu have been well done, the other atolls should be investigated to complete the record. Hedley, in his work, included physical measurements made on 10 males by Surgeon F. W. Collingwood, R.N., but a more representative number should be made on each atoll for comparison with the work done in other parts of Polynesia.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d18-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on the Ellice Islands</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d18-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Maurelle</hi> (1780-1781)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d18-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Findlay</hi>, A. G.</author>, <title>South Pacific Ocean Directory</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, 5th Edition, <biblScope>pp. 829-835</biblScope>, <date when="1884">1884</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gill</hi>, W. W.</author>, <title>Jottings from the Pacific</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1885">1885</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hedley, Charles</hi></author>, <title>The ethnology of Funafuti</title>: <publisher>Australian Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 3, <biblScope>pp. 227-304</biblScope>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kennedy, Donald</hi> G.</author>, <title>Field notes on the culture of Vaitupu</title>, Ellice Islands: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Mem., vol. 9, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Moresby, John</hi></author>, <title>Discoveries and surveys in New Guinea … a cruise in Polynesia … H.M.S. Basilisk</title>, <biblScope>pp. 71-80</biblScope>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1876">1876</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Newell</hi>, J. E.</author>, <title>Notes, chiefly ethnological, of the Tokelau, Ellice, and Gilbert Islanders</title>: <publisher>Australasian Assoc. Adv. of Science</publisher>, Rept. of the meeting, vol. 6, <biblScope>pp. 603-610</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Brisbane</pubPlace>, <date when="1895">1895</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith, S. Percy</hi></author>, <title>The first inhabitants of the Ellice Islands</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc, Jour.</publisher>, vol. 6, <biblScope>pp. 209-210</biblScope>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Whitmee</hi>, S. J.</author>, <title>Missionary cruise in the south Pacific</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1871">1871</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Whitmee</hi>, S. J.</author>, <title>The ethnology of Polynesia</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 8, <biblScope>pp. 261-275</biblScope>, <date when="1879">1879</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d19" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Hawaii</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d19-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The <name key="name-019821" type="place">Hawaiian Islands</name>, situated between latitudes 19° and 22°15' N., comprise the only inhabited Polynesian group north of the equator. These volcanic islands form the northern angle of the Polynesian triangle. The main group includes the following eight islands: Hawaii, Maui, Kahoolawe, Lanai, Molokai, Oahu, Kauai, and Niihau. Off Niihau are the rocky islets of Lehua and Kaula, and extending toward the northwest is a long range of uninhabited rocky islets consisting of Nihoa, Necker, French Frigate Shoal, Gardiner, Laysan, Lisiansky, Midway, and Ocean. Nihoa and Necker have archaeological remains. The large islands are well wooded and watered, and the soil and climate are favorable to the growth of introduced plants.</p>
            <pb xml:id="n117" n="107"/>
            <p>Native legends state that the island of Hawaii was discovered by Hawaiiloa who named the island after himself. He headed the first settlers, who have been termed Menehune. The Menehune had no cultivated food plants or domestic animals. They are credited with building many of the fishponds and religious structures termed heiaus, and a good deal of myth has been composed about them and their doings. They are associated mostly with Kauai. It is probable that, like the Manahune of the Society Islands, they were of Polynesian stock who left central Polynesia at an early stage in the development of Polynesian culture. They were followed, in about the twelfth century and later, by settlers from Tahiti who had a more advanced stage of culture. The later arrivals brought all the Polynesian cultivated food plants (except the plantain), the paper mulberry, and all three of the domestic animals. The Menehune were absorbed by the later arrivals, and the culture, which was developed on a central Polynesian pattern, was enriched by many local developments.</p>
            <p>The European discoverer of the group was <name key="name-207700" type="person">Captain James Cook</name> in 1778, for the oft quoted Spanish discovery by <name key="name-401728" type="person">Juan de Gaetano</name> in 1555 has been conclusively disproved. Cook's description of the native culture is full and authoritative. Besides later British voyagers, the group was visited by Russian and French navigators, as shown in the literature list which follows, and they recorded useful source material.</p>
            <p>Missionaries from New England commenced their labors in the islands in 1820, and among those who wrote about the people, the names of Bingham and Dibble may be mentioned. The best missionary account of the Hawaiians, however, was made by <name type="person" key="name-121365">William Ellis</name>, a member of the London Missionary Society, who paid a visit from Tahiti. The missionaries compiled an alphabet for the Hawaiian language and established schools.</p>
            <p>Among native Hawaiian students, Malo, Kamakau, and Kepelino recorded interesting material about their people, but their work was influenced by the desire to fit Christian teaching into their accounts of mythology and native religion. Malo's manuscript, entitled "Hawaiian antiquities", translated by <name type="person" key="name-402394">N. B. Emerson</name>, and Kepelino's "Traditions of Hawaii", translated by Martha Beckwith, were both published by Bishop Museum. <name key="name-123789" type="person">Kamakau</name>'s contributions consisted of a number of articles published in the Hawaiian language newspapers. These were collected and typed out by the Museum as more available. source material. They were translated by Martha Beckwith and <name type="person" key="name-405084">Mary Pukui</name>, and the material is at present in bound manuscript form.</p>
            <p>Of other writers, the names which stand out prominently are Fornander, Thrum, Alexander, Westervelt, and Emerson. Fornander amassed a great quantity of material, but his weakness lay in accepting Christian affinities in the Hawaiian accounts as being old instead of recent. He thus propounded a Semitic origin for the Hawaiians and Polynesians. Thrum founded the Hawaiian Annual in 1875 and contributed many valuable articles to its pages. <pb xml:id="n118" n="108"/>He was particularly interested in religious stone structures and did much to locate them on the various islands. The contributions of the various local writers are enumerated in the literature list.</p>
            <p>Among periodicals, the <hi rend="i">Missionary Herald</hi>, published in Boston, contained early impressions of the missionaries in Hawaii, the accounts commencing in volume 17, published in 1821. Interesting articles written by Hawaiians appeared in language newspapers such as <hi rend="i">Ke au okoa</hi> and <hi rend="i">Ka nupepa kuokoa</hi>. The articles of ethnological value have been translated by <name type="person" key="name-405084">Mary Pukui</name>, Assistant in Hawaiian Linguistics, and filed at the Museum for future study.The work of the Hawaiian Historical Society, founded by W. D. Alexander, J. S. Emerson, T. G. Thrum, and others is referred to on page 41.</p>
            <p>A period of increased output in ethnological literature is associated with Bishop Museum. Studies on the Museum's collections by Brigham and Stokes and "Fornander's collection of Hawaiian antiquities and folk-lore" were published as Museum Memoirs. Since 1920, the Museum has published many studies on topical subjects in Hawaiian culture. Among the contributors may be mentioned the following: Beckwith (mythology and folklore), Cartwright (genealogies, history), Dickey (string figures), Emory (archaeology), Handy (therapeutics, agriculture), Judd (proverbs, language), Luquiens (art), Pukui (birth and translations), Roberts (music), Sullivan (physical characters), <name type="person" key="name-202886">Te Rangi Hiroa</name> (technology), and Wissler (physical characteristics).</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d19-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Hawaiian Literature</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d19-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Arago</hi> (1817-1820)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Beechey</hi> (1825-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Belcher</hi> (1836-1842)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Bennett</hi> (1833-1836)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Broughton</hi> (1795-1798)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Byron</hi> (1824-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Chamisso</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Choris</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1776-1780)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dixon</hi> (1785-1788)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Duhaut-Cilly</hi> (1826-1829)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Du Petit-Thouars</hi> (1836-1839)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">FranchÉre</hi> (1811-1814)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Freycinet</hi> (1817-1820)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Golovnin</hi> (1817-1819)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1815-1818)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Kotzebue</hi> (1823-1826)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Krusenstern</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Langsdorff</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">La perouse</hi> (1785-1788)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Lisiansky</hi> (1803-1806)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Meares</hi> (1788-1789)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Menzies</hi> (1791-1795)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Mortimer</hi> (1789)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Portlock</hi> (1785-1788)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Roquefeuil</hi> (1816-1819)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Stewart</hi> (1829-1830)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Turnbull</hi> (1800-1804)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Vancouver</hi> (1791-1795)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d19-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Later Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Alexander</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>A brief history of the Hawaiian people</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1891">1891</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Alexander</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>Brief history of land titles in the Hawaiian Kingdom</title>: Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1891">1891</date>, <biblScope>pp. 105-124</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Alexander</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>A short synopsis of the most essential points in Hawaiian grammar</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1864">1864</date>, and later editions.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n119" n="109"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andrews, Lorrin</hi></author>, <title>Grammar of the Hawaiian language</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1854">1854</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beckley, Emma</hi> M.</author>, <title>The Hawaiian fisheries …</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1883">1883</date>; reprinted as <title>Hawaiian fishing implements and methods of fishing</title>: U. S. Fish Comm., Bull. 6, <biblScope>pp. 245-250</biblScope>, <date when="1886">1886</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beckwith, Martha</hi> W.</author>, <title>The Hawaiian romance of Laieikawai</title>: <publisher>Bureau Am. Ethnol.</publisher>, 33d Ann. Rept, <date from="1911" to="1912">1911-1912</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beckwith, Martha</hi> W.</author>, <title>Hawaiian mythology</title>, <pubPlace>New Haven</pubPlace>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bingham, Hiram</hi></author>, <title>Residence of twenty-one years in the Sandwich Islands, Canandaigua</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1855">1855</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Blake, Tom</hi></author>, <title>Hawaiian surfboard</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Campbell, Archibald</hi></author>, <title>A voyage round the world from 1806 to 1812; in which … the Sandwich Islands were visited …</title>, <biblScope>pp. 120-215</biblScope>; <biblScope>267-275</biblScope>, <pubPlace>Edinburgh</pubPlace>, <date when="1816">1816</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cartwright, Bruce</hi></author>, <title>Legend of Hawaii-loa</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 38, <biblScope>pp. 105-121</biblScope>, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cobb, John</hi> N.</author>, <title>The fishes and fisheries of the Hawaiian Islands</title>: <publisher>United States Fish Comm.</publisher> Rept. for 1901, <biblScope>pp. 353-499</biblScope>, <date when="1902">1902</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Corney, Peter</hi></author>, <title>Voyages in the northern Pacific</title>: narrative of several trading voyages from 1813-1818 … Kamehameha's realm; manners and customs …, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1891">1891</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Culin, Stewart</hi></author>, <title>Hawaiian games</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, n.s., vol. 1, <biblScope>pp. 201-247</biblScope>, <date when="1899">1899</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dalton</hi>, O. M.</author>, <title>Notes on an ethnological collection … voyage of Captain Vancouver, 1790-1795</title>: <publisher>Archiv für Ethnogr.</publisher>, vol. 10, <biblScope>pp. 225-245</biblScope>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dibble, Sheldon</hi></author>, <title>History of the Sandwich Islands</title>, <pubPlace>Lahainaluna (Hawaii)</pubPlace>, <date when="1843">1843</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dole, Sanford</hi> B.</author>, <title>Evolution of Hawaiian land tenures</title>: <publisher>Haw. Hist. Soc.</publisher>, Paper no. 3, <date when="1892">1892</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ellis, William</hi></author>, <title>Journal of a tour around Hawaii, the largest of the Sandwich Islands</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1825">1825</date>, and later editions.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ellis, William</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian researches</title>, vols. 1-4, 2d ed., <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1831">1831</date> [vol. 4: Hawaii].</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emerson</hi>, J. S.</author>, <title>The lesser Hawaiian gods</title>: <publisher>Haw. Hist. Soc.</publisher>, Paper 2, <date when="1892">1892</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emerson</hi>, N. B.</author>, <title>The poetry of Hawaii</title>: <publisher>Haw. Hist. Soc.</publisher>, 11th Ann. Rept., <biblScope>pp. 12-22</biblScope>, <date when="1903">1903</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emerson</hi>, N. B.</author>, <title>Unwritten literature of Hawaii</title>: <publisher>Bureau Am. Ethnol.</publisher>, Bull. 38, <date when="1909">1909</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emerson</hi>, N. B.</author>, <title>The long voyages of the ancient Hawaiians</title>: <publisher>Haw. Hist. Soc</publisher>, Paper 5, <date when="1893">1893</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emerson</hi>, N. B.</author>, <title>Pele and Hiiaka</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emerson</hi>, O. P.</author>, <title>The awa habit of the Hawaiians</title>: Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1903">1903</date>, <biblScope>pp. 130-140</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fornander, Abraham</hi></author>, <title>An account of the Polynesian race …</title>, 3 vols., <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date from="1878" to="1885">1878-1885</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>Cultural revolution in Hawaii</title>: <publisher>Inst. Pacific Relations</publisher>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Pukui, Mary</hi> K.</author>, <title>Ohana, the dispersed community of Kanaka</title>: <publisher>Inst. Pacific Relations</publisher>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1935">1935</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C., <hi rend="sc">and others</hi></author>, <title>Ancient Hawaiian civilization</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hyde</hi>, C. M.</author>, <title>Hawaiian names of relationships of consanguinity and affinity</title>: Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1884">1884</date>, <biblScope>pp. 42-44</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Jarves, James</hi> J.</author>, <title>History of the Hawaiian or Sandwich Islands</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1843">1843</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Judd</hi>, H. P., <hi rend="sc">Pukui, Mary</hi></author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Introduction to the Hawaiian language</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kaaiakamanu</hi>, D. M.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Akina</hi>, J. K.</author>, <title>Hawaiian herbs of medicinal value, Board of Health</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kamakau</hi>, S. M.</author>, <title>Ancient Hawaiian religious beliefs and ceremonies</title> (trans. by Thomas G. Thrum): Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1911">1911</date>, <biblScope>pp. 149-158</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">KrÄmer, Augustin</hi></author>, <title>Hawaii, Ostmikronesien und Samoa</title>, <pubPlace>Stuttgart</pubPlace>, <date when="1906">1906</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kukahi, Joseph</hi> L.</author>, <title>Ke kumulipo</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1902">1902</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Liliuokalani, Queen</hi></author> (translator), <title>An account of the creation of the world according to Hawaiian tradition</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n120" n="110"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Makemson</hi>, M. W.</author>, <title>Hawaiian astronomical concepts</title>: <publisher>American Anthropologist</publisher>, vol. 40, <biblScope>pp. 370-383</biblScope>; vol. 41, <biblScope>pp. 589-596</biblScope>, <date when="1938">1938</date>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Montgomery, James</hi></author>, <title>Journal of voyages and travels by the Rev. David Tyerman and George Bennet</title>, Esq. … between the years 1821 and 1829, 2 vols., <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1831">1831</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Peabody Museum</hi></author>, <title>The Hawaiian portion of the Polynesian collections in the Peabody Museum of Salem</title>, <pubPlace>Salem</pubPlace>, <date when="1920">1920</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Perkins</hi>, E. T.</author>, <title>Namotu: reef-roving in the south seas</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1854">1854</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pogue</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Moolelo Hawaii</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1858">1858</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pogue</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Ka moolelo Hawaii</title>, <pubPlace>Lahainaluna</pubPlace>, <date when="1838">1838</date>. (Translated into French; see Jules Remy.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pokuea</hi>, J. F.</author>, see Pogue.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Read, Charles</hi> H.</author>, <title>An account of a collection of ethnographical specimens formed during Vancouver's voyage in the Pacific Ocean 1790-1795</title>: <publisher>Royal Anthrop. Inst.</publisher><pubPlace>Great Britain and Ireland</pubPlace>, Jour., vol. 21, <date when="1891">1891</date>, <date when="1892">1892</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Remy, Jules</hi></author>, <title>Recit d'un vieux sauvage</title>, <pubPlace>Chalons-sur-Marne</pubPlace>, <date when="1859">1859</date>. (Translated by W. T. Brigham, Contribution of a venerable savage to the ancient history of the Hawaiian Islands, Boston, 1868.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Remy, Jules</hi></author>, <title>Histoire de l'Archipel Havaiien</title>, <pubPlace>Paris</pubPlace>, <date when="1862">1862</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Notes on Polynesian feather work</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 34, <biblScope>pp. 24-35</biblScope>, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>New bases for Hawaiian chronology</title>: <publisher>Haw. Hist. Soc.</publisher>, 41st Ann. Rept, <biblScope>pp. 23-65</biblScope>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Spaniards and the sweet potato in Hawaii and Hawaiian-American contacts</title>: <publisher>Am. Anthropologist, n.s.</publisher>, vol. 34, <biblScope>pp. 594-600</biblScope>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Japanese cultural influence in Hawaii</title>: <publisher>Fifth Pacific Sci. Congress</publisher>, Proc. (Vancouver), <biblScope>pp. 2791-2803</biblScope>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>The local evolution of Hawaiian feather capes and cloaks</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 53, <biblScope>pp. 1-16</biblScope>, <date when="1944">1944</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>Hawaiian folk tales</title>, <pubPlace>Chicago</pubPlace>, <date when="1907">1907</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>More Hawaiian folk tales</title>, <pubPlace>Chicago</pubPlace>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>Heiaus and heiau sites throughout the Hawaiian Islands</title>, Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1907">1907</date>, <biblScope>pp. 36-46</biblScope>; for <date when="1908">1908</date>, <biblScope>pp. 38-47</biblScope>; for <date when="1909">1909</date>, <biblScope>pp. 38-43</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>Tales from the temples</title>, Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1907">1907</date>, <biblScope>pp. 49-69</biblScope>; for <date when="1908">1908</date>, <biblScope>pp. 48-78</biblScope>; for <date when="1909">1909</date>, <biblScope>pp. 44-54</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>Hawaiian calabashes</title>: Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1902">1902</date>, <biblScope>pp. 149-154</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>Hawaiian salt making</title>: Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1924">1924</date>, <biblScope>pp. 112-117</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thrum, Thomas</hi> G.</author>, <title>Hawaiian surf riding</title>: Hawaiian Annual for <date when="1896">1896</date>, <biblScope>pp. 106-113</biblScope>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Townsend, Ebenezer</hi></author>, <title>Diary of Mr. Ebenezer Townsend, Jr. … ship Neptune [1798]</title>, <pubPlace>New Haven</pubPlace> Hist. Soc, Paper 4, <date when="1888">1888</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Westervelt</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>Legends of Maui …</title>, <pubPlace>Honolulu</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Westervelt</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>Legends of old Honolulu</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Westervelt</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>Legends of gods and ghosts …</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Westervelt</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>Hawaiian legends of volcanoes (mythology)</title>, <pubPlace>Boston</pubPlace>, <date when="1916">1916</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Westervelt</hi>, W. D.</author>, <title>Hawaiian historical legends</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d19-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andrews, Lorrin</hi></author>, <title>Dictionary of the Hawaiian language</title>. Revised by H. H. Parker, Special Pub. 8, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beckwith, Martha</hi> W.</author>, <title>Kepelino's traditions of Hawaii</title>, Bull. 95, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bennett</hi>, W. C</author>, <title>Archaeology of Kauai</title>, Bull. 80, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Bloxam, Andrew</hi></author>, <title>Diary of Andrew Bloxam</title>, naturalist on the "<title>Blonde</title>"… 1824-25, Special Pub.. 10, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Hawaiian feather work</title>, Mem., vol. 1, no. 1, <date when="1899">1899</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Stone implements and stone work of the ancient Hawaiians</title>, Mem., vol. 1, no. 4, <date when="1902">1902</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n121" n="111"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Noteworthy Hawaiian stone implements</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 2, no. 1, <date when="1903">1903</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Additional notes on feather work</title>, Mem., vol. 1, no. 5, <date when="1903">1903</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Mat and basket weaving of ancient Hawaiians</title>, Mem., vol. 2, no. 1, <date when="1906">1906</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Old Hawaiian carvings</title>, Mem., vol. 2, no. 2, <date when="1906">1906</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>The ancient Hawaiian house</title>, Mem., vol. 2, no. 3, <date when="1908">1908</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Hawaiian curved adzes</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 4, no. 4, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Ka hana kapa: the making of bark-cloth in Hawaii</title>, Mem., vol. 3, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Brigham</hi>, W. T.</author>, <title>Additional notes on feather work</title>, Mem., vol. 7, no. 1, <date when="1918">1918</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Buck, Peter</hi> H.</author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author>), <title>Hawaiian shark-tooth implements</title>, Bull. 180, <biblScope>pp. 27-41</biblScope>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cartwright, Bruce</hi></author>, <title>Some aliis of the migratory period</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 10, no. 7, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Chappell</hi>, H. G.</author>, <title>Jaws and teeth of ancient Hawaiians</title>, Mem., vol. 9, no. 3, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Coulter</hi>, J. W.</author>, <title>Distribution of population and utilization of land and sea in Hawaii, 1853</title>, Bull. 88, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dickey</hi>, L. A.</author>, <title>String figures from Hawaii</title>: including some from <title>New Hebrides and Gilbert Islands</title>, Bull. 54, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>An archaeological survey of Haleakala</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 7, no. 11, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>The island of Lanai, a survey of native culture</title>, Bull. 12, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Nihoa and Necker Islands</title>, Bull. 53, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Emory</hi>, K. P.</author>, <title>Hawaiian tattooing</title> (in manuscript).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fornander, Abraham</hi></author>, <title>Hawaiian antiquities and folklore</title>, ser. 1-3, Mem., vols. 4-6, <date from="1916" to="1918">1916-1918</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C., <hi rend="sc">Pukui</hi>, M. K.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Livermore</hi>, K.</author>, <title>Outline of Hawaiian physical therapeutics</title>, Bull. 126, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Handy</hi>, E. S. C.</author>, <title>The Hawaiian planter</title>, vol. 1, Bull. 161, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Holman</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>Journal of Lucia Ruggles Holman</title>, Special Pub. 17, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hudson</hi>, A. E.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Hawaii</title> (unpublished manuscript).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Judd</hi>, H. P.</author>, <title>Hawaiian proverbs and riddles</title>, Bull. 77, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kamakau</hi>, S. M.</author>, <title>History of Hawaii</title>: period of early Kamehamehas. Translated and edited by M. W. Beckwith (unpublished manuscript).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kamakau</hi>, S. M.</author>, <title>Hawaiian traditional beliefs and customs</title>. Translated and edited by <editor>M. W. Beckwith and M. K. Pukui</editor> (unpublished manuscript).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kepelino</hi></author>, see Beckwith.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Luquiens</hi>, H. M.</author>, <title>Hawaiian art</title>, Special Pub. 18, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Malo, David</hi></author>, <title>Hawaiian antiquities</title>, Special Pub. 2, <date when="1903">1903</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">McAllister</hi>, J. G.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Oahu</title>, Bull. 104, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">McAllister</hi>, J. G.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Kahoolawe</title>, Bull. 115, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pukui</hi>, M. K.</author>, <title>The canoe making profession of ancient times</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 15, no. 13, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pukui</hi>, M. K.</author>, <title>Hawaiian beliefs and customs during birth, infancy, and childhood</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 16, no. 17, <date when="1942">1942</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Rice</hi>, W. H.</author>, <title>Hawaiian legends</title>, Bull. 3, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Roberts</hi>, H. H.</author>, <title>Ancient Hawaiian music</title>, Bull. 29, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Hawaiian nets and netting</title>, Mem., vol. 2, no. 1, <date when="1906">1906</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Walled fish traps of Pearl Harbor</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 4, no. 3, <date when="1909">1909</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, Index to "<title>The Polynesian Race</title>", by Abraham Fornander, with a brief memoir of Judge Fornander by W. D. Alexander, Special Pub. 4, <date when="1909">1909</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Notes on Hawaiian petroglyphs</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 4, no. 4, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stokes</hi>, J. F. G.</author>, <title>Fish poisoning in the Hawaiian Islands</title>, Occ. Papers, vol. 7, no. 10, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sullivan</hi>, L. R.</author>, <title>Observations on Hawaiian somatology</title>, Mem., vol. 9, pt. 4, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Hawaiian arts and crafts</title> (in preparation).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Walker</hi>, W. M.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Maui</title> (unpublished manuscript).</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Wissler, Clark</hi></author>, <title>Growth of children in Hawaii</title>; based on observations by Louis R. Sullivan, Mem., vol. 11, no. 2, <date when="1930">1930</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <pb xml:id="n122" n="112"/>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d20" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">Chatham Islands</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d20-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>The <name key="name-120136" type="place">Chatham Islands</name> are 536 miles east of Port Lyttleton in the South Island of New Zealand. The main island is 31 miles long on the northern coast, but the other islands are rocky islets where the albatross and other seabirds breed. As the latitude is 43°48′ S., it is too cold for the sweet potato and other Polynesian food plants to grow. The bracken fern (<hi rend="i">Pteridium aquilinum</hi>) is abundant, and the rhizome furnished starchy food as it did in New Zealand. The <hi rend="i">karaka</hi> (<hi rend="i">Corynocarpus laevigata</hi>) was also present, and the cooked kernels of the berries provided an important food.</p>
            <p>The people and the language were Polynesian. Some statements as to Melanesian affinities are disproved by the skeletal material. Native traditions indicate that the island was settled before the later Maori migration to New Zealand in approximately 1350. The material culture has much in common with that of the South Island Maoris. There were no domestic animals. Fish, shell-fish, and wild fowl abounded. Suitable trees for canoes were lacking, and the people were reduced to making rafts from bundles of the dry flower stalks of the native flax. The last full-blooded Moriori, as the natives were termed, died some years ago, but intermarriage had taken place with the Maori invaders of 1837 and their descendants.</p>
            <p>The first European visitor was <name type="person" key="name-134360">Lieutenant W. R. Broughton</name> in command of the tender <hi rend="i">Chatham</hi> in 1791. The <hi rend="i">Chatham</hi> had become separated from Vancouver's ship <hi rend="i">Discovery</hi> on the voyage from New Zealand to Tahiti. Broughton's log, which is also included in the account of Vancouver's voyage, gives an excellent firsthand account of the natives. Later material was collected by <name type="person" key="name-209223">Alexander Shand</name> who lived on the island for many years; a valuable study on the skeletal material was made by Professor Scott; and, after studying the Moriori artifacts in British and New Zealand museums, <name type="person" key="name-209263">H. D. Skinner</name> visited the island and wrote a valuable memoir on the native culture. Information contributed by <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name>, <name key="name-121391" type="person">Tregear</name>, <name key="name-209488" type="person">Travers</name>, and others in various articles has been incorporated by Skinner in his work. After a second visit, Skinner collaborated with <name type="person" key="name-405070">William Baucke</name>, an old resident, and a joint work was published by Bishop Museum.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d20-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on Chatham Islands</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d20-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item>Broughton (1791-1792)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Vancouver</hi> (1791-1795)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d20-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Duff, Roger</hi> S.</author>, <title>A Moriori plaited textile</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Records, vol. 1, no. 1, <biblScope>pp. 61-67</biblScope>, <date when="1942">1942</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Scott, John</hi> H.</author>, <title>Contribution to the osteology of the aborigines of New Zealand and the Chatham Islands</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 1-64</biblScope>, <date when="1893">1893</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shand, Alexander</hi></author>, <title>The Moriori people of the Chatham Islands</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Mem., vol. 2, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1911">1911</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n123" n="113"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d20-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head>Bishop Museum Publications</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>The Morioris of Chatham Islands</title>, Mem., vol. 9, no. 1, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">cBaucke, William</hi></author>, <title>The Morioris</title>, Mem., vol. 9, no. 5, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d21" type="section">
          <head>
            <hi rend="sc">New Zealand</hi>
          </head>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d21-d1" type="preamble">
            <p>New Zealand, which forms the southern angle of the Polynesian ethnographic triangle, is between latitudes 34° 30′ and 47°30′ S. and longitudes 166°36' and 178°36' E. It consists of the North and South Islands and small Stewart Island at the southern end. The area is 104,403 square miles, well watered, well wooded, and with fertile soil. The climate ranges from subtropical in the north to ice and snow in the south. The endemic plants include three with edible berries in sufficient quantity to be of economic value, the tree fern with edible pith, and the bracken fern with rhizomes rich in carbohydrate food. Large forest trees provide fine timber. The native flax (<hi rend="i">Phormium tenax</hi>) has long, broad leaves rich in fiber. The forests abound in bird life, the rivers and streams in eels and fresh-water fish, and the coastal beaches and reefs provide shellfish in abundance.</p>
            <p>The native inhabitants, termed Maori, have traditions of an early settlement of people without cultivated food plants and a later settlement in the fourteenth century by people from central Polynesia (Hawaiki) who introduced the sweet potato, taro, yam, paper mulberry, and the dog. It is probable that they brought all the tropical food plants and that the coconut, breadfruit, and banana failed to survive in the cold climate. The Maori culture was based on the culture of central Polynesia in religion, social organization, and material culture, but local adjustments had to be made in houses and clothing to meet the change in climate. The native flax took the place of pandanus for mats and baskets and the fiber was used in a local form of finger weaving to make clothing. The timber was so large that wide hulls could be made for canoes which did not need outriggers to give them balance. The frequent intertribal wars which occurred as the population increased led to fortified villages on hill tops or other places where the terrain aided defense. The rich supply of forest birds and fresh water eels led to many local inventions for procuring supplies and preserving them. The arts of carving and tattooing assumed a development not approached elsewhere in Polynesia. In the course of time, the Maoris have become a strong virile people, which is rapidly assimilating the best in British culture while still clinging tenaciously to the best of the old.</p>
            <p>The European discoverer of New Zealand was <name type="person" key="name-034630">Abel Tasman</name> (1642), but he did not land because of an attack on one of his boats while it was passing between his two ships anchored in Golden Bay. In 1769, <name key="name-207700" type="person">Cook</name> found New Zealand a convenient place to call and obtain refreshment for his men. He surveyed the islands, and his observations on the people are an invaluable source of information. The French voyager, <name key="name-209367" type="person">Surville</name>, visited the North Island at the <pb xml:id="n124" n="114"/>same time but he and Cook never met. Cook visited New Zealand on his other two voyages. A number of other early voyagers are listed in the literature and they all contributed something to ethnology.</p>
            <p>The <name key="name-200092" type="organisation">Church Missionary Society</name> of the Anglican Church established a mission at <name key="name-121333" type="place">Paihia</name> in the Bay of Islands after a visit by <name type="person" key="name-208673">Samuel Marsden</name> in 1814. The Maori language was reduced to writing, and the Maoris learned to read and write. The scriptures were translated, and the Maori Bible is a work of the greatest literary merit. Of the many missionaries who contributed to knowledge of Maori culture, mention may be made of <name type="person" key="name-207684">William Colenso</name>, <name type="person" key="name-209410">Richard Taylor</name>, J. W. Stack, and <name type="person" key="name-209685">J. F. H. Wohlers</name>. The Maori dictionary was first compiled by a member of the Williams family and was revised and enlarged by two successive generations, all of whom occupied the high ecclesiastical position of Bishop of the Diocese of Waiapu.</p>
            <p>Of government officials, <name type="person" key="name-208095">Sir George Grey</name>, one time Governor of New Zealand, induced various Maori chiefs to dictate their versions of legends and traditions and a selected series was published in 1854, under the title of the "Mythology and traditions of the New Zealanders." The Maori text was published separately as "Nga mahinga." The English translation contains some errors and important passages were omitted. A number of untranslated songs and chants were published under the title of "Nga moteatea." The New Zealand Government also commissioned <name type="person" key="name-209610">John White</name> to compile information from the various Maori tribes, and his work, entitled the "<name key="name-204323" type="work">Ancient History of the Maori</name>", was published in six volumes with an additional volume of poor illustrations in 1887-1891. The work is good, in that the tribal sources are given, but the author's technique of splitting proper names into various combinations of syllables with different meanings for the same name is irritating to the student. Among other early writers whose works are worth looking at, are <name key="name-207265" type="person">Angas</name>, <name key="name-208989" type="person">Polack</name>, <name key="name-111505" type="person">Shortland</name>, and Thomson.</p>
            <p>The annual <name key="name-206299" type="work">Transactions of the New Zealand Institute</name>, now the <name key="name-123215" type="organisation">Royal Society of New Zealand</name>, formed a medium through which many valuable papers on anthropology were published. <name type="person" key="name-207684">William Colenso</name> was a notable contributor to the early volumes and <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name> to the later ones.</p>
            <p>The Polynesian Society (p. 40) has been a most important factor in encouraging the recording of material which otherwise would have been lost. <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name>, <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name>, <name type="person" key="name-121391">Edward Tregear</name>, and <name type="person" key="name-208105">W. E. Gudgeon</name> were indefatigable members who not only contributed to the pages of the journal, but encouraged and induced others to write. Many Maoris contributed articles in their own tongue, and the native texts with translations have enriched the material saved from oblivion.</p>
            <p>Of Maori contributors, the most outstanding is <name key="name-209425" type="person">Te Matorohanga</name>, who, having graduated from his tribal house of learning, was persuaded by his tribe to give a course of lectures on Maori lore in 1861. Notes were taken and <choice><orig>tran-<pb xml:id="n125" n="115"/>scribed</orig><reg>transcribed</reg></choice> with the assistance of the lecturer. Years later, a copy of the manuscript was made available to <name type="person" key="name-209282">Percy Smith</name> and <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name>. Smith published some of the Maori text, with his translation, in the <name key="name-121698" type="work">Polynesian Journal</name> under the title of the "Lore of the Whare wananga." Though both Smith and Best set a high value on the material as emanating from an ancient school, a careful analysis of the work indicates that either <name key="name-209425" type="person">Te Matorohanga</name> or his recorder <name key="name-208365" type="person">Te Whatahoro</name>, interpolated accounts from other tribes and indulged in a good deal of rationalization. The accounts of events which took place in central Polynesia over six centuries ago are too full of details to be entirely accurate.</p>
            <p>Smith and Best were the two greatest contributors to Maori ethnology. Smith devoted himself primarily to history and genealogies as a means of dating historical events. In his work on "<name key="name-204187" type="work">Hawaiki</name>", he used Polynesian genealogies extensively and concluded that the ancestors of the Maoris were in India in 450 B. C. Though his faith in the longer genealogies may not be shared by all, for the longer the genealogy the more uncertain it becomes, the genealogical method is worthy of consideration. <name key="name-207424" type="person">Best</name>'s work was based on long field work among the Urewera tribe, and his later years as ethnologist to the <name key="name-005372" type="organisation">Dominion Museum</name> gave him the opportunity of completing the fine series of bulletins and memoirs published by the Dominion Museum.</p>
            <p>The formation of the Board of Maori Ethnological Research, on the strong representation by the Maori Members of Parliament, was a forward step in encouraging research and providing funds for publication. Under its auspices, I made a field survey of the material culture of <name key="name-402116" type="place">Aitutaki</name> in the Cook Islands and the board published the report. The project of recording Maori songs was encouraged, and a large number of records await study by a musical expert. <name type="person" key="name-208832">Sir Apirana Ngata</name> engaged in recording the text of Maori songs, and preliminary leaflets were published in the Maori language newspaper, <hi rend="i">Te Toa Takitini</hi>, with an invitation to readers to give information regarding the composer, subject, origin, genealogies of characters mentioned, location of places named, meanings of obscure passages, and corrections to the text. Songs which had been attributed incorrectly to other tribes were traced to their true source through genealogies and the location of place references. The corrected versions with genealogies and copious annotations were published by the board in two volumes, entitled "Nga Moteatea," and a third volume is being prepared. The text of the two volumes was restricted to Maori as satisfactory translations might have delayed publication. However, Apirana is now engaged in translating, and instalments of native text with translations are appearing in the Polynesian Journal. The board has also published "The Changing Maori" by <name type="person" key="name-203011">Felix Keesing</name>, "Maori Artistry" by W. Page Rowe, and "Maori String Figures" by <name type="person" key="name-207252">J. C. Andersen</name>. The inclusion of Maori as a subject for the B.A. degree of the <name key="name-036401" type="organisation">New Zealand University</name> led the board to publish a revised and corrected version of <name type="person" key="name-208095">Sir George Grey</name>'s "Nga Mahinga" as a reading book in <pb xml:id="n126" n="116"/>Maori for students. The work was edited by the <name type="person" key="name-209644">Right Reverend H. W. Williams</name>, Bishop of Waiapu, the author of the last edition (5th) of Williams' "<name key="name-122722" type="work">Maori Dictionary</name>."</p>
            <p><name key="name-036860" type="organisation">The University of Otago</name> was the first to offer anthropology as a subject in its curriculum, appointing <name type="person" key="name-209263">H. D. Skinner</name> to its faculty. Much field work has been done by his students in excavating old Maori village sites, and some of the larger museums have carried out archaeological research with excellent results. <name type="person" key="name-207378">Ernest Beaglehole</name>, an experienced anthropologist, has been appointed to the staff of Victoria College, and he has been conducting studies on modern Maori village life. The appointment of ethnologists to the staffs of the four leading museums, in Auckland, Wellington, Canterbury, and Dunedin, has led to considerable activity in the study of museum material and the papers published are adding materially to a more exact knowledge of the Maori arts and crafts.</p>
            <p>The amount of literature on New Zealand is extensive, but the individual contributors and the field covered may be seen from the following list.</p>
          </div>
          <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d21-d2" type="section">
            <head>
              <hi rend="lsc">Literature on New Zealand</hi>
            </head>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d21-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head>Early Voyagers</head>
              <list>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1768-1771)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1772-1775)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Cook</hi> (1776-1780)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Crozet</hi> (1771-1772)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">D'entrecasteaux</hi> (1791-1793)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dillon</hi> (1827-1828)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont d'urville</hi> (1826-1829)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Dumont d'urville</hi> (1837-1840)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Duperry</hi> (1822-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Du Petct-Thouars</hi> (1836-1839)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Labillardière</hi> (1791-1793)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Lesson</hi> (1822-1825)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Surville</hi> (1769-1770)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Tasman</hi> (1642-1643)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Turnbull</hi> (1800-1804)</item>
                <item><hi rend="sc">Wilkes</hi> (1838-1842)</item>
              </list>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-body-d8-d21-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head>Other Writers</head>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andersen</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>Maori string figures, Board Maori Ethnol</title>. Res., Mem. 2, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andersen</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>Maori music with its Polynesian background</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 10, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andersen</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>Maori religion</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 513-555</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Andersen</hi>, J. C.</author>, <title>Maori place names</title>, also personal names, and names of colours, weapons, and natural objects: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Mem., vol. 20, <date when="1942">1942</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Angas</hi>, J. F.</author>, <title>Savage life and scenes in Australia and New Zealand</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1847">1847</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Archey, Gilbert</hi></author>, <title>Wood carving in the North Auckland area</title>: <publisher>Auckland Inst. and Mus.</publisher>, Records, vol. 1, <biblScope>pp. 209-218</biblScope>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Archey, Gilbert</hi></author>, <title>Evolution of certain Maori carving patterns</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 42, <biblScope>pp. 171-190</biblScope>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Archey, Gilbert</hi></author>, <title>Maori carving patterns</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 45, <biblScope>pp. 49-62</biblScope>, <date when="1936">1936</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author>, <title>New Zealand anthropology to-day</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 46, <biblScope>pp. 154-172</biblScope>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author>, <title>Anthropology in New Zealand</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 47, <biblScope>pp. 152-162</biblScope>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beaglehole, Ernest</hi></author>, <title>The Polynesian Maori</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 39-68</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n127" n="117"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Beattie</hi>, H.</author>, <title>Traditions and legends collected from the natives of Murihiku</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 24, <biblScope>pp. 98-112</biblScope>, <biblScope>130-139</biblScope>; vol. 25, <biblScope>pp. 9-17</biblScope>, <biblScope>53-65</biblScope>, <biblScope>89-98</biblScope>; vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 75-86</biblScope>, <biblScope>106-110</biblScope>; vol. 27, <biblScope>pp. 137-161</biblScope>; vol. 28, <biblScope>pp. 42-51</biblScope>, <biblScope>152-159</biblScope>, <biblScope>212-225</biblScope>; vol. 29, <biblScope>pp. 128-138</biblScope>, <biblScope>189-198</biblScope>; vol. 31, <biblScope>pp. 134-144</biblScope>, <biblScope>193-197</biblScope>; <date from="1915" to="1922">1915-1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The art of the Whare pora [clothing]</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 31, <biblScope>pp. 625-658</biblScope>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Notes on the art of war</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 11, <biblScope>pp. 11-41</biblScope>, <biblScope>47-75</biblScope>, <biblScope>127-162</biblScope>, <biblScope>219-246</biblScope>; vol. 12, <biblScope>pp. 32-50</biblScope>, <biblScope>65-84</biblScope>, <biblScope>145-165</biblScope>, <biblScope>193-217</biblScope>; vol. 13, <biblScope>1-19</biblScope>, <biblScope>73-82</biblScope>; <date from="1902" to="1904">1902-1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Maori medical lore</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 13, <biblScope>pp. 213-237</biblScope>; vol. 14, <biblScope>pp. 1-23</biblScope>; <date when="1904">1904</date>, <date when="1905">1905</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Maori eschatology [death]</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 38, <biblScope>pp. 148-239</biblScope>, <date when="1905">1905</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The stone implements of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 4, <date when="1912">1912</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Maori storehouses and kindred structures</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 5, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Some aspects of Maori myth and religion</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 1, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Spiritual and mental concepts of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 2, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Astronomical knowledge of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 3, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Maori division of time</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 4, <date when="1922">1922</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian voyagers</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 5, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The Maori school of learning</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Mem. 6, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The Maori, vols. 1-2</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Mem., vol. 5, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Maori religion and mythology, part 1</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 10, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The Maori canoe</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 7, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Games, exercises, and pastimes of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 8, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The Maori system of agriculture</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 9, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The Maori pa [fortified village]</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 6, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Fishing methods and devices of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 12, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>The Whare Kohanga [maternity house] and its lore</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 13, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Forest lore of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 14, <date when="1942">1942</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Best, Elsdon</hi></author>, <title>Maori religion and mythology, part 2</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Bull. 11, in press.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Chapman</hi>, F. R.</author>, <title>On the working of greenstone or nephrite by the Maoris</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 24, <biblScope>pp. 479-539</biblScope>, <date when="1891">1891</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Colenso, William</hi></author>, <title>On the Maori races of New Zealand</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 1, Last essay, <biblScope>pp. 1-76</biblScope>, <date when="1868">1868</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cowan, James</hi></author>, <title>The Maoris of New Zealand</title>, <pubPlace>Christchurch</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cowan, James</hi></author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Pomare, Maui</hi></author>, <title>Legends of the Maori</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1930">1930</date>, <date when="1934">1934</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Cruise</hi>, R. A.</author>, <title>Journal of a ten months' residence in New Zealand</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1823">1823</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Dodge</hi>, E. S.</author>, <title>The New Zealand collection in the Peabody Museum of Salem</title>, <pubPlace>Salem</pubPlace>, <date when="1941">1941</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Downes</hi>, T. W.</author>, <title>Notes on eels and eel-weirs (tuna and pa-tuna)</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 50, <biblScope>pp. 296-316</biblScope>, <date when="1918">1918</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Downes</hi>, T. W.</author>, <title>Maori rat-trapping devices</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 35, <biblScope>pp. 228-234</biblScope>, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Downes</hi>, T. W.</author>, <title>Bird snaring, etc., in the Whanganui River district</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 37, <biblScope>pp. 1-29</biblScope>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Duff, Roger</hi> S.</author>, <title>Maori stone "axes"</title>: <publisher>Canterbury Mus.</publisher>, Records, vol. 4, no. 5, <biblScope>pp. 249-253</biblScope>, <date when="1939">1939</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Duff, Roger</hi> S.</author>, <title>A cache of adzes from Motukarara</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 285-302</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Duff, Roger</hi> S.</author>, <title>Moa hunters of the Wairau</title>: <publisher>Canterbury Mus.</publisher>, Records, vol. 5, no. 1, <biblScope>pp. 1-49</biblScope> and 16 plates, <date when="1942">1942</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n128" n="118"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Duff, Roger</hi> S.</author>, <title>First records of the maro in the New Zealand area</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 52, <biblScope>pp. 212-215</biblScope>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fairchild</hi>, F. G.</author>, <title>Maori fish-hooks from Manakau Heads, Auckland</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 42, <biblScope>pp. 145-155</biblScope>, <date when="1933">1933</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fairchild</hi>, F. G.</author>, <title>A necklace of human teeth</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 46, <biblScope>pp. 130-133</biblScope>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Firth</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>Primitive economics of the New Zealand Maori</title>, <pubPlace>New York</pubPlace>, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Firth</hi>, R. W.</author>, <title>Maori canoe-sail in the British Museum</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 40, <biblScope>pp. 129-140</biblScope>, <date when="1931">1931</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fisher</hi>, V. F.</author>, <title>The material culture of Oruarangi, Matatoki, Thames</title>: <publisher>Auckland Inst. and Mus.</publisher>, Records, 1, <title>Bone ornaments and implements</title>, vol. 1, no. 5, <biblScope>pp. 275-286</biblScope>, <date when="1934">1934</date>; 2, <title>Fish hooks</title>, vol. 1, no. 6, <biblScope>pp. 287-300</biblScope>, <date when="1935">1935</date>; 3, <title>Stone implements and ornaments</title>, vol. 2, no. 1, <biblScope>pp. 15-27</biblScope>, <date when="1936">1936</date>; 4, <title>Musical instruments</title>, vol. 2, no. 2, <biblScope>pp. 111-118</biblScope>, <date when="1937">1937</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Fisher</hi>, V. F.</author>, <title>Maori decorated sinkers</title>: <publisher>Auckland Inst. and Mus.</publisher>, Records, vol. 1, no. 3, <biblScope>pp. 163-167</biblScope>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Goldie</hi>, W. H.</author>, <title>Maori medical lore</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 37, <biblScope>pp. 1-120</biblScope>, <date when="1904">1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Grey, George</hi></author>, <title>Ko nga moteatea me nga hakirara o nga Maori [songs and chants]</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1853">1853</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Grey, George</hi></author>, <title>Nga mahinga a nga tupuna Maori [traditions]</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1854">1854</date>. (A <edition>second edition</edition> was printed in <pubPlace>Auckland</pubPlace> in <date when="1885">1885</date>. A <edition>third edition</edition>, revised and corrected by H. W. Williams was published by the <publisher>Board of Maori Ethnological Research</publisher> as volume 1 of its Maori texts, <pubPlace>New Plymouth</pubPlace>, <date when="1928">1928</date>.)</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Grey, George</hi></author>, <title>Mythology and traditions of the New Zealanders</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1854">1854</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Grey, George</hi></author>, <title>Polynesian mythology and ancient traditional history of the New Zealanders</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1855">1855</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gudgeon</hi>, T. W.</author>, <title>The history and doings of the Maori</title>, <pubPlace>Auckland</pubPlace>, <date when="1885">1885</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gudgeon</hi>, W. E.</author>, <title>Maori religion</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 14, <biblScope>pp. 107-130</biblScope>, <date when="1905">1905</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Gudgeon</hi>, W. E.</author>, <title>The Maori tribes of the east coast of New Zealand</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 3, <biblScope>pp. 208-219</biblScope>; vol. 4, <biblScope>pp. 17-32</biblScope>, <biblScope>117-182</biblScope>; vol. 5, <biblScope>pp. 1-12</biblScope>, <biblScope>177-186</biblScope>; <date from="1894" to="1896">1894-1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Hamilton</hi>, A.</author>, <title>Maori art</title>, <pubPlace>Dunedin</pubPlace>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Keesing, Felix</hi></author>, <title>The changing Maori</title>: <publisher>Board of Maori Ethnol</publisher>. Res., vol. 4, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Kelly</hi>, L. G.</author>, <title>Some problems in the study of Maori genealogies</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 235-242</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Knapp</hi>, F. V.</author>, <title>Canoe-buildling tools of the Tasman Bay Maoris</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 33, <biblScope>pp. 103-113</biblScope>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Lockerbie, Leslie</hi></author>, <title>Excavation at King's Rock, Otago</title>, with a discussion of the fish-hook barb as an ancient feature of <title>Polynesian culture</title>: <publisher>Polynesian So.c, Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 393-446</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Manning</hi>, F. E.</author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Pakeha Maori</hi></author>), <title>Old New Zealand</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1876">1876</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ngata, Apirana</hi> T.</author>, <title>Nga moteatea [songs]</title>: <publisher>Board of Maori Ethnol. Res.</publisher>, Parts 1-2, <pubPlace>Hastings</pubPlace>, <date when="1928">1928</date>, <date when="1929">1929</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ngata, Apirana</hi> T.</author>, Notes on Rev. H. Williams' paper on "<title>The Maori Whare</title>": <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 6, <biblScope>pp. 85-88</biblScope>, <date when="1897">1897</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Phillips</hi>, W. J.</author>, <title>Carved meeting houses of the eastern district of the North Island</title>: <publisher>Dominion Mus.</publisher>, Records, vol. 1, no. 2, <biblScope>pp. 69-119</biblScope>, <date when="1944">1944</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Polack</hi>, J. S.</author>, <title>Manners and customs of the New Zealanders</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1840">1840</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Pomare, Maui</hi></author>, See Cowan and Pomare.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Ranapiri</hi>, T.</author>, <title>Ancient method of bird snaring</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 4, <biblScope>pp. 132-151</biblScope>, <date when="1895">1895</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Robley</hi>, H. G.</author>, <title>Moko or Maori tattooing</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Roth</hi>, H. <hi rend="sc">Ling</hi></author>, <title>The Maori mantle</title>, <pubPlace>Halifax</pubPlace>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Rowe</hi>, W. <hi rend="sc">Page</hi></author>, <title>Maori artistry</title>: <publisher>Board Maori Ethnol. Res.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 3, <date when="1928">1928</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Scott, John</hi> H.</author>, <title>Contribution to the osteology of the aborigines of New Zealand and the Chatham Islands</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 26, <biblScope>pp. 1-64</biblScope>, <date when="1893">1893</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n129" n="119"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shapiro</hi>, H. L.</author>, <title>The physical anthropology of the Maori-Moriori</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 49, <biblScope>pp. 1-18</biblScope>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Shortland, Edward</hi></author>, <title>Traditions and superstitions of the New Zealanders</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1840">1840</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>Culture areas in New Zealand</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 30, <biblScope>pp. 71-78</biblScope>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>The origin and relationship of Maori material culture</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 33, <biblScope>pp. 229-243</biblScope>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>Archaeology of Canterbury, Moa-bone Point Cave</title>: <publisher>Canterbury Mus.</publisher>, Rec, vol. 2: no. 3, <biblScope>pp. 93-104</biblScope>; no. 4, <biblScope>pp. 151-162</biblScope>, <date when="1923">1923</date>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>Maori adzes, axes, chisels and gouges from the Murihiku region, New Zealand</title>: 3rd Congress of Prehistorians of the Far East, Proc, <pubPlace>Singapore</pubPlace>, <biblScope>pp. 142-172</biblScope>, <date when="1938">1938</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>Maori amulets in stone, bone, and shell</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc</publisher>, Jour., vol. 41, <biblScope>pp. 202-211</biblScope>, <biblScope>302-309</biblScope>; vol. 42, <biblScope>pp. 1-9</biblScope>, <biblScope>107-113</biblScope>, <biblScope>191-203</biblScope>, <biblScope>310-320</biblScope>; vol. 43, <biblScope>pp. 25-29</biblScope>, <biblScope>106-117</biblScope>, <biblScope>198-215</biblScope>, <biblScope>271-279</biblScope>; vol. 44, <biblScope>pp. 17-25</biblScope>; vol. 45, <biblScope>pp. 127-141</biblScope>; vol. 52, <biblScope>pp. 132-152</biblScope>; <date from="1932" to="1936">1932-1936</date>, <date when="1943">1943</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <title>A classification of the fish hooks of Murihiku</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 51, <biblScope>pp. 256-286</biblScope>, <date when="1942">1942</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Skinner</hi>, H. D.</author>, <hi rend="sc">and</hi><author><hi rend="sc">Teviotdale</hi>, D.</author>, <title>A classification of implements of quartzite and similar materials from the moa-hunter camp at Shag River mouth</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 36, <biblScope>pp. 180-193</biblScope>, <date when="1927">1927</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>Hawaiki, the whence of the Maori</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>The peopling of the North</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 6, Supplement <biblScope>pp. 1-108</biblScope>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>Maori wars of the nineteenth century …</title>, <edition>2d ed.</edition>, <pubPlace>Christchurch</pubPlace>, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>History and traditions of the Maoris of the west coast, North Island of New Zealand, prior to 1840</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc.</publisher>, Mem., vol. 1, <date when="1910">1910</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Smith</hi>, S. <hi rend="sc">Percy</hi></author>, <title>The Lore of the Whare-wananga or teachings of Maori college</title>, pt. 1, Te Kauwae-runga, or "<title>Things Celestial</title>"; pt. 2, Te Kauwae-raro or "<title>Things terrestrial</title>": <publisher>Polynesian Soc.</publisher>, Mem., vols. 3, 4, <date when="1913">1913</date>, <date when="1915">1915</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Stack</hi>, J. W.</author>, <title>South Island Maoris</title>, <pubPlace>Christchurch</pubPlace>, <date when="1898">1898</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Sutherland</hi>, I. G.</author> (Editor), <title>The Maori people to-day [a general survey by various experts]</title>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1940">1940</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Taylor, Richard</hi></author>, <title>Te Ika a Maui or New Zealand and its inhabitants</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1855">1855</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Maori food supplies of Lake Rotorua</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 53, <biblScope>pp. 433-451</biblScope>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Maori decorative art, house panels</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 53, <biblScope>pp. 452-470</biblScope>, <date when="1921">1921</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Maori Somatology</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 31, <biblScope>pp. 37-44</biblScope>, <biblScope>145-153</biblScope>, <biblScope>159-170</biblScope>; vol. 32, <biblScope>pp. 21-28</biblScope>, <biblScope>189-199</biblScope>; <date when="1922">1922</date>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Maori plaited basketry and plaitwork</title>: 1, mats, baskets, and burden carriers: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 54, <biblScope>pp. 705-742</biblScope>, <date when="1923">1923</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>Maori plaited basketry and plaitwork</title>: 2, belts and bands, fire-fans and fly-flaps, sandals and sails: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 55, <biblScope>pp. 344-362</biblScope>, <date when="1924">1924</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>The coming of the Maori</title>: <publisher>Cawthron Inst.</publisher>, <date when="1925">1925</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>The Maori craft of netting</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst.</publisher>, Trans., vol. 56, <biblScope>pp. 597-646</biblScope>, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Te Rangi Hiroa</hi></author> (<author><hi rend="sc">Peter</hi> H. <hi rend="sc">Buck</hi></author>), <title>The evolution of Maori clothing</title>, Polynesian Soc., Mem., vol. 7, <date when="1926">1926</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Teviotdale, David</hi></author>, <title>The material culture of the Moa-hunters in Murihiku</title>: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 41, <biblScope>pp. 86-120</biblScope>, <date when="1932">1932</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Thomson, Arthur</hi> S.</author>, <title>The story of New Zealand</title>, vols. 1-2, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1859">1859</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Tregear, Edward</hi></author>, <title>The Maori Race</title>, <pubPlace>Wanganui</pubPlace>, <date when="1904">1904</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">White, John</hi></author>, <title>The ancient history of the Maori</title>, vols. 1-6, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date from="1887" to="1891">1887-1891</date>.</bibl>
              <pb xml:id="n130" n="120"/>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williams, Herbert</hi> W.</author>, <title>The Maori whare</title>: notes on the construction of a Maori house: <publisher>Polynesian Soc., Jour.</publisher>, vol. 5, <biblScope>pp. 145-154</biblScope>, <date when="1896">1896</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Williams, Herbert</hi> W.</author>, <title>A dictionary of the Maori language</title> (based upon the dictionaries of W. Williams and W. L. Williams), <edition>5th edition</edition>, <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>, <date when="1917">1917</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Wilson</hi>, J. A.</author>, <title>The story of Te Waharoa with sketches of ancient Maori life and history</title>, <pubPlace>Auckland</pubPlace>, <date when="1906">1906</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Wohlers</hi>, J. F. H.</author>, <title>The mythology and traditions of the Maori in New Zealand</title>: <publisher>New Zealand Inst</publisher>, Trans., vol. 7, <biblScope>pp. 3-53</biblScope>, <date when="1874">1874</date>.</bibl>
              <bibl><author><hi rend="sc">Yate, William</hi></author>, <title>An account of New Zealand</title>, <pubPlace>London</pubPlace>, <date when="1835">1835</date>.</bibl>
            </div>
          </div>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div xml:id="t1-body-d9" type="chapter">
        <head>
          <hi rend="c">Polynesian Outliers in Melanesia</hi>
        </head>
        <div xml:id="t1-body-d9-d1" type="preamble">
          <p>A number of marginal islands on the southern and eastern borders of the <name key="name-140020" type="place">Solomon Islands</name> and east of <name key="name-021362" type="place">New Ireland</name> are inhabited by people who show certain affinities with the Polynesians. Though these islands are outside the area of Polynesia, the history and culture of the people is of great interest to students of the Polynesians. Bishop Museum has been so occupied with Polynesia proper that it has not had the time to send expeditions to follow up the work already done in these islands. However, some of the main literature is cited, though the list does not profess to be exhaustive.</p>
          <p>Haddon in his work on Oceanic canoes enumerated the following islands, from southeast to northwest:</p>
          <list>
            <item>Tikopia</item>
            <item>Anuda (Cherry)</item>
            <item>Duff</item>
            <item>Rennell (Mo Ngava)</item>
            <item>Bellona (Mo Ngiki)</item>
            <item>Ndai?</item>
            <item>Sikiana (Stewart)</item>
            <item>Ontong Java (Lord Howe)</item>
            <item>Leuaniua</item>
            <item>Nukumanu (Tasman)</item>
            <item>Taku or Tauu (Marqueen)</item>
            <item>Kilinailau (Cartaret)</item>
            <item>Nissan (Sir Charles Hardy, Green)</item>
            <item>Tanga (Caens, Kaan)</item>
            <item>Nugeria (Abgarris, Fead)</item>
          </list>
          <p>Ray, in his study on Polynesian linguistics, also lists the Reef, or Swallow, Islands (Matema), and there are probably others.</p>
          <p>The local traditions of the various islands state that early settlers came in canoes from the Tonga, Samoa, Ellice, Gilbert, Marshall, and Caroline Islands. On the evidence, it seems that the southern islands received settlers from Polynesia and that the northerly islands received them from Micronesia. The present population of Kilinailau and Nissan were derived from the Melanesian population of Buka, but they have adopted the type of canoe, with Polynesian names for the parts, which was evidently used by the earlier population, which they overcame and absorbed.</p>
          <p>The non-Melanesians of most of the islands have a lighter complexion than the Melanesians, and their hair is predominantly wavy or curly but may range from straight to woolly. However, a study by Shapiro on the physical measurements and observations made by Hogbin in Ontong Java reveal that the physical characters of the inhabitants of that particular atoll have affinity with western Micronesia and not with Polynesia. Nukumanu, Taku, and Nugeria show <pb xml:id="n131" n="121"/>similar affinities. The presence of the loom in these northern outliers shows diffusion from the Carolines. Measurements from the southern outliers are needed.</p>
          <p>The speech of most of the groups are dialects of the Polynesian lang